WO2023066339A1 - 光学镜头、摄像模组及电子设备 - Google Patents

光学镜头、摄像模组及电子设备 Download PDF

Info

Publication number
WO2023066339A1
WO2023066339A1 PCT/CN2022/126430 CN2022126430W WO2023066339A1 WO 2023066339 A1 WO2023066339 A1 WO 2023066339A1 CN 2022126430 W CN2022126430 W CN 2022126430W WO 2023066339 A1 WO2023066339 A1 WO 2023066339A1
Authority
WO
WIPO (PCT)
Prior art keywords
lens
optical
image
optical lens
lenses
Prior art date
Legal status (The legal status is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the status listed.)
Ceased
Application number
PCT/CN2022/126430
Other languages
English (en)
French (fr)
Inventor
王伟
叶海水
张亚静
王恒
Current Assignee (The listed assignees may be inaccurate. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation or warranty as to the accuracy of the list.)
Huawei Technologies Co Ltd
Original Assignee
Huawei Technologies Co Ltd
Priority date (The priority date is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the date listed.)
Filing date
Publication date
Application filed by Huawei Technologies Co Ltd filed Critical Huawei Technologies Co Ltd
Priority to EP22882944.6A priority Critical patent/EP4400889A4/en
Priority to US18/703,163 priority patent/US20250224594A1/en
Publication of WO2023066339A1 publication Critical patent/WO2023066339A1/zh
Anticipated expiration legal-status Critical
Ceased legal-status Critical Current

Links

Images

Classifications

    • G—PHYSICS
    • G02—OPTICS
    • G02B—OPTICAL ELEMENTS, SYSTEMS OR APPARATUS
    • G02B13/00—Optical objectives specially designed for the purposes specified below
    • G02B13/001—Miniaturised objectives for electronic devices, e.g. portable telephones, webcams, PDAs, small digital cameras
    • G02B13/0015—Miniaturised objectives for electronic devices, e.g. portable telephones, webcams, PDAs, small digital cameras characterised by the lens design
    • G—PHYSICS
    • G02—OPTICS
    • G02B—OPTICAL ELEMENTS, SYSTEMS OR APPARATUS
    • G02B13/00—Optical objectives specially designed for the purposes specified below
    • G02B13/001—Miniaturised objectives for electronic devices, e.g. portable telephones, webcams, PDAs, small digital cameras
    • G02B13/0015—Miniaturised objectives for electronic devices, e.g. portable telephones, webcams, PDAs, small digital cameras characterised by the lens design
    • G02B13/002—Miniaturised objectives for electronic devices, e.g. portable telephones, webcams, PDAs, small digital cameras characterised by the lens design having at least one aspherical surface
    • G02B13/0045—Miniaturised objectives for electronic devices, e.g. portable telephones, webcams, PDAs, small digital cameras characterised by the lens design having at least one aspherical surface having five or more lenses
    • G—PHYSICS
    • G02—OPTICS
    • G02B—OPTICAL ELEMENTS, SYSTEMS OR APPARATUS
    • G02B9/00—Optical objectives characterised both by the number of the components and their arrangements according to their sign, i.e. + or -
    • G02B9/64—Optical objectives characterised both by the number of the components and their arrangements according to their sign, i.e. + or - having more than six components
    • G—PHYSICS
    • G03—PHOTOGRAPHY; CINEMATOGRAPHY; ANALOGOUS TECHNIQUES USING WAVES OTHER THAN OPTICAL WAVES; ELECTROGRAPHY; HOLOGRAPHY
    • G03B—APPARATUS OR ARRANGEMENTS FOR TAKING PHOTOGRAPHS OR FOR PROJECTING OR VIEWING THEM; APPARATUS OR ARRANGEMENTS EMPLOYING ANALOGOUS TECHNIQUES USING WAVES OTHER THAN OPTICAL WAVES; ACCESSORIES THEREFOR
    • G03B30/00—Camera modules comprising integrated lens units and imaging units, specially adapted for being embedded in other devices, e.g. mobile phones or vehicles

Definitions

  • the present application relates to the field of optical lenses, in particular to an optical lens, a camera module and electronic equipment.
  • variable apertures into portable terminal product camera modules, which can significantly improve image quality.
  • the structural size of the variable aperture to control the amount of light passing through the optical lens, the depth of field of the camera module can be controlled, and the background blur effect can be improved, thereby improving image quality and realizing "portrait mode" shooting, etc.
  • a variable aperture with a larger aperture value range will affect the thickness of the optical lens and affect the miniaturization of the optical lens.
  • An embodiment of the present application provides an optical lens, a camera module including the optical lens, and an electronic device including the camera module, aiming at achieving a good imaging effect while obtaining an optical lens with a small thickness And camera modules, and an electronic device with a small thickness.
  • the present application protects an optical lens.
  • the optical lens includes a diaphragm and at least seven lenses arranged in sequence from the object side to the image side.
  • the diaphragm is a variable diaphragm.
  • the aperture value of the diaphragm can be adjusted within the range of 1.2 to 5.0.
  • the optical lens satisfies the following relationship:
  • TTL is the optical total length of the optical lens
  • ImgH is the diagonal half length of the effective pixel area of the imaging surface of the optical lens
  • EPD is the entrance pupil diameter of the optical lens
  • CTmax is each lens in at least seven lenses on the optical axis
  • the maximum value of the thickness, CTmin is the minimum value of the thickness of each lens on the optical axis in at least seven lenses.
  • the application limits the ratio range of the total optical length to the product of the diagonal half-length of the effective pixel area of the imaging surface and the diameter of the entrance pupil of the optical lens, and limits the maximum value of the thickness of each lens on the optical axis in at least seven lenses to at least seven
  • the ratio range of the minimum value of the thickness of each lens on the optical axis in the sheet lens can ensure that the optical total length of the optical lens is the smallest enough, the imaging surface is large, and the aperture value variation range is large, which is conducive to the miniaturization of the optical lens and the improvement of imaging quality.
  • the optical lens satisfies the following relationship:
  • Tmax is the maximum value of the distance between any two adjacent lenses in the at least seven lenses
  • Tmin is the minimum value in the distance between any two adjacent lenses in the at least seven lenses.
  • This implementation mode is beneficial to the miniaturization of the optical lens by limiting the ratio range of the maximum value of the interval between any two adjacent lenses among the at least seven lenses to the minimum value of the interval between any two adjacent lenses among the at least seven lenses.
  • the optical lens satisfies the following relationship:
  • Dr5r10 is the distance on the optical axis from the object-side surface of the third lens to the image-side surface of the fifth lens.
  • the thickness of the third lens to the fifth lens is the largest and accounts for the largest proportion in the total length of the lens.
  • the at least seven lenses include a first lens, a second lens, a third lens, a fourth lens, a fifth lens, a sixth lens, and a seventh lens arranged in sequence from the object side to the image side, and the optical The lens satisfies the following relationship:
  • T12 is the distance between the first lens and the second lens on the optical axis
  • T23 is the distance between the second lens and the third lens on the optical axis
  • T34 is the distance between the third lens and the fourth lens on the optical axis.
  • Distance is the distance between the fourth lens and the fifth lens on the optical axis
  • T56 is the distance between the fifth lens and the sixth lens on the optical axis
  • T67 is the distance between the sixth lens and the seventh lens on the optical axis
  • BL is the distance from the image-side surface of the lens closest to the imaging surface to the imaging surface on the optical axis
  • Tmax is the maximum value of the distance between any two adjacent lenses among at least seven lenses.
  • This implementation method defines the ratio range of the maximum value of the interval between any two adjacent lenses among at least seven lenses to the interval between other two adjacent lenses, and the maximum value of the interval between any two adjacent lenses among the at least seven lenses and
  • the ratio range of the distance from the image-side surface of the lens closest to the imaging surface to the imaging surface on the optical axis is beneficial to the miniaturization of the optical lens.
  • the optical lens satisfies the following relationship:
  • f1 is the focal length of the first lens
  • f2 is the focal length of the second lens
  • f3 is the focal length of the third lens
  • f4 is the focal length of the fourth lens.
  • the sum of the reciprocals of the focal lengths of the first lens to the fourth lens between 0.1 and 0.15 (including 0.1 and 0.15)
  • the aperture value is 1.2
  • a large amount of light entering the lens through the aperture can be within the range of the first lens to 0.15.
  • the modulation of the fourth lens a better light-gathering effect can be achieved, and the imaging quality of the optical lens can be effectively improved.
  • the optical lens satisfies the following relationship:
  • f1 is the focal length of the first lens
  • f3 is the focal length of the third lens
  • f5 is the focal length of the fifth lens
  • f7 is the focal length of the seventh lens.
  • the sum of the reciprocals of the focal lengths of the first lens, the third lens, the fifth lens, and the seventh lens between 0.3 and 0.5 (including 0.3 and 0.5), it is beneficial to correct the aberration of the optical lens and balance the first lens.
  • the spherical aberration and chromatic aberration improve the imaging effect of the optical lens.
  • the optical lens satisfies the following relationship:
  • EFL is the focal length of the optical lens
  • f1 is the focal length of the first lens
  • f4 is the focal length of the fourth lens
  • fi is the focal length of the i-th lens.
  • the optical lens by limiting the ratio range of the focal length of the optical lens to the focal length of each lens, the ratio range of the focal length of the first lens to the focal length of each other lens, and the ratio range of the focal length of the fourth lens to the focal length of each other lens, it can Ensure that the optical lens has a good imaging quality in a scene with a large aperture.
  • the optical lens satisfies the following relationship:
  • R1 is the radius of curvature of the object-side surface of the first lens
  • R2 is the radius of curvature of the image-side surface of the first lens
  • R3 is the radius of curvature of the object-side surface of the second lens
  • R4 is the radius of curvature of the image-side surface of the second lens
  • R5 is the radius of curvature of the object-side surface of the third lens
  • R6 is the radius of curvature of the image-side surface of the third lens
  • R7 is the radius of curvature of the object-side surface of the fourth lens
  • R8 is the radius of curvature of the image-side surface of the fourth lens
  • R9 is The radius of curvature of the object-side surface of the fifth lens
  • R10 is the radius of curvature of the image-side surface of the fifth lens
  • R11 is the radius of curvature of the object-side surface of the sixth lens
  • R12 is the radius of curvature of the image-side surface of the sixth lens
  • R13
  • the optical lens can obtain a better imaging effect.
  • the optical lens satisfies that R1, R2, R3, R4, R5, and R6 are all greater than 0; at least one of R7 and R8 is greater than 0.
  • R1 , R2 , R3 , R4 , R5 , and R6 are all greater than 0, and at least one of R7 and R8 is greater than 0, so that the optical lens can obtain a better imaging effect.
  • the optical lens satisfies the following relationship:
  • Dr5r10 is the distance on the optical axis from the object-side surface of the third lens to the image-side surface of the fifth lens.
  • the thicknesses of the third lens to the fifth lens are the largest.
  • the third lens to the fifth lens account for the total optical length of the optical lens The ratio is the largest, which is conducive to the miniaturization of the optical lens, and further helps to realize the miniaturization of the camera module and electronic equipment.
  • the optical lens satisfies the following relationship:
  • Dmax is the maximum value of the clear aperture of the object-side surface or image-side surface of each lens in at least seven lenses
  • Dmin is the minimum of the clear aperture of the object-side surface or image-side surface of each lens in at least seven lenses. value.
  • This implementation mode is beneficial to the miniaturization of the optical lens by limiting the ratio range of the maximum value of the light aperture on the object-side surface or image-side surface of all lenses to the minimum value of the light aperture on the object-side surface or image-side surface of all lenses.
  • the optical lens satisfies the following relationship:
  • This implementation method limits the ratio range of the diameter of the entrance pupil of the optical lens to the maximum value of the light aperture on the object-side surface or image-side surface of all lenses, which is conducive to the miniaturization of the optical lens, and the variable range of the aperture value of the variable aperture is large. .
  • the object-side surfaces and image-side surfaces of all lenses in the optical lens are aspherical.
  • the aspherical surface has a higher degree of freedom in configuration and a better effect of eliminating aberrations, thereby reducing the total length of the optical lens, which is conducive to the miniaturization of the optical lens.
  • the optical lens satisfies the following relationship:
  • This implementation mode limits the ratio range of the maximum value of the interval between any two adjacent lenses in the at least seven lenses to the maximum value of the thickness of each lens on the optical axis in the at least seven lenses, which is beneficial to the miniaturization of the optical lens.
  • the optical lens satisfies the following relationship:
  • CT1 is the thickness of the first lens on the optical axis
  • MaxCT2L is the maximum thickness of the other lenses except the first lens among the at least seven lenses on the optical axis.
  • This implementation method limits the ratio range of the thickness of the first lens on the optical axis to the maximum value of the thickness on the optical axis of the other lenses except the first lens among the at least seven lenses, and the optical lens can be rationally configured through lenses of different materials , which is conducive to the miniaturization and manufacturability of optical lenses.
  • the optical lens satisfies the following relationship:
  • Vmax is the maximum dispersion coefficient among all the lenses of the optical lens
  • Vmin is the minimum dispersion coefficient among all the lenses of the optical lens
  • the dispersion coefficients of all the lenses of the optical lens are limited.
  • the dispersion coefficients of all the lenses of the optical lens satisfy the above relational expression, the ability of the optical lens to eliminate chromatic aberration can be effectively improved, and the imaging quality of the optical lens can be improved.
  • the material of each lens can be selected from resin material or glass material.
  • the optical lens satisfies the following relationship:
  • Nmax is the maximum refractive index among all the lenses of the optical lens
  • Nmin is the minimum refractive index among all the lenses of the optical lens
  • This implementation method limits the maximum refractive index and minimum refractive index of the lens of the optical lens.
  • each lens material can be selected from resin material or glass material. Reasonable configuration of different materials for the lens is beneficial to realize the miniaturization of the optical lens and the thinning of the electronic equipment.
  • the optical lens satisfies the following relationship:
  • the distance between the infinite object of the aperture of the STL optical lens and the imaging surface on the optical axis is the distance between the infinite object of the aperture of the STL optical lens and the imaging surface on the optical axis.
  • This implementation method limits the ratio range of the distance between the infinite distance object and the imaging surface on the optical axis of the diaphragm and the total optical length, so that the diaphragm can be set on the object side of the first lens, or it can be set on any two adjacent lenses between.
  • the present application also protects a camera module.
  • the camera module includes a photosensitive element and the above-mentioned optical lens, the photosensitive element is located on the image side of the optical lens and the imaging surface of the optical lens, and the optical lens is used to project ambient light to the photosensitive element.
  • the camera module with the above-mentioned optical lens has small size and good imaging effect.
  • the present application also protects an electronic device.
  • the electronic device includes an image processor and the above-mentioned camera module, the image processor and the camera module are connected in communication, the camera module is used to obtain image data and input the image data into the image processor, and the image processor is used to output the Image data is processed.
  • the electronic equipment with the above-mentioned camera module has a good photographing effect and can be miniaturized.
  • FIG. 1 is a schematic diagram of the back of an electronic device according to an embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 2 is a schematic diagram of the back of an electronic device according to another embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 3A is a schematic structural diagram of a camera module of the electronic device shown in FIG. 1;
  • Fig. 3B is a schematic structural view of the imaging surface of the camera module shown in Fig. 3A;
  • FIG. 4 is a partial structural schematic diagram of the camera module shown in FIG. 3A;
  • Fig. 5 is a schematic diagram of the position of the diaphragm of the camera module shown in Fig. 3A;
  • Fig. 6 is a top view structural diagram of the diaphragm of the structure shown in Fig. 3A;
  • Fig. 7 is a schematic diagram of axial chromatic aberration of the optical lens shown in Fig. 3A;
  • Fig. 8 is a schematic diagram of field curvature and optical distortion of the optical lens shown in Fig. 3A;
  • FIG. 9 is a schematic structural diagram of a camera module according to a second embodiment of the present application.
  • Fig. 10 is a schematic diagram of axial chromatic aberration of the optical lens shown in Fig. 9;
  • Fig. 11 is a schematic diagram of field curvature and optical distortion of the optical lens shown in Fig. 9;
  • FIG. 12 is a schematic structural diagram of a camera module according to a third embodiment of the present application.
  • Fig. 13 is a schematic diagram of axial chromatic aberration of the optical lens shown in Fig. 12;
  • Fig. 14 is a schematic diagram of field curvature and optical distortion of the optical lens shown in Fig. 12;
  • FIG. 15 is a schematic structural diagram of a camera module according to a fourth embodiment of the present application.
  • Fig. 16 is a schematic diagram of axial chromatic aberration of the optical lens shown in Fig. 15;
  • Fig. 17 is a schematic diagram of field curvature and optical distortion of the optical lens shown in Fig. 15;
  • FIG. 18 is a schematic structural diagram of a camera module according to a fifth embodiment of the present application.
  • Fig. 19 is a schematic diagram of axial chromatic aberration of the optical lens shown in Fig. 18;
  • Fig. 20 is a schematic diagram of field curvature and optical distortion of the optical lens shown in Fig. 18;
  • FIG. 21 is a schematic structural diagram of a camera module according to a sixth embodiment of the present application.
  • Fig. 22 is a schematic diagram of axial chromatic aberration of the optical lens shown in Fig. 21;
  • Fig. 23 is a schematic diagram of field curvature and optical distortion of the optical lens shown in Fig. 21;
  • FIG. 24 is a schematic structural diagram of a camera module according to a seventh embodiment of the present application.
  • Fig. 25 is a schematic diagram of axial chromatic aberration of the optical lens shown in Fig. 24;
  • Fig. 26 is a schematic diagram of field curvature and optical distortion of the optical lens shown in Fig. 24;
  • FIG. 27 is a schematic structural diagram of a camera module according to an eighth embodiment of the present application.
  • Fig. 28 is a schematic diagram of axial chromatic aberration of the optical lens shown in Fig. 27;
  • FIG. 29 is a schematic diagram of field curvature and optical distortion of the optical lens shown in FIG. 27 .
  • Focal length also known as focal length, refers to the distance along the optical axis from the main surface of the image side of the lens or lens group to the focal plane of the image side when the object forms a clear image in the image space through the lens or lens group.
  • the optical axis is a ray that passes perpendicularly through the center of an ideal lens.
  • the ideal convex mirror should be a point where all the light converges behind the lens, and this point where all the light converges is the focus.
  • Stop including aperture stop and field stop, where the aperture stop can limit the width of the imaging beam, determine the diameter of the entrance pupil of the optical system and the solid angle of the beam, and affect the optical The amount of light entering the system; the field diaphragm limits the field of view in which the object space can be imaged by the optical system.
  • the aperture value also known as the F number (Fno) is the relative value (reciprocal of the relative aperture) obtained from the focal length of the lens/the diameter of the entrance pupil of the lens.
  • the smaller the aperture value the more light can enter in the same unit time.
  • the smaller the aperture value the smaller the depth of field, and the background content of the photo will be blurred.
  • BFL Back Focal Length
  • Positive refractive power also known as positive refractive power, means that the lens has a positive focal length and has the effect of converging light.
  • Negative refractive power also known as negative refractive power, means that the lens has a negative focal length and has the effect of diverging light.
  • Total Track Length refers to the total length from the object side of the lens closest to the object side of the optical lens to the imaging surface, and is the main factor forming the height of the camera.
  • Dispersion coefficient namely Abbe number
  • Abbe number is used to express the index of the dispersion ability of transparent medium.
  • the larger the refractive index of the medium the smaller the Abbe number, and the more severe the dispersion; conversely, the smaller the medium's refractive index, the larger the Abbe number, and the slighter the dispersion.
  • the object side is bounded by the lens, and the side where the scene to be imaged is located is the object side.
  • the image side is bounded by the lens, and the side where the image of the scene to be imaged is located is the image side.
  • the object side, the surface of the lens near the object side is called the object side.
  • the image side, the surface of the lens near the image side is called the image side.
  • the side where the subject is located is the object side, and the surface of the lens close to the object side can be called the object side; with the lens as the boundary, the side where the image of the subject is located is the image side, and the lens is close to the image side
  • the surface of can be called the image side.
  • Axial chromatic aberration due to the dispersion characteristics of optical materials, there are differences in the magnification of different wavelengths of light, focusing on different points along the horizontal optical axis, axial chromatic aberration will cause color blurring before and after the focus position.
  • Distortion also known as distortion
  • distortion is the degree of distortion of the image formed by the optical system on the object relative to the object itself.
  • the height of the intersection point between the chief ray of different fields of view and the Gaussian image plane after passing through the optical system is not equal to the ideal image height, and the difference between the two is optical distortion.
  • Optical distortion changes the imaging position of the off-axis object point on the ideal surface, distorting the shape of the image, but does not affect the sharpness of the image.
  • ImgH (Image Hight) means half of the diagonal length of the effective pixel area on the photosensitive chip, that is, the image height of the imaging surface.
  • Entrance Pupil Diameter refers to the ratio of the focal length of the optical lens to the aperture F value.
  • Field of view in optical instruments, with the lens of the optical instrument as the apex, the angle formed by the two edges of the maximum range where the object image of the measured object can pass through the lens is called the field of view horn.
  • the size of the field of view determines the field of view of the optical instrument. The larger the field of view, the larger the field of view and the smaller the optical magnification.
  • Aberration refers to the inconsistency between the results obtained by non-paraxial ray tracing and the results obtained by paraxial ray tracing in the optical system, and the deviation from the ideal state of Gaussian optics (first-order approximation theory or paraxial ray) .
  • Aberrations are divided into two categories: chromatic aberration (or chromatic aberration) and monochromatic aberration (monochromatic aberration).
  • Chromatic aberration is due to the refractive index of the lens material is a function of wavelength. When light of different wavelengths passes through the lens, the aberration is caused by the different refractive index. Chromatic aberration can be divided into positional chromatic aberration and magnification chromatic aberration. Chromatic aberration is a kind of dispersion phenomenon.
  • the so-called dispersion phenomenon refers to the phenomenon that the speed of light or the refractive index in the medium changes with the wavelength of the light wave.
  • the dispersion that increases with the increase of wavelength can be called negative dispersion (or called negative anomalous dispersion).
  • Monochromatic aberration refers to the aberration that will occur even in highly monochromatic light. According to the effect produced, monochromatic aberration is divided into two categories: "blurring the image” and “distorting the image”; the former category has spherical Aberration (spherical aberration, may be referred to as spherical aberration), astigmatism (astigmatism), etc., the latter category includes field curvature (field curvature, may be referred to as field curvature), distortion (distortion), etc.
  • Aberration also includes coma, which refers to the monochromatic conical light beam sent to the optical system by an off-axis object point located outside the main axis. After being refracted by the optical system, it cannot form a clear point on the ideal plane. , but form a comet-shaped spot with a bright tail.
  • coma refers to the monochromatic conical light beam sent to the optical system by an off-axis object point located outside the main axis. After being refracted by the optical system, it cannot form a clear point on the ideal plane. , but form a comet-shaped spot with a bright tail.
  • FIG. 1 is a schematic diagram of the back of an electronic device according to an embodiment of the present application.
  • the electronic device 100 can be a mobile phone, a digital tablet, a laptop computer, a video camera, a video recorder, a camera, a smart TV, a network monitoring device, a somatosensory game console, a driving recorder, a reversing developing device, a wearable electronic device, a small unmanned aerial vehicle, a three-dimensional image Capturing devices or other forms of devices with camera or video functions.
  • the electronic device 100 in the embodiment shown in FIG. 1 is described by taking a mobile phone as an example.
  • the width direction of the electronic device 100 is the X axis.
  • the length direction of the electronic device 100 is the Y axis.
  • the thickness direction of the electronic device 100 is the Z axis. It can be understood that the setting of the coordinate system of the electronic device 100 can be flexibly set according to specific actual needs.
  • the electronic device 100 includes a camera module 1, an image processor 2 and a housing 3.
  • the camera module 1 and the image processor 2 are both housed inside the housing 3.
  • the housing 3 is provided with a light hole 31.
  • the light incident of the camera module 1 The side is opposite to the light hole 31 of the housing 3 .
  • the image processor 2 is communicatively connected with the camera module 1.
  • the camera module 1 is used for acquiring image data and inputting the image data into the image processor 2.
  • the image processor 2 is used for processing the output image data.
  • FIG. 1 is only a schematic structural diagram of an embodiment of the present application, and the structures of the camera module 1 , the image processor 2 and the housing 3 shown therein are only schematic.
  • the communication connection between the camera module 1 and the image processor 2 may include data transmission through electrical connections such as wires, or data transmission may be realized through coupling or the like. It can be understood that the communication connection between the camera module 1 and the image processor 2 can also be realized through other means capable of realizing data transmission.
  • the function of the image processor 2 is to optimize the digital image signal through a series of complex mathematical calculations, and finally transmit the processed signal to the display.
  • the image processor 2 can be a separate image processing chip or a digital signal processing chip (Digital Signal Processing, DSP), and its function is to promptly and quickly transmit the data obtained by the photosensitive element of the camera module 1 to the central processing unit and refresh the photosensitive Components, so the quality of the DSP chip directly affects the picture quality (such as color saturation, clarity, etc.).
  • DSP Digital Signal Processing
  • the image processor 2 can also be integrated in other chips (such as central processing chips).
  • the camera module 1 is disposed on the back of the electronic device 100 and is the rear lens of the electronic device 100 . It can be understood that, in some embodiments, the camera module 1 can also be arranged on the front of the electronic device 100 as a front lens of the electronic device 100 . Both the front camera and the rear camera can be used for taking selfies, or for the photographer to take pictures of other objects.
  • the plurality of camera modules 1 include a zoom camera module or a fixed-focus camera module, so as to achieve zoom shooting and fixed-focus shooting respectively.
  • the ordinary camera module can be applied in daily ordinary shooting
  • the zoom camera module can be applied in scenes requiring zoom shooting.
  • the installation position of the camera module 1 of the electronic device 100 in the embodiment shown in FIG. 1 is only schematic.
  • the camera module 1 can also be installed in other positions on the mobile phone, for example, the camera module 1 can be installed in the upper middle or the upper right corner of the back of the mobile phone.
  • the camera module 1 may not be arranged on the main body of the mobile phone, but on a part that is movable or rotatable relative to the mobile phone. For example, the part can extend, retract or rotate from the main body of the mobile phone. 1
  • the installation position is not limited in any way.
  • the electronic device 100 may further include an analog-to-digital converter 4 (also called an A/D converter).
  • the analog-to-digital converter 4 is connected between the camera module 1 and the image processor 2 .
  • the analog-to-digital converter 4 is used to convert the signal generated by the camera module 1 into a digital image signal and transmit it to the image processor 2, and then process the digital image signal through the image processor 2, and finally perform image or The image is displayed.
  • the electronic device 100 may also include a memory 5, which is communicatively connected to the image processor 2, and the image processor 2 processes the digital signal of the image and then transfers the image to the memory 5, so that it can be viewed later Images can be retrieved from storage at any time and displayed on the display.
  • the image processor 2 also compresses the processed image digital signal, and then stores it in the memory 5, so as to save space in the memory 5 .
  • FIG. 2 is only a schematic structural diagram of an embodiment of the present application, and the positions and structures of the camera module 1 , image processor 2 , analog-to-digital converter 4 , and memory 5 shown therein are only schematic.
  • FIG. 3A is a schematic structural diagram of the camera module 1 of the electronic device 100 shown in FIG. 1 .
  • the camera module 1 includes an optical lens 10 , a photosensitive element 20 , a driver (not shown in the figure) and a housing (not shown in the figure).
  • the casing includes a through hole and a receiving space, the through hole communicates with the receiving space, and the through hole is arranged opposite to the light passing hole 31 of the housing 3 , and the driver, the photosensitive element 20 and the optical lens 10 are all stored in the receiving space.
  • the photosensitive element 20 is located on the image side of the optical lens 10 and is located on the imaging surface of the optical lens 10 .
  • the driver is used to drive the components in the optical lens 10 to achieve focusing.
  • the light incident side of the optical lens 10 is set towards the through hole.
  • the working principle of the camera module 1 is: the light L reflected by the scene to be photographed passes through the optical lens 10 to generate an optical image and projects it onto the surface of the photosensitive element 20, and the photosensitive element 20 converts the optical image into an electrical signal. That is, the analog image signal S1 and the converted analog image signal S1 are transmitted to the analog-to-digital converter 4 to be converted into a digital image signal S2 by the analog-to-digital converter 4 to the image processor 2 .
  • the camera module 1 may not have a casing, and the photosensitive element 20 is fixed on a bracket or other structures.
  • the camera module 1 may also include a circuit board, the photosensitive element 20 is fixed on the circuit board by bonding or patching, and the analog-to-digital converter 4, the image processor 2, the memory 5, etc. are also bonded or The patch is fixed on the circuit board, so that the communication connection between the photosensitive element 20, the analog-to-digital converter 4, the image processor 2, the memory 5, etc. is realized through the circuit board.
  • the circuit board can be a flexible printed circuit board (flexible printed circuit, FPC) or a printed circuit board (printed circuit board, PCB), used to transmit electrical signals, wherein, the FPC can be a single-sided flexible board, a double-sided flexible board, a multi-layer flexible board board, rigid-flex board or flexible circuit board with hybrid structure, etc.
  • the photosensitive element 20 is a semiconductor chip, which contains hundreds of thousands to several million photodiodes on the surface. When it is irradiated by light, it will generate charges, which will be converted into digital signals by the analog-to-digital converter 4 chip.
  • the photosensitive element 20 can be a charge coupled device (charge coupled device, CCD), or a complementary metal-oxide semiconductor device (complementary metal-oxide semiconductor, CMOS).
  • CCD is made of a high-sensitivity semiconductor material, which can convert light into electric charge, and convert it into a digital signal through an analog-to-digital converter 4 chip.
  • CCD is composed of many photosensitive units, usually in megapixels.
  • CMOS is mainly a semiconductor made of two elements, silicon and germanium, so that N (negatively charged) and P (positively charged) semiconductors coexist on CMOS.
  • N (negatively charged) and P (positively charged) semiconductors coexist on CMOS.
  • the current generated by these two complementary effects It can be recorded and interpreted into images by processing chips.
  • the photosensitive target surface of the photosensitive element 20 is a super large target surface, that is to say, the photosensitive element 20 in this application can be understood as the photosensitive element 20 directly adopting a SLR camera.
  • the super-large photosensitive target surface of the photosensitive element 20 is beneficial to improve the imaging definition of the camera module 1 and comprehensively improve the imaging quality of the electronic device 100 (such as a mobile phone).
  • the photosensitive target surface of the photosensitive element 20 may also be a target surface with a smaller size, and the camera module 1 may select a photosensitive element 20 with a different size target surface according to needs.
  • the driving part is used to drive the relevant components of the optical lens 10 to achieve focusing or anti-shake of the optical lens 10 (or camera module 1 ).
  • the driving member may include one or more driving parts, through which relevant elements of the optical lens 10 can be driven to focus and/or optically stabilize.
  • the driving part drives the related components of the optical lens 10 to focus
  • the driving part drives the related components of the optical lens 10 to move relative to each other to achieve focusing.
  • the driving part drives the relevant components of the optical lens 10 to perform anti-shake
  • the relevant components of the optical lens 10 are driven by the driving part to move or rotate relative to the photosensitive element 20, and/or the relevant components of the optical lens 10 are driven to move or rotate relatively, so as to achieve optical anti-shake.
  • the driving part may be a driving structure such as a motor or an electric motor.
  • the camera module 1 may further include an infrared filter 30 , and the infrared filter 30 may be fixed on the circuit board and located between the optical lens 10 and the photosensitive element 20 .
  • the light passing through the optical lens 10 is irradiated onto the infrared filter 30 and transmitted to the photosensitive element 20 through the infrared filter 30 .
  • the infrared filter 30 can eliminate unnecessary light projected onto the photosensitive element 20, prevent the photosensitive element 20 from producing false colors or ripples, and improve its effective resolution and color rendition.
  • the infrared filter 30 can also be fixed on the end of the optical lens 10 facing the image side. Other components included in the camera module 1 will not be described in detail here.
  • an imaging correction element may be provided on the side of the optical lens 10 close to the imaging surface to achieve the effect of image correction (image curvature, etc.).
  • optical lens 10 The structure of the optical lens 10 and the setting of relevant optical parameters will be described in detail below in conjunction with the accompanying drawings.
  • the optical lens 10 affects the imaging quality and imaging effect, and it mainly utilizes the refraction principle of the lens to perform imaging, that is, the scene light forms a clear image on the imaging surface through the optical lens 10, and passes through the photosensitive element located on the imaging surface 20 Record the image of the scene.
  • the imaging surface refers to the plane where the scene is imaged after being imaged by the optical lens 10 .
  • the optical lens 10 includes a plurality of lenses arranged in sequence from the object side to the image side, and each lens cooperates to form an image with better imaging effect.
  • the object side refers to the side where the scene to be photographed is located
  • the image side refers to the side where the imaging plane is located.
  • the optical lens 10 is a fixed-focus lens.
  • the optical lens 10 may also be a zoom lens.
  • FIG. 3A only schematically shows some components of the optical lens 10 , and the actual shape, size and actual configuration of these components are not limited by FIG. 3A .
  • the optical lens 10 of the present application includes a lens barrel (not shown in the figure) and at least seven lenses arranged in sequence from the object side to the image side. At least seven lenses are sequentially installed in the lens barrel, and each lens is arranged along the optical axis A. Each lens includes an object side facing the object side and an image side facing the image side.
  • At least seven lenses include a first lens L1, a second lens L2, a third lens L3, a fourth lens L4, a fifth lens L5, a sixth lens L6 and a seventh lens L7.
  • at least seven lenses include a first lens L1, a second lens L2, a third lens L3, a fourth lens L4, a fifth lens L5, a sixth lens L6, a seventh lens L7 and an eighth lens L8 .
  • the number of lenses included in the optical lens 10 may also be other than eight, and multiple lenses may also be arranged coaxially or non-axially.
  • the optical lens 10 may not include a lens barrel.
  • the first lens L1 to the seventh lens L7 (or the eighth lens L8 ) can be installed in the casing of the camera module 1 .
  • the first lens L1 is disposed away from the side of the second lens L2 and faces the through hole, and the image side of the second lens L2 faces the photosensitive element 20 .
  • the optical lens 10 of this embodiment further includes a stop STO.
  • the aperture STO in this embodiment is a variable aperture, and the size of the variable aperture can be changed through the lens barrel with the fixed lens position, or the size of the aperture can be adjusted through external blades or other components, so that the aperture value can be adjusted at 1.2 It can be adjusted within the range of 5.0 (including 1.2 and 5.0) to realize multiple position features such as large aperture and small aperture.
  • the aperture value may be 1.2, 1.8, 2.5, 3.0, 4.8 or 5.0.
  • the optical lens 10 may not include a diaphragm.
  • the diaphragm STO is located on the side of the first lens L1 facing away from the second lens L2 , that is, the diaphragm STO is located on the object side of the first lens L1 . Since the aperture STO is a variable aperture, and the aperture value can vary from 1.2 to 5.0, it is more convenient for the aperture STO to adjust the aperture value by setting the aperture STO on the object side of the first lens L1. Certainly, in other implementation manners, the diaphragm STO may also be disposed between any adjacent two lenses from the second lens L2 to the last lens ( L7 or L8 ).
  • the aperture STO when the aperture value changes, the distance between the diaphragm STO and the lens will change.
  • the aperture STO when the aperture value is 1.2, the aperture STO is set on the object side of the first lens L1 and the distance between the first lens L1 and the first lens L1 is the first interval, and when the aperture value is 5.0, the aperture STO The distance between the object side of the first lens L1 and the first lens L1 is a second distance, wherein the second distance is larger than the first distance. That is to say, the larger the aperture value is, the farther the distance between the aperture STO and the first lens L1 is.
  • the diaphragm STO is set on the object side of the first lens L1, and the diaphragm STO will not be interfered by other lenses during the adjustment of the aperture value, compared to the second lens L2 to the last lens (L7 or L8) Between any two adjacent lenses, it is more convenient for the diaphragm STO to adjust the aperture value.
  • the diaphragm STO needs to move within a certain range during the process of adjusting the aperture value, if the diaphragm STO is set between any two adjacent lenses from the second lens L2 to the last lens (L7 or L8), the A sufficient movable distance for the diaphragm STO must be reserved between the two lenses, and a large movable distance will affect the overall dimming effect of the optical lens 10 .
  • the photosensitive element 20 of the super-large target surface and the variable aperture of the larger aperture value range will cause the thickness of the optical lens 10 to increase, that is, the thickness of the optical lens in the Z-axis direction will increase, which will affect the optical lens 10 and the camera module. Thinning of the set 1 and the electronic device 100 .
  • the present application reduces the thickness of the optical lens 10 by limiting the relevant parameters of each lens of the optical lens 10 , so as to ensure that the internal space of the electronic device 100 occupied by the camera module 1 is small enough to realize thinning of the electronic device 100 .
  • the solution of the present embodiment to realize miniaturization of the optical lens 10 is as follows.
  • the optical lens 10 satisfies the following relationship:
  • TTL is the total optical length of the optical lens
  • ImgH is the diagonal half length of the effective pixel area of the imaging surface of the optical lens
  • EPD is the entrance pupil diameter of the optical lens 10.
  • TTL/(ImgH ⁇ EPD) may be equal to 0.10, 0.23, 0.25, 0.5, 0.82, 0.94, 1.05 or 1.10.
  • the ratio range of the product of the total optical length to the diagonal half length of the effective pixel area of the imaging surface and the diameter of the entrance pupil of the optical lens 10 satisfies the above relational expression, it can ensure that the total optical length of the optical lens 10 is the smallest enough, and the imaging The surface is large, and the range of the aperture value is large, which is conducive to the miniaturization of the optical lens 10 and the improvement of imaging quality.
  • the ratio range of the total optical length to the product of the diagonal half length of the effective pixel area of the imaging surface and the diameter of the entrance pupil of the optical lens 10 may not be limited to the above limitation.
  • the optical lens 10 satisfies the following relationship:
  • CTmax is the maximum value of the thickness of each lens on the optical axis A in at least seven lenses
  • CTmin is the minimum value of the thickness of each lens in the at least seven lenses on the optical axis A.
  • the above relational formula specifies the ratio range of the maximum value of the thickness of each lens on the optical axis A in the at least seven lenses to the minimum value of the thickness of each lens in the at least seven lenses on the optical axis A.
  • the ratio range of the maximum value of the thickness of each lens on the optical axis A in at least seven lenses to the minimum value of the thickness of each lens in the at least seven lenses on the optical axis A satisfies the above relational expression, it is beneficial to optical Miniaturization of the lens 10.
  • the ratio range of the maximum value of the thickness of each lens on the optical axis A in the at least seven lenses to the minimum value of the thickness of each lens in the at least seven lenses on the optical axis A may not be limited to the above limitations. .
  • the optical lens 10 satisfies the following relationship:
  • Tmax is the maximum value of the distance between any two adjacent lenses in the at least seven lenses
  • Tmin is the minimum value in the distance between any two adjacent lenses in the at least seven lenses.
  • the above relation formula specifies the ratio range of the maximum value of the interval between any two adjacent lenses among the at least seven lenses to the minimum value of the interval between any two adjacent lenses among the at least seven lenses.
  • the ratio range of the maximum value of the interval between any two adjacent lenses among the at least seven lenses to the minimum value of the interval between any two adjacent lenses among the at least seven lenses satisfies the above relational expression, it is beneficial for the optical lens 10 miniaturization.
  • the ratio range of the maximum value of the interval between any two adjacent lenses among the at least seven lenses to the minimum value of the interval between any two adjacent lenses among the at least seven lenses may not be limited to the above limitation.
  • the optical lens 10 satisfies the following relationship:
  • Dr5r10 is the distance on the optical axis A from the object-side surface of the third lens L3 to the image-side surface of the fifth lens L5.
  • the third lens L3 to the fifth lens L5 have the largest thicknesses.
  • the third lens L3 to the fifth lens L5 are The optical lens 10 has the largest proportion of the total optical length, which is beneficial to the miniaturization of the optical lens 10 , and further helps to realize the miniaturization of the camera module 1 and the electronic device 100 .
  • the fifth lens has a thicker center thickness. It can be understood that the fifth lens is located in the middle of the eight lenses, and the fifth lens has a thicker central thickness, which can strengthen the structural strength of the optical lens and improve the mechanical reliability of the optical lens against falling.
  • the ratio range of the distance on the optical axis A from the object-side surface of the third lens L3 to the image-side surface of the fifth lens L5 and the total optical length of the optical lens 10 is not limited to the above limitation.
  • the optical lens 10 satisfies the following relationship:
  • Dmax is the maximum value of the clear aperture of the object-side surface or image-side surface of each lens in at least seven lenses
  • Dmin is the minimum of the clear aperture of the object-side surface or image-side surface of each lens in at least seven lenses. value.
  • the above relation formula specifies the ratio range of the maximum value of the light aperture on the object-side surface or image-side surface of all lenses to the minimum value of the light aperture on the object-side surface or image-side surface of all lenses.
  • the ratio range of the maximum value of the light aperture on the object-side surface or image-side surface of all lenses to the minimum value of the light aperture on the object-side surface or image-side surface of all lenses satisfies the above relational expression, it is beneficial to optical Miniaturization of the lens 10.
  • the ratio range of the maximum value of the light apertures on the object-side or image-side surfaces of all lenses to the minimum value of the light apertures on the object-side or image-side surfaces of all lenses may not be limited to the above limitations.
  • the optical lens 10 satisfies the following relationship:
  • the above relation formula specifies the ratio range of the diameter of the entrance pupil of the optical lens 10 to the maximum value of the light aperture on the object-side surface or image-side surface of all lenses.
  • EPD/Dmax may be equal to 0.25, 0.27, 0.30, 0.31, 0.77, 0.79, 1.11, 1.15, 1.26, 1.31 or 1.35.
  • it is beneficial to the miniaturization of the optical lens 10 and can be variable
  • the aperture value of the aperture varies widely.
  • the ratio range of the diameter of the entrance pupil of the optical lens 10 to the maximum value of the light apertures on the object-side surface or image-side surface of all lenses may not be limited to the above-mentioned limitation.
  • the optical lens 10 satisfies the following relationship:
  • the above relation formula specifies the ratio range of the maximum value of the distance between any two adjacent lenses in the at least seven lenses and the maximum value of the thickness of each lens on the optical axis A in the at least seven lenses.
  • the ratio range of the maximum value of the interval between any two adjacent lenses in the at least seven lenses to the maximum value of the thickness of each lens in the at least seven lenses on the optical axis A satisfies the above relational expression, it is beneficial for the optical lens 10 miniaturization.
  • the ratio range between the maximum value of the interval between any two adjacent lenses in at least seven lenses) and the maximum value of the thickness of each lens on the optical axis A from the first lens L1 to the at least seven lenses can also be Without limitation the above limitations.
  • the optical lens 10 satisfies the following relationship:
  • CT1 is the thickness of the first lens L1 on the optical axis A
  • MaxCT2L is the maximum thickness of the other lenses except the first lens L1 among the at least seven lenses on the optical axis A.
  • the above relational formula specifies the ratio range of the thickness of the first lens L1 on the optical axis A to the maximum thickness of the other lenses except the first lens L1 among the at least seven lenses on the optical axis A.
  • the optical lens 10 can be rationally configured through lenses of different materials, which is beneficial to the miniaturization and manufacturability of the optical lens 10 .
  • the ratio range of the thickness of the first lens L1 on the optical axis A to the maximum value of the thicknesses of the other lenses except the first lens L1 in the at least seven lenses on the optical axis A can also be Without limitation the above limitations.
  • the optical lens 10 satisfies the following relationship:
  • Dr5r10 is the distance on the optical axis A from the object-side surface of the third lens L3 to the image-side surface of the fifth lens L5.
  • the above relational formula specifies the ratio range of the diameter of the entrance pupil of the optical lens 10 to the distance on the optical axis A from the object-side surface of the third lens L3 to the image-side surface of the fifth lens L5 .
  • EPD/Dr5r10 may be equal to 0.55, 0.57, 0.68, 2.36, 2.44, 3.05 or 3.15.
  • the third lens L3 to the fifth lens L5 have the largest thickness and account for the largest proportion in the total length of the lens.
  • the ratio range of the diameter of the entrance pupil of the optical lens 10 to the distance from the object-side surface of the third lens L3 to the image-side surface of the fifth lens L5 on the optical axis A is not limited to the above limitation.
  • the optical lens 10 satisfies the following relationship:
  • T12 is the distance between the first lens L1 and the second lens L2 on the optical axis A
  • T23 is the distance between the second lens L2 and the third lens L3 on the optical axis A
  • T34 is the distance between the third lens L3 and the first lens L3.
  • T45 is the distance between the fourth lens L4 and the fifth lens L5 on the optical axis A
  • T56 is the distance between the fifth lens L5 and the sixth lens L6 on the optical axis A
  • Distance is the distance between the sixth lens L6 and the seventh lens L7 on the optical axis A
  • BL is the distance from the image side surface of the lens closest to the imaging surface to the imaging surface on the optical axis A
  • Tmax is at least seven lenses The maximum value of the distance between any two adjacent lenses in . It can be understood that when the number of lenses is seven, the lens closest to the imaging surface is the seventh lens (L7), and when the number of lenses is eight, the lens closest to the imaging surface is the eighth lens (L8) .
  • the above relational formula stipulates the ratio range of the maximum value of the interval between any two adjacent lenses among the at least seven lenses and the interval between other two adjacent lenses, and the maximum value of the interval between any two adjacent lenses among the at least seven lenses and The ratio range of the distance from the image-side surface of the lens closest to the imaging surface to the imaging surface on the optical axis A.
  • the aforementioned ratio range satisfies the aforementioned relational expression, it is beneficial to miniaturization of the optical lens 10 .
  • the above ratio range may not be limited to the above limitation.
  • the aperture value of the diaphragm STO can be adjusted within a range of 1.2 to 5.0 (including 1.2 and 5.0), and the smaller the aperture value, the larger the aperture of the diaphragm STO and the greater the amount of incoming light.
  • the aperture value is 1.2, the amount of light entering the optical lens 10 is large, and due to the large amount of light entering, it is more difficult for the light to converge, which affects the image quality.
  • the present application designs the optical parameters of each lens in the optical lens 10 so that the coordination of each lens can achieve a good imaging effect even in the case of a large amount of incoming light.
  • the optical lens 10 satisfies the following relationship:
  • f1 is the focal length of the first lens L1
  • f2 is the focal length of the second lens L2
  • f3 is the focal length of the third lens L3
  • f4 is the focal length of the fourth lens L4.
  • the sum of the reciprocals of the focal lengths of the first lens L1 to the fourth lens L4 between 0.1 and 0.15 (including 0.1 and 0.15)
  • the aperture value is 1.2
  • a large amount of light entering the lens through the diaphragm STO can be at the first
  • the first lens L1 to the fourth lens L4 are coordinated and modulated to achieve a better light-gathering effect and effectively improve the imaging quality of the optical lens 10 .
  • the sum of the reciprocal focal lengths of the first lens L1 to the fourth lens L4 is not limited to the above limitation.
  • the first lens L1 has positive refractive power
  • the second lens L2 has negative refractive power
  • the third lens L3 has positive refractive power
  • the fourth lens L4 has positive or negative refractive power.
  • the optical lens 10 satisfies the following relationship:
  • f1 is the focal length of the first lens L1
  • f3 is the focal length of the third lens L3
  • f5 is the focal length of the fifth lens L5
  • f7 is the focal length of the seventh lens L7.
  • the sum of the reciprocals of the focal lengths of the first lens L1, the third lens L3, the fifth lens L5 and the seventh lens L7 to between 0.3 and 0.5 (including 0.3 and 0.5)
  • the spherical aberration and chromatic aberration produced by the first lens L1 are balanced to improve the imaging effect of the optical lens 10 .
  • the sum of the reciprocal focal lengths of the first lens L1 , the third lens L3 , the fifth lens L5 and the seventh lens L7 is not limited to the above limitation.
  • the optical lens 10 satisfies the following relationship:
  • EFL is the focal length of the optical lens 10
  • f1 is the focal length of the first lens L1
  • f4 is the focal length of the fourth lens L4
  • fi is the focal length of the i-th lens.
  • the above relational formula specifies the ratio range of the focal length of the optical lens 10 to the focal length of each lens, the ratio range of the focal length of the first lens L1 to the focal length of each other lens, and the ratio range of the focal length of the fourth lens L4 to the focal length of each other lens scope.
  • the ratio range of the focal length of the optical lens 10 to the focal length of each lens, the ratio range of the focal length of the first lens L1 to the focal length of each other lens, and the ratio range of the focal length of the fourth lens L4 to the focal length of each other lens When the range satisfies the above relational expression, it can ensure that the optical lens 10 has a good imaging quality in a scene with a large aperture.
  • the ratio range of the focal length of the optical lens 10 to the focal length of each lens is not limited to the above-mentioned limitations.
  • the optical lens 10 satisfies the following relationship:
  • R1 is the radius of curvature of the object-side surface of the first lens L1
  • R2 is the radius of curvature of the image-side surface of the first lens L1
  • R3 is the radius of curvature of the object-side surface of the second lens L2
  • R4 is the image-side surface of the second lens L2
  • R5 is the radius of curvature of the object-side surface of the third lens L3
  • R6 is the radius of curvature of the image-side surface of the third lens L3
  • R7 is the radius of curvature of the object-side surface of the fourth lens L4
  • R8 is the image-side surface of the fourth lens L4
  • the radius of curvature of the side surface, R9 is the radius of curvature of the object-side surface of the fifth lens L5
  • R10 is the radius of curvature of the image-side surface of the fifth lens L5
  • the above relational expression specifies the ratio range of the radius of curvature of the object-side surface and the image-side surface of each lens.
  • the optical lens 10 can obtain a better imaging effect.
  • the ratio range of the radius of curvature of the object-side surface and the image-side surface of each lens may not be limited to the above limitation.
  • the optical lens 10 satisfies that R1, R2, R3, R4, R5, and R6 are all greater than 0; at least one of R7 and R8 is greater than 0.
  • R1 , R2 , R3 , R4 , R5 and R6 to be greater than 0, and at least one of R7 and R8 is greater than 0, the optical lens 10 can obtain a better imaging effect.
  • R1, R2, R3, R4, R5, R6, R7 and R8 may not be limited to the above limitations.
  • the optical lens 10 satisfies the following relationship:
  • Vmax is the maximum dispersion coefficient among all the lenses of the optical lens 10
  • Vmin is the minimum dispersion coefficient among all the lenses of the optical lens 10 .
  • the material of each lens can be selected from resin material or glass material.
  • each lens of the optical lens 10 has a lens made of glass and a lens made of resin
  • the lens made of glass can be placed in a group with the lens made of resin, and these lenses can be mechanically limited by superimposition and assembled together at the same time.
  • Lenses of different materials can also be divided into multiple groups, that is, lenses made of glass are a single group, lenses made of resin are other groups, and the relative positions of each group are adjusted through an active alignment process to ensure The analytical effect of the center and surrounding of the screen, and other assembly processes such as glue bonding or mechanical limit to form a complete optical lens.
  • Vmin and Vmax may not be limited to the above limitations.
  • the optical lens 10 when the number of lenses is eight, the optical lens 10 satisfies the following relationship:
  • V1 is the dispersion coefficient of the first lens L1
  • V2 is the dispersion coefficient of the second lens L2
  • V3 is the dispersion coefficient of the third lens L3
  • V4 is the dispersion coefficient of the fourth lens L4
  • V5 is the dispersion of the fifth lens L5
  • V6 is the dispersion coefficient of the sixth lens L6
  • V7 is the dispersion coefficient of the seventh lens L7
  • V8 is the dispersion coefficient of the eighth lens L8.
  • the above relational formula defines the range of the dispersion coefficients of the first lens L1 to the eighth lens L8.
  • the first lens L1 selects a material with a low dispersion coefficient or a medium dispersion coefficient or a material with a relatively high dispersion coefficient or a very high dispersion coefficient material.
  • the third lens L3, the fifth lens L5, the seventh lens L7 and the eighth lens L8 select materials with higher dispersion coefficients
  • the second lens L2 and the fourth lens L4 select materials with low dispersion coefficients
  • the sixth lens L6 selects
  • the dispersion coefficient material it can ensure that the optical lens 10 has a good imaging effect on the basis of a wide range of aperture values.
  • the ranges of the dispersion coefficients of the first lens L1 to the eighth lens L8 are not limited to the above limitations.
  • the optical lens 10 satisfies the following relationship:
  • Nmax is the maximum refractive index among all the lenses of the optical lens
  • Nmin is the minimum refractive index among all the lenses of the optical lens 10.
  • each lens material can be Choose resin material or glass material.
  • the optical lens 10 when the number of lenses is eight, the optical lens 10 satisfies the following relationship:
  • N1 is the refractive index of the first lens L1
  • N2 is the refractive index of the second lens L2
  • N3 is the refractive index of the third lens L3
  • N4 is the refractive index of the fourth lens L4
  • N5 is the refractive index of the fifth lens L5
  • N6 is the refractive index of the sixth lens L6
  • N7 is the refractive index of the seventh lens L7
  • N8 is the refractive index of the eighth lens L8.
  • the above relational formula defines the refractive index range of the first lens L1 to the eighth lens L8.
  • the first lens L1 selects low refractive index material, medium refractive index material, higher refractive index material or very high refractive index material.
  • the third lens L3, the fifth lens L5, the seventh lens L7 and the eighth lens L8 choose low refractive index materials
  • the second lens L2 and the fourth lens L4 choose materials with higher refractive index
  • the sixth lens L6 chooses medium refraction materials
  • the refractive index ranges of the first lens L1 to the eighth lens L8 are not limited to the above limitations.
  • the optical lens 10 satisfies the following relationship:
  • the distance on the optical axis A between the infinite distance object and the imaging plane of the aperture STO of the STL optical lens 10 is the distance on the optical axis A between the infinite distance object and the imaging plane of the aperture STO of the STL optical lens 10 .
  • the above relation formula specifies the ratio range of the distance between the infinite object of the diaphragm STO and the imaging surface on the optical axis A and the total optical length.
  • STL/TTL may be equal to 0.80, 0.86, 0.88, 0.92, 1.08, 1.12, 1.14, 1.30 or 1.50.
  • the diaphragm STO can be set on the object side of the first lens L1, or can be Set between any two adjacent lenses.
  • the range of the ratio of the distance between the infinite object of the diaphragm STO and the imaging surface on the optical axis A to the total optical length is not limited to the above limitation.
  • the optical lens 10 satisfies the following relationship:
  • FOV is the field angle of the optical lens 10 .
  • the optical lens 10 when the FOV of the optical lens 10 satisfies the above relational expression, the optical lens 10 has a larger imaging area, which ensures the imaging quality of the optical lens.
  • the object-side surfaces and image-side surfaces of all lenses in the optical lens 10 are aspherical, and the image-side and object-side surfaces of each lens satisfy the formula:
  • z the point on the aspheric surface whose distance from the optical axis A is r, and its relative distance from the intersection point tangent to the aspheric optical axis A;
  • ⁇ i is the i-th order aspheric coefficient.
  • the aspherical surface has a higher degree of freedom in configuration and a better effect of eliminating aberrations, thereby reducing the total length of the optical lens 10 , which is beneficial to the miniaturization of the optical lens 10 .
  • the optical lens 10 has a very good f-number in the range of 1.2 to 5.0. Imaging effect, while achieving thinning of the electronic device 100 .
  • optical lens may exist independently of each other, or may be combined with each other.
  • the optical lens is thinner or can obtain better imaging quality.
  • FIG. 3A is a schematic structural diagram of the camera module 1 according to the first embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 6 is a schematic structural diagram of the diaphragm with the structure shown in FIG. 3A .
  • the optical lens 10 includes an aperture STO and eight lenses.
  • the optical lens 10 includes a diaphragm STO, a first lens L1, a second lens L2, a third lens L3, a fourth lens L4, a fifth lens L5, a sixth lens L6, Seventh lens L7 and eighth lens L8.
  • the aperture STO is a variable aperture, and the aperture value of the aperture STO can be adjusted within the range of 1.2 to 5.0 (including 1.2 and 5.0), realizing multiple position features such as large aperture and small aperture.
  • the structural size of the iris By adjusting the structural size of the iris, the amount of light passing through the optical lens 10 can be controlled, the depth of field of the camera module 1 can be controlled, the effect of blurring the background can be improved, and the image quality can be improved to realize "portrait mode" photography and the like.
  • the ratio (TTL/(ImgH ⁇ EPD)) of the product of the total optical length of the optical lens 10 to the diagonal half length of the effective pixel area of the imaging surface of the optical lens 10 and the diameter of the entrance pupil of the optical lens 10 is greater than or equal to 0.10 , and less than or equal to 1.10.
  • the above-mentioned limited value ensures that the total optical length of the optical lens 10 is the smallest enough, the imaging surface is large, and the range of the aperture value is large, which is conducive to the miniaturization of the optical lens 10 and the improvement of imaging quality.
  • the ratio (STL/TTL) of the distance between the infinite object of the aperture STO and the imaging plane on the optical axis A to the total optical length is in the range of 0.8 to 1.5 (including 0.8 and 1.5).
  • the above-mentioned limited value ensures that the stop STO can be set on the object side of the first lens L1, and can also be set between any two adjacent lenses.
  • the first lens L1 has a positive refractive power
  • the object-side surface of the first lens L1 near the optical axis A is a convex surface, so as to provide the optical lens 10 with the ability to gather light at the object-side end, shorten its total length, and facilitate the optics. Miniaturization of the lens 10.
  • the image-side surface of the first lens L1 is concave near the optical axis A, which can correct astigmatism.
  • the second lens L2 has a negative refractive power.
  • the object-side surface of the second lens L2 is convex near the optical axis A, and the image-side surface of the second lens L2 is concave near the optical axis A.
  • the second lens L2 is beneficial to balance the spherical aberration and chromatic aberration produced by the first lens L1, so as to reduce the generation of color shift and make the image sharper.
  • the third lens L3 has a positive refractive power, the object-side surface of the third lens L3 near the optical axis A is convex, and the image-side surface of the third lens L3 near the optical axis A is concave.
  • the third lens L3 is beneficial to correct the aberration of the optical lens 10 and further balance the spherical aberration and chromatic aberration produced by the first lens L1.
  • the fourth lens L4 has a positive refractive power.
  • the object-side surface of the fourth lens L4 near the optical axis A is convex, and the image-side surface of the fourth lens L4 near the optical axis A is concave.
  • the fourth lens L4 is beneficial to correct the aberration of the optical lens 10 and balance the spherical aberration and chromatic aberration produced by the first lens L1.
  • the first lens L1 has positive refractive power
  • the second lens L2 has negative refractive power
  • the third lens L3 has positive refractive power
  • the fourth lens L4 has positive refractive power.
  • the fifth lens L5 has a positive refractive power.
  • the object-side surface of the fifth lens L5 near the optical axis A is concave, and the image-side surface of the fifth lens L5 near the optical axis A is convex.
  • the fifth lens L5 can facilitate the optical lens 10 to focus light, effectively shortening the back focal length and the total optical length.
  • the sixth lens L6 has a negative refractive power.
  • the object-side surface of the sixth lens L6 near the optical axis A is convex, and the image-side surface of the sixth lens L6 near the optical axis A is concave.
  • the sixth lens L6 is beneficial to balance the distribution of negative refractive power of the optical lens 10, reduce its sensitivity, and reduce spherical aberration.
  • the seventh lens L7 has a positive refractive power, the object-side surface of the seventh lens L7 is convex at the near optical axis A, the image-side surface of the seventh lens L7 is convex at the near optical axis A, and includes at least one concave surface off-axis,
  • the seventh lens L7 is beneficial to the light-gathering of the optical lens 10, and can effectively shorten the back focal length and the total optical length.
  • the eighth lens L8 has a negative refractive power.
  • the object-side surface of the eighth lens L8 near the optical axis A is concave, and the image-side surface of the eighth lens L8 near the optical axis A is concave.
  • the object-side surface S15 of the eighth lens L8 includes at least one concave surface off-axis, and the image-side surface of the eighth lens L8 includes at least one convex surface off-axis.
  • the eighth lens L8 is beneficial to move the principal point of the optical lens 10 toward the object side, thereby effectively shortening the back focal length and the total optical length, and helping to correct the aberration of the off-axis field of view.
  • Both the object-side surface and the image-side surface of the eighth lens L8 include at least one inflection point to correct the aberration of the off-axis field of view.
  • the inflection point is a curve from the near optical axis A of the lens to the off-axis lens surface, and the center of curvature of the curve moves from the object side to the image side (or from the image side to the object side).
  • the image-side surface of the eighth lens L8 includes at least two critical points to correct off-axis aberrations. Among them, the critical point is defined as the tangent point on the lens surface, except the intersection point with the optical axis, which is tangent to a tangent plane perpendicular to the optical axis.
  • the sixth lens L6 has a negative refractive power, and its image-side surface near the optical axis is concave, the seventh lens L7 has positive refractive power, and its object-side surface is convex near the optical axis, and the eighth lens L8 has Negative refractive power, the near optical axis of the image side surface is concave.
  • the sixth lens L6 , the seventh lens L7 , and the eighth lens L8 are configured with proper surface shapes to correct the peripheral aberration of the image to improve the imaging quality and shorten the back focal length, which is helpful for the miniaturization of the camera module.
  • the optical lens 10 through cooperation between different lenses, the optical lens 10 has a better imaging effect in the case of a large aperture value variation range, and realizes miniaturization of the camera module.
  • all surfaces of the lenses of the optical lens 10 are aspheric surfaces, that is, the first lens L1, the second lens L2, the third lens L3, the fourth lens L4, the fifth lens L5, the sixth lens L6,
  • the image-side surface and the object-side surface of the seven lenses L7 and the eighth lens L8 are all aspheric surfaces, the aspheric surfaces have a higher degree of freedom in configuration, and have a good effect of eliminating aberrations, thereby reducing the total length of the optical lens 10, which is conducive to the miniaturization of the optical lens 10 change.
  • the refractive index (Nmax) of the lens with the largest refractive index among all the lenses in the optical lens 10 is 1.68
  • the refractive index (Nmin) of the lens with the smallest refractive index among all the lenses is 1.54.
  • the first lens L1 (N1) is greater than or equal to 1.40 and less than or equal to 2.0; the refractive indices (N3, N5, N7, N8) greater than or equal to 1.50 and less than or equal to 1.55; the refractive index (N2, N4) of the second lens L2 and the fourth lens L4 is greater than or equal to 1.65 and less than or equal to 1.70; the refractive index of the sixth lens L6 (N6) is greater than or equal to 1.57 , and less than or equal to 1.58.
  • the first lens L1 selects low refraction material, medium refraction index material, higher refraction material or very high refraction material
  • the third lens L3, fifth lens L5, seventh lens L7 and eighth lens L8 select low refraction material
  • Higher refractive index materials are selected for the second lens L2 and the fourth lens L4
  • medium refractive index materials are selected for the sixth lens L6.
  • the above-mentioned limited value can ensure that the imaging effect of the optical lens 10 is good on the basis of a wide range of aperture values.
  • the dispersion coefficient (Vmax) of the lens with the largest dispersion coefficient is 56; among all the lenses, the dispersion coefficient (Vmin) of the lens with the smallest dispersion coefficient is 19.5.
  • the above-mentioned limited value ensures the ability of the optical lens 10 to eliminate chromatic aberration and improves the imaging quality of the optical lens 10 .
  • the dispersion coefficient (V1) of the first lens L1 is greater than or equal to 30 and less than or equal to 90; the dispersion coefficients (V3, V5) of the third lens L3, the fifth lens L5, the seventh lens L7, and the eighth lens L8 , V7, V8) greater than or equal to 52, and less than or equal to 60; the dispersion coefficient (V2, V4) of the second lens L2 and the fourth lens L4 is greater than or equal to 15, and less than or equal to 21; the dispersion coefficient of the sixth lens L6 (V6) Greater than or equal to 35 and less than or equal to 40.
  • the first lens L1 selects a material with a low dispersion coefficient or a medium dispersion coefficient or a material with a relatively high dispersion coefficient or a very high dispersion coefficient
  • the third lens L3, the fifth lens L5, the seventh lens L7 and the eighth lens L8 select
  • materials with higher dispersion coefficients materials with low dispersion coefficients are selected for the second lens L2 and fourth lens L4, and materials with medium dispersion coefficients are selected for the sixth lens L6.
  • the above-mentioned limited value can ensure that the imaging effect of the optical lens 10 is good on the basis of a wide range of aperture values.
  • the sum of the reciprocal focal lengths (1/f1+1/f2+1/f3+1/f4) of the first lens L1 to the fourth lens L4 is 0.126; the above-mentioned limit value ensures that when the aperture value is 1.2, the A large amount of light entering the lens through the STO can be coordinated and modulated by the first lens L1 to the fourth lens L4 to achieve a better light-gathering effect and effectively improve the imaging quality of the optical lens 10 .
  • the sum of the reciprocal focal lengths (1/f1+1/f3+1/f5+1/f7) of the first lens L1, the third lens L3, the fifth lens L5 and the seventh lens L7 is 0.339, and the above-mentioned limited value is conducive to correction
  • the aberration of the optical lens 10 balances the spherical aberration and chromatic aberration generated by the first lens L1, and improves the imaging effect of the optical lens 10 .
  • ) of the focal length of the optical lens 10 to the focal length of each lens is 1.4; the ratio (
  • the radius of curvature of the object-side surface of the first lens L1 is R1, the radius of curvature of the image-side surface of the first lens L1 is R2, the radius of curvature of the object-side surface of the second lens L2 is R3, and the radius of curvature of the image-side surface of the second lens L2 is R4, the radius of curvature of the third lens L3 object side surface is R5, the curvature radius of the third lens L3 image side surface is R6, the curvature radius of the fourth lens L4 object side surface is R7, the curvature of the fourth lens L4 image side surface
  • the radius is R8, the radius of curvature of the object-side surface of the fifth lens L5 is R9, the radius of curvature of the image-side surface of the fifth lens L5 is R10, the curvature radius of the object-side surface of the sixth lens L6 is R11, and the image-side surface of the sixth lens L6 is R10.
  • the radius of curvature of the object-side surface of the seventh lens L7 is R13
  • the radius of curvature of the image-side surface of the seventh lens L7 is R14
  • the radius of curvature of the object-side surface of the eighth lens L8 is R15
  • the image-side surface of the eighth lens L8 is R15.
  • the radius of curvature of the side surface is R16.
  • 0.48,
  • 1.30,
  • 0.50,
  • 0.69,
  • 1.17,
  • 3.24,
  • 0.18,
  • 8.38.
  • the above limit values ensure that the optical lens 10 can obtain better imaging effects.
  • the optical lens 10 satisfies that R1, R2, R3, R4, R5 and R6 are all greater than 0; at least one of R7 and R8 is greater than 0.
  • R1 , R2 , R3 , R4 , R5 and R6 to be greater than 0, and at least one of R7 and R8 is greater than 0, the optical lens 10 can obtain a better imaging effect.
  • the ratio of the maximum value of the thickness of each lens on the optical axis A from the first lens L1 to the eighth lens L8 to the minimum value of the thickness of each lens on the optical axis A from the first lens L1 to the eighth lens L8 (CTmax/CTmin) It is 3.20; the ratio (Tmin/Tmax) of the maximum value of the interval between any two adjacent lenses in the first lens L1 to the eighth lens L8 to the minimum value of the interval between any two adjacent lenses in the first lens L1 to the eighth lens L8 ) is 0.080; the ratio (Dr5r10/TTL) of the distance from the object-side surface of the third lens L3 to the image-side surface of the fifth lens L5 on the optical axis A and the total optical length (Dr5r10/TTL) is 0.24; the object-side surface or image-side surface of all lenses The ratio (Dmax/Dmin) of the maximum value of the clear hole of the lens to the minimum value of the clear hole of the object-side surface or image-side surface of all lenses
  • the ratio (EPD/Dmax) of the diameter of the entrance pupil to the maximum value of the aperture of the object-side surface or image-side surface of all lenses is in the range of 0.25 to 1.35 (including 0.25 and 1.35); the diameter of the entrance pupil to the third lens L3
  • the ratio (EPD/Dr5r10) of the distance from the object-side surface to the image-side surface of the fifth lens L5 on the optical axis A is in the range of 0.55 to 3.15 (including 0.55 and 3.15); the above-mentioned limited value ensures the small size of the optical lens 10 , and the variable range of the aperture value of the iris is large.
  • the ratio (MaxCT1/MaxCT2L) of the thickness of the first lens L1 on the optical axis A to the maximum value of the thickness of each lens in the second lens L2 to the eighth lens L8 on the optical axis A is 1.53; the above-mentioned limit value ensures that the optical lens
  • the 10 can be rationally configured with lenses made of different materials, which is beneficial to the miniaturization and manufacturability of the optical lens 10 .
  • the distance between the first lens L1 and the second lens L2 on the optical axis A is T12
  • the distance between the second lens L2 and the third lens L3 on the optical axis A is T23
  • the distance between the third lens L3 and the fourth lens L4 is
  • the separation distance on the optical axis A is T34
  • the separation distance between the fourth lens L4 and the fifth lens L5 on the optical axis A is T45
  • the separation distance between the fifth lens L5 and the sixth lens L6 on the optical axis A is T56
  • the distance between the sixth lens L6 and the seventh lens L7 on the optical axis A is T67
  • the distance between the seventh lens L7 and the eighth lens L8 on the optical axis A is T78
  • the distance on the optical axis A is BL.
  • Tmax is the maximum value of the distance between any two adjacent lenses in the first lens L1 to the eighth lens L8.
  • the above-mentioned limit values ensure miniaturization of the optical lens 10 .
  • the optical lens 10 has a better imaging effect on the basis of a wide range of aperture values through cooperation between different lenses, and at the same time, the thinning of the electronic device 100 is realized.
  • optical lens may exist independently of each other, or may be combined with each other.
  • the optical lens is thinner or can obtain better imaging quality.
  • OBJ object distance
  • L1 first lens L1;
  • L3 third lens L3
  • L4 fourth lens L4;
  • L5 fifth lens L5;
  • L7 seventh lens L7;
  • Table 3 shows the clear apertures of the object-side surface and the image-side surface of each lens of the optical lens 10 in this embodiment, as shown in Table 3 in detail.
  • Table 3 The clear aperture of each lens of the optical lens 10 of the first embodiment
  • Table 4 shows the aspheric coefficients of the optical lens 10 of this embodiment.
  • the number of aspheric surfaces in the optical lens 10 of this embodiment is 16, as shown in Table 4 for details.
  • K represents the cone coefficient in the aspheric curve equation
  • A4, A6, A8, A10, A12, A14, A16, A19, A20 represent the 4th, 6th, 8th, 10th, 12th, 14th, 16th, 18, 20 order aspherical coefficients.
  • each parameter in the table is expressed in scientific notation.
  • -1.07E-01 means -1.07 ⁇ 10 -1
  • -4.11E-02 means -4.11 ⁇ 10 -2 .
  • each lens of the optical lens 10 of the present embodiment wherein, z is a point on the aspheric surface that is r from the optical axis A, and it is the relative distance to the intersection point tangent plane tangent to the aspheric optical axis A, and r is The vertical distance between the point on the aspheric curve and the optical axis A, c is the curvature, k is the cone coefficient, and ⁇ i is the i-th order aspheric coefficient.
  • the different lenses of the optical lens 10 obtained through the above parameter design can play different roles, so that through the cooperation of each lens, a good background blur effect can be obtained on the basis of a large aperture value range. and imaging quality and thin optical lens 10.
  • FIG 7 and 8 are graphs showing the optical properties of the optical lens 10 according to the first embodiment.
  • FIG. 8 shows the axial chromatic aberration of light with wavelengths of 650 nm, 610 nm, 555 nm, 510 nm, and 470 nm in the optical lens 10 after passing through the optical lens 10 of the first embodiment.
  • the ordinate in FIG. 8 represents the normalized pupil coordinates, and the abscissa represents the axial chromatic aberration, and the unit is mm. It can be seen from FIG. 8 that in this embodiment, the axial chromatic aberration of the optical lens 10 in each state is controlled within a small range.
  • the left diagram is a schematic diagram of field curvature of the optical lens 10
  • the right diagram is a schematic diagram of optical distortion of the optical lens 10
  • the solid line in the left figure is a schematic diagram of field curvature in the meridional direction after the 650nm light passes through the optical lens 10
  • the dotted line is a schematic diagram of the field curvature in the sagittal direction after the 650nm light passes through the optical lens 10
  • the right figure is a schematic diagram of optical distortion of 650nm light passing through the optical lens 10 of the first embodiment.
  • the vertical coordinates of the two graphs are object angles, and the horizontal coordinates of the left graph represent the astigmatism values in the meridional direction (dotted line) and sagittal direction (solid line), in millimeters.
  • the figure on the right shows the optical distortion values corresponding to different fields of view, and the unit is percentage. It can be seen from FIG. 8 that in this embodiment, the optical system controls the distortion within a range that cannot be clearly recognized by the naked eye.
  • the optical lens 10 provided in this embodiment through the arrangement of each lens in each lens group and the combination of lenses with a specific optical design, can make the optical lens 10 have better background blur on the basis of a large aperture value range.
  • the miniaturization effect and the imaging effect can be improved, and the thinning of the electronic device 100 can be realized at the same time.
  • FIG. 9 is a schematic structural diagram of the camera module 1 according to the second embodiment of the present application.
  • the optical lens 10 includes an aperture STO and eight lenses.
  • the optical lens 10 includes a diaphragm STO, a first lens L1, a second lens L2, a third lens L3, a fourth lens L4, a fifth lens L5, a sixth lens L6, Seventh lens L7 and eighth lens L8.
  • the aperture STO is a variable aperture, and the aperture value of the aperture STO can be adjusted within the range of 1.2 to 5.0 (including 1.2 and 5.0), realizing multiple position features such as large aperture and small aperture.
  • the structural size of the iris By adjusting the structural size of the iris, the amount of light passing through the optical lens 10 can be controlled, the depth of field of the camera module 1 can be controlled, the background blur effect can be improved, and the image quality can be improved to realize "portrait mode" photography, etc.
  • the ratio (TTL/(ImgH ⁇ EPD)) of the product of the total optical length of the optical lens 10 to the diagonal half length of the effective pixel area of the imaging surface of the optical lens 10 and the diameter of the entrance pupil of the optical lens 10 is greater than or equal to 0.10 , and less than or equal to 1.10.
  • the above-mentioned limited value ensures that the total optical length of the optical lens 10 is the smallest enough, the imaging surface is large, and the range of the aperture value is large, which is conducive to the miniaturization of the optical lens 10 and the improvement of imaging quality.
  • the ratio (STL/TTL) of the distance between the infinite object of the aperture STO and the imaging plane on the optical axis A to the total optical length is in the range of 0.8 to 1.5 (including 0.8 and 1.5).
  • the above-mentioned limited value ensures that the stop STO can be set on the object side of the first lens L1, and can also be set between any two adjacent lenses.
  • the first lens L1 has a positive refractive power
  • the object-side surface of the first lens L1 near the optical axis A is a convex surface, so as to provide the optical lens 10 with the ability to gather light at the object-side end, shorten its total length, and facilitate the optics. Miniaturization of the lens 10.
  • the image-side surface of the first lens L1 is concave near the optical axis A, which can correct astigmatism.
  • the second lens L2 has a negative refractive power.
  • the object-side surface of the second lens L2 is convex near the optical axis A, and the image-side surface of the second lens L2 is concave near the optical axis A.
  • the second lens L2 is beneficial to balance the spherical aberration and chromatic aberration produced by the first lens L1, so as to reduce the generation of color shift and make the image sharper.
  • the third lens L3 has a positive refractive power, the object-side surface of the third lens L3 near the optical axis A is convex, and the image-side surface of the third lens L3 near the optical axis A is concave.
  • the third lens L3 is beneficial to correct the aberration of the optical lens 10 and further balance the spherical aberration and chromatic aberration produced by the first lens L1.
  • the fourth lens L4 has a negative refractive power.
  • the object-side surface of the fourth lens L4 near the optical axis A is convex, and the image-side surface of the fourth lens L4 near the optical axis A is concave.
  • the fourth lens L4 is beneficial to correct the aberration of the optical lens 10 and balance the spherical aberration and chromatic aberration produced by the first lens L1.
  • the first lens L1 has positive refractive power
  • the second lens L2 has negative refractive power
  • the third lens L3 has positive refractive power
  • the fourth lens L4 has negative refractive power.
  • the fifth lens L5 has a positive refractive power.
  • the object-side surface of the fifth lens L5 near the optical axis A is concave, and the image-side surface of the fifth lens L5 near the optical axis A is convex.
  • the fifth lens L5 can facilitate the optical lens 10 to focus light, effectively shortening the back focal length and the total optical length.
  • the sixth lens L6 has a negative refractive power.
  • the object-side surface of the sixth lens L6 near the optical axis A is convex, and the image-side surface of the sixth lens L6 near the optical axis A is concave.
  • the sixth lens L6 is beneficial to balance the distribution of negative refractive power of the optical lens 10, reduce its sensitivity, and reduce spherical aberration.
  • the seventh lens L7 has a positive refractive power, the object-side surface of the seventh lens L7 is convex at the near optical axis A, the image-side surface of the seventh lens L7 is convex at the near optical axis A, and includes at least one concave surface off-axis,
  • the seventh lens L7 is beneficial to the light-gathering of the optical lens 10, and can effectively shorten the back focal length and the total optical length.
  • the eighth lens L8 has negative refractive power, the object-side surface of the eighth lens L8 is concave near the optical axis A, and the image-side surface S16 of the eighth lens L8 is concave near the optical axis A.
  • the object-side surface S15 of the eighth lens L8 includes at least one concave surface off-axis, and the image-side surface S16 of the eighth lens L8 includes at least one convex surface off-axis.
  • the eighth lens L8 is beneficial to move the principal point of the optical lens 10 toward the object side, thereby effectively shortening the back focal length and the total optical length, and helping to correct the aberration of the off-axis field of view.
  • Both the object-side surface and the image-side surface of the eighth lens L8 include at least one inflection point to correct the aberration of the off-axis field of view.
  • the inflection point is a curve from the near optical axis A of the lens to the off-axis lens surface, and the center of curvature of the curve moves from the object side to the image side (or from the image side to the object side).
  • the image-side surface of the eighth lens L8 includes at least two critical points to correct off-axis aberrations. Among them, the critical point is defined as the tangent point on the lens surface, except the intersection point with the optical axis, which is tangent to a tangent plane perpendicular to the optical axis.
  • the sixth lens L6 has a negative refractive power, and its image-side surface near the optical axis is concave, the seventh lens L7 has positive refractive power, and its object-side surface is convex near the optical axis, and the eighth lens L8 has Negative refractive power, the near optical axis of the image side surface is concave.
  • the sixth lens L6 , the seventh lens L7 , and the eighth lens L8 are configured with proper surface shapes to correct the peripheral aberration of the image to improve the imaging quality and shorten the back focal length, which is helpful for the miniaturization of the camera module.
  • the optical lens 10 through cooperation between different lenses, the optical lens 10 has a better imaging effect in the case of a large aperture value variation range, and realizes miniaturization of the camera module.
  • all surfaces of the lenses of the optical lens 10 are aspheric surfaces, that is, the first lens L1, the second lens L2, the third lens L3, the fourth lens L4, the fifth lens L5, the sixth lens L6,
  • the image-side surface and the object-side surface of the seven lenses L7 and the eighth lens L8 are all aspheric surfaces, the aspheric surfaces have a higher degree of freedom in configuration, and have a good effect of eliminating aberrations, thereby reducing the total length of the optical lens 10, which is conducive to the miniaturization of the optical lens 10 change.
  • the refractive index (Nmax) of the lens with the largest refractive index among all the lenses in the optical lens 10 is 1.67
  • the refractive index (Nmin) of the lens with the smallest refractive index among all the lenses is 1.54.
  • the first lens L1 (N1) is greater than or equal to 1.40 and less than or equal to 2.0; the refractive indices (N3, N5, N7, N8) greater than or equal to 1.50 and less than or equal to 1.55; the refractive index (N2, N4) of the second lens L2 and the fourth lens L4 is greater than or equal to 1.65 and less than or equal to 1.70; the refractive index of the sixth lens L6 (N6) is greater than or equal to 1.57 , and less than or equal to 1.58.
  • the first lens L1 selects low refraction material, medium refraction index material, higher refraction material or very high refraction material
  • the third lens L3, fifth lens L5, seventh lens L7 and eighth lens L8 select low refraction material
  • Higher refractive index materials are selected for the second lens L2 and the fourth lens L4
  • medium refractive index materials are selected for the sixth lens L6.
  • the above-mentioned limited value can ensure that the imaging effect of the optical lens 10 is good on the basis of a wide range of aperture values.
  • the dispersion coefficient (Vmax) of the lens with the largest dispersion coefficient is 56; among all the lenses, the dispersion coefficient (Vmin) of the lens with the smallest dispersion coefficient is 19.5.
  • the above-mentioned limited value ensures the ability of the optical lens 10 to eliminate chromatic aberration and improves the imaging quality of the optical lens 10 .
  • the dispersion coefficient (V1) of the first lens L1 is greater than or equal to 30 and less than or equal to 90; the dispersion coefficients (V3, V5) of the third lens L3, the fifth lens L5, the seventh lens L7, and the eighth lens L8 , V7, V8) greater than or equal to 52, and less than or equal to 60; the dispersion coefficient (V2, V4) of the second lens L2 and the fourth lens L4 is greater than or equal to 15, and less than or equal to 21; the dispersion coefficient of the sixth lens L6 (V6) Greater than or equal to 35 and less than or equal to 40.
  • the first lens L1 selects a material with a low dispersion coefficient or a medium dispersion coefficient or a material with a relatively high dispersion coefficient or a very high dispersion coefficient
  • the third lens L3, the fifth lens L5, the seventh lens L7 and the eighth lens L8 select
  • materials with higher dispersion coefficients materials with low dispersion coefficients are selected for the second lens L2 and fourth lens L4, and materials with medium dispersion coefficients are selected for the sixth lens L6.
  • the above-mentioned limited value can ensure that the imaging effect of the optical lens 10 is good on the basis of a wide range of aperture values.
  • the sum of the reciprocal focal lengths (1/f1+1/f2+1/f3+1/f4) of the first lens L1 to the fourth lens L4 is 0.121; the above-mentioned limit value ensures that when the aperture value is 1.2, the A large amount of light entering the lens through the STO can be coordinated and modulated by the first lens L1 to the fourth lens L4 to achieve a better light-gathering effect and effectively improve the imaging quality of the optical lens 10 .
  • the sum of the reciprocal focal lengths (1/f1+1/f3+1/f5+1/f7) of the first lens L1, the third lens L3, the fifth lens L5 and the seventh lens L7 is 0.321, and the above-mentioned limited value is conducive to correction
  • the aberration of the optical lens 10 balances the spherical aberration and chromatic aberration generated by the first lens L1, and improves the imaging effect of the optical lens 10 .
  • ) of the focal length of the optical lens 10 to the focal length of each lens is 1.4; the ratio (
  • the radius of curvature of the object-side surface of the first lens L1 is R1, the radius of curvature of the image-side surface of the first lens L1 is R2, the radius of curvature of the object-side surface of the second lens L2 is R3, and the radius of curvature of the image-side surface of the second lens L2 is R4, the radius of curvature of the third lens L3 object side surface is R5, the curvature radius of the third lens L3 image side surface is R6, the curvature radius of the fourth lens L4 object side surface is R7, the curvature of the fourth lens L4 image side surface
  • the radius is R8, the radius of curvature of the object-side surface of the fifth lens L5 is R9, the radius of curvature of the image-side surface of the fifth lens L5 is R10, the curvature radius of the object-side surface of the sixth lens L6 is R11, and the image-side surface of the sixth lens L6 is R10.
  • the radius of curvature of the object-side surface of the seventh lens L7 is R13
  • the radius of curvature of the image-side surface of the seventh lens L7 is R14
  • the radius of curvature of the object-side surface of the eighth lens L8 is R15
  • the image-side surface of the eighth lens L8 is R15.
  • the radius of curvature of the side surface is R16.
  • 0.45,
  • 1.35,
  • 0.51,
  • 4.14,
  • 1.07,
  • 2.08,
  • 0.01,
  • 7.67.
  • the above limit values ensure that the optical lens 10 can obtain better imaging effects.
  • the optical lens 10 satisfies that R1, R2, R3, R4, R5 and R6 are all greater than 0; at least one of R7 and R8 is greater than 0.
  • R1 , R2 , R3 , R4 , R5 and R6 to be greater than 0, and at least one of R7 and R8 is greater than 0, the optical lens 10 can obtain a better imaging effect.
  • the ratio of the maximum value of the thickness of each lens on the optical axis A from the first lens L1 to the eighth lens L8 to the minimum value of the thickness of each lens on the optical axis A from the first lens L1 to the eighth lens L8 (CTmax/CTmin) It is 3.09; the ratio (Tmin/Tmax) of the maximum value of the interval between any two adjacent lenses in the first lens L1 to the eighth lens L8 to the minimum value of the interval between any two adjacent lenses in the first lens L1 to the eighth lens L8 ) is 0.064; the ratio (Dr5r10/TTL) of the distance from the object-side surface of the third lens L3 to the image-side surface of the fifth lens L5 on the optical axis A and the total optical length (Dr5r10/TTL) is 0.24; the object-side surface or image-side surface of all lenses The ratio (Dmax/Dmin) of the maximum value of the clear hole of the lens to the minimum value of the clear hole of the object-side surface or image-side surface of all lenses
  • the ratio (EPD/Dmax) of the diameter of the entrance pupil to the maximum value of the aperture of the object-side surface or image-side surface of all lenses is in the range of 0.25 to 1.35 (including 0.25 and 1.35); the diameter of the entrance pupil to the third lens L3
  • the ratio (EPD/Dr5r10) of the distance from the object-side surface to the image-side surface of the fifth lens L5 on the optical axis A is in the range of 0.55 to 3.15 (including 0.55 and 3.15); the above-mentioned limited value ensures the small size of the optical lens 10 , and the variable range of the aperture value of the iris is large.
  • the ratio (MaxCT1/MaxCT2L) of the thickness of the first lens L1 on the optical axis A to the maximum value of the thickness of the second lens L2 to the eighth lens L8 on the optical axis A is 1.52; the above-mentioned limit value ensures that the optical lens
  • the 10 can be rationally configured with lenses made of different materials, which is beneficial to the miniaturization and manufacturability of the optical lens 10 .
  • the distance between the first lens L1 and the second lens L2 on the optical axis A is T12
  • the distance between the second lens L2 and the third lens L3 on the optical axis A is T23
  • the distance between the third lens L3 and the fourth lens L4 is
  • the separation distance on the optical axis A is T34
  • the separation distance between the fourth lens L4 and the fifth lens L5 on the optical axis A is T45
  • the separation distance between the fifth lens L5 and the sixth lens L6 on the optical axis A is T56
  • the distance between the sixth lens L6 and the seventh lens L7 on the optical axis A is T67
  • the distance between the seventh lens L7 and the eighth lens L8 on the optical axis A is T78
  • the distance on the optical axis A is BL
  • Tmax is the maximum value of the distance between any two adjacent lenses in the first lens L1 to the eighth lens L8 .
  • Tmax/T12 15.7
  • Tmax/T23 8.7
  • Tmax/T34 2.4
  • Tmax/T45 14.3
  • Tmax/T56 2.6
  • Tmax/T67 4.9
  • Tmax/BL 1.1.
  • the above-mentioned limit values ensure miniaturization of the optical lens 10 .
  • the optical lens 10 has a better imaging effect on the basis of a wide range of aperture values through cooperation between different lenses, and at the same time, the thinning of the electronic device 100 is realized.
  • optical lens may exist independently of each other, or may be combined with each other.
  • the optical lens is thinner or can obtain better imaging quality.
  • Table 7 shows the clear apertures of the object-side surface and the image-side surface of each lens of the optical lens 10 in this embodiment, as shown in Table 7 in detail.
  • Table 8 shows the aspheric coefficients of the optical lens 10 of this embodiment.
  • the number of aspheric surfaces in the optical lens 10 of this embodiment is 16, as shown in Table 8 for details.
  • K represents the cone coefficient in the aspheric curve equation
  • A4, A6, A8, A10, A12, A14, A16, A19, A20 represent the 4th, 6th, 8th, 10th, 12th, 14th, 16th, 18, 20 order aspheric coefficients.
  • each parameter in the table is expressed in scientific notation.
  • -1.07E-01 means -1.07 ⁇ 10 -1
  • -4.11E-02 means -4.11 ⁇ 10 -2 .
  • each lens of the optical lens 10 of the present embodiment wherein, z is a point on the aspheric surface that is r from the optical axis A, and it is the relative distance to the intersection point tangent plane tangent to the aspheric optical axis A, and r is The vertical distance between the point on the aspheric curve and the optical axis A, c is the curvature, k is the cone coefficient, and ⁇ i is the i-th order aspheric coefficient.
  • the different lenses of the optical lens 10 obtained through the above parameter design can play different roles, so that through the cooperation of each lens, a good background blur effect can be obtained on the basis of a large aperture value range. and imaging quality and thin optical lens 10.
  • FIGS 10 and 11 are graphs showing the optical properties of the optical lens 10 according to the second embodiment.
  • FIG. 10 shows the axial chromatic aberration after the light of the optical lens 10 with wavelengths of 650 nm, 610 nm, 555 nm, 510 nm, and 470 nm passes through the optical lens 10 of the second embodiment.
  • the ordinate in FIG. 10 represents the normalized pupil coordinates, and the abscissa represents the axial chromatic aberration, and the unit is mm. It can be seen from FIG. 10 that in this embodiment, the axial chromatic aberration of the optical lens 10 in each state is controlled within a small range.
  • the left diagram is a schematic diagram of field curvature of the optical lens 10
  • the right diagram is a schematic diagram of optical distortion of the optical lens 10
  • the solid line in the left figure is a schematic diagram of field curvature in the meridional direction after the 650nm light passes through the optical lens 10
  • the dotted line is a schematic diagram of the field curvature in the sagittal direction after the 650nm light passes through the optical lens 10
  • the figure on the right is a schematic diagram of optical distortion of 650nm light passing through the optical lens 10 of the second embodiment.
  • the vertical coordinates of the two graphs are object angles, and the horizontal coordinates of the left graph represent the astigmatism values in the meridional direction (dotted line) and sagittal direction (solid line), in millimeters.
  • the figure on the right shows the optical distortion values corresponding to different fields of view, and the unit is percentage. It can be seen from FIG. 11 that in this embodiment, the optical system controls the distortion within a range that cannot be clearly recognized by the naked eye.
  • the optical lens 10 provided in this embodiment through the arrangement of each lens in each lens group and the combination of lenses with a specific optical design, can make the optical lens 10 have better background blur on the basis of a large aperture value range.
  • the miniaturization effect and the imaging effect can be improved, and the thinning of the electronic device 100 can be realized at the same time.
  • FIG. 12 is a schematic structural diagram of the camera module 1 according to the third embodiment of the present application.
  • the optical lens 10 includes an aperture STO and eight lenses.
  • the optical lens 10 includes a diaphragm STO, a first lens L1, a second lens L2, a third lens L3, a fourth lens L4, a fifth lens L5, a sixth lens L6, Seventh lens L7 and eighth lens L8.
  • the aperture STO is a variable aperture, and the aperture value of the aperture STO can be adjusted within the range of 1.2 to 5.0 (including 1.2 and 5.0), realizing multiple position features such as large aperture and small aperture.
  • the structural size of the iris By adjusting the structural size of the iris, the amount of light passing through the optical lens 10 can be controlled, the depth of field of the camera module 1 can be controlled, the effect of blurring the background can be improved, and the image quality can be improved to realize "portrait mode" photography and the like.
  • the ratio (TTL/(ImgH ⁇ EPD)) of the product of the total optical length of the optical lens 10 to the diagonal half length of the effective pixel area of the imaging surface of the optical lens 10 and the diameter of the entrance pupil of the optical lens 10 is greater than or equal to 0.10 , and less than or equal to 1.10.
  • the above-mentioned limited value ensures that the total optical length of the optical lens 10 is the smallest enough, the imaging surface is large, and the range of the aperture value is large, which is conducive to the miniaturization of the optical lens 10 and the improvement of imaging quality.
  • the ratio (STL/TTL) of the distance between the infinite object of the aperture STO and the imaging plane on the optical axis A to the total optical length is in the range of 0.8 to 1.5 (including 0.8 and 1.5).
  • the above-mentioned limited value ensures that the stop STO can be set on the object side of the first lens L1, and can also be set between any two adjacent lenses.
  • the first lens L1 has a positive refractive power
  • the object-side surface of the first lens L1 near the optical axis A is a convex surface, so as to provide the optical lens 10 with the ability to gather light at the object-side end, shorten its total length, and facilitate the optics. Miniaturization of the lens 10.
  • the image-side surface of the first lens L1 is concave near the optical axis A, which can correct astigmatism.
  • the second lens L2 has a negative refractive power.
  • the object-side surface of the second lens L2 is convex near the optical axis A, and the image-side surface of the second lens L2 is concave near the optical axis A.
  • the second lens L2 is beneficial to balance the spherical aberration and chromatic aberration produced by the first lens L1, so as to reduce the generation of color shift and make the image sharper.
  • the third lens L3 has a positive refractive power, the object-side surface of the third lens L3 near the optical axis A is convex, and the image-side surface of the third lens L3 near the optical axis A is concave.
  • the third lens L3 is beneficial to correct the aberration of the optical lens 10 and further balance the spherical aberration and chromatic aberration produced by the first lens L1.
  • the fourth lens L4 has a negative refractive power, and the object-side surface of the fourth lens L4 is concave near the optical axis A, and the image-side surface of the fourth lens L4 is concave near the optical axis A.
  • the fourth lens L4 is beneficial to correct the aberration of the optical lens 10 and balance the spherical aberration and chromatic aberration produced by the first lens L1.
  • the first lens L1 has positive refractive power
  • the second lens L2 has negative refractive power
  • the third lens L3 has positive refractive power
  • the fourth lens L4 has negative refractive power.
  • the fifth lens L5 has a positive refractive power.
  • the object-side surface of the fifth lens L5 near the optical axis A is concave, and the image-side surface of the fifth lens L5 near the optical axis A is convex.
  • the fifth lens L5 can facilitate the optical lens 10 to focus light, effectively shortening the back focal length and the total optical length.
  • the sixth lens L6 has a negative refractive power.
  • the object-side surface of the sixth lens L6 near the optical axis A is convex, and the image-side surface of the sixth lens L6 near the optical axis A is concave.
  • the sixth lens L6 is beneficial to balance the distribution of negative refractive power of the optical lens 10, reduce its sensitivity, and reduce spherical aberration.
  • the seventh lens L7 has a positive refractive power, the object-side surface of the seventh lens L7 is convex at the near optical axis A, the image-side surface of the seventh lens L7 is concave at the near optical axis A, and the off-axis includes at least one concave surface,
  • the seventh lens L7 is beneficial to the light-gathering of the optical lens 10, and can effectively shorten the back focal length and the total optical length.
  • the eighth lens L8 has negative refractive power, the object-side surface of the eighth lens L8 is concave near the optical axis A, and the image-side surface S16 of the eighth lens L8 is concave near the optical axis A.
  • the object-side surface S15 of the eighth lens L8 includes at least one concave surface off-axis, and the image-side surface S16 of the eighth lens L8 includes at least one convex surface off-axis.
  • the eighth lens L8 is beneficial to move the principal point of the optical lens 10 toward the object side, thereby effectively shortening the back focal length and the total optical length, and helping to correct the aberration of the off-axis field of view.
  • Both the object-side surface and the image-side surface of the eighth lens L8 include at least one inflection point to correct the aberration of the off-axis field of view.
  • the inflection point is a curve from the near optical axis A of the lens to the off-axis lens surface, and the center of curvature of the curve moves from the object side to the image side (or from the image side to the object side).
  • the image-side surface of the eighth lens L8 includes at least two critical points to correct off-axis aberrations. Among them, the critical point is defined as the tangent point on the lens surface, except the intersection point with the optical axis, which is tangent to a tangent plane perpendicular to the optical axis.
  • the sixth lens L6 has negative refractive power, and its image-side surface near the optical axis is concave, the seventh lens L7 has positive refractive power, and its object-side surface is concave near the optical axis, and the eighth lens L8 has Negative refractive power, the near optical axis of the image side surface is concave.
  • the sixth lens L6 , the seventh lens L7 , and the eighth lens L8 are configured with proper surface shapes to correct the peripheral aberration of the image to improve the imaging quality and shorten the back focal length, which is helpful for the miniaturization of the camera module.
  • the optical lens 10 through cooperation between different lenses, the optical lens 10 has a better imaging effect in the case of a large aperture value variation range, and realizes miniaturization of the camera module.
  • all surfaces of the lenses of the optical lens 10 are aspheric surfaces, that is, the first lens L1, the second lens L2, the third lens L3, the fourth lens L4, the fifth lens L5, the sixth lens L6,
  • the image-side surface and the object-side surface of the seven lenses L7 and the eighth lens L8 are all aspheric surfaces, the aspheric surfaces have a higher degree of freedom in configuration, and have a good effect of eliminating aberrations, thereby reducing the total length of the optical lens 10, which is conducive to the miniaturization of the optical lens 10 change.
  • the refractive index (Nmax) of the lens with the largest refractive index among all the lenses in the optical lens 10 is 1.67
  • the refractive index (Nmin) of the lens with the smallest refractive index among all the lenses is 1.54.
  • the first lens L1 (N1) is greater than or equal to 1.40 and less than or equal to 2.0; the refractive indices (N3, N5, N7, N8) greater than or equal to 1.50 and less than or equal to 1.55; the refractive index (N2, N4) of the second lens L2 and the fourth lens L4 is greater than or equal to 1.65 and less than or equal to 1.70; the refractive index of the sixth lens L6 (N6) is greater than or equal to 1.57 , and less than or equal to 1.58.
  • the first lens L1 selects low refraction material, medium refraction index material, higher refraction material or very high refraction material
  • the third lens L3, fifth lens L5, seventh lens L7 and eighth lens L8 select low refraction material
  • Higher refractive index materials are selected for the second lens L2 and the fourth lens L4
  • medium refractive index materials are selected for the sixth lens L6.
  • the above-mentioned limited value can ensure that the imaging effect of the optical lens 10 is good on the basis of a wide range of aperture values.
  • the dispersion coefficient (Vmax) of the lens with the largest dispersion coefficient is 56; among all the lenses, the dispersion coefficient (Vmin) of the lens with the smallest dispersion coefficient is 19.5.
  • the above-mentioned limited value ensures the ability of the optical lens 10 to eliminate chromatic aberration and improves the imaging quality of the optical lens 10 .
  • the dispersion coefficient (V1) of the first lens L1 is greater than or equal to 30 and less than or equal to 90; the dispersion coefficients (V3, V5) of the third lens L3, the fifth lens L5, the seventh lens L7, and the eighth lens L8 , V7, V8) greater than or equal to 52, and less than or equal to 60; the dispersion coefficient (V2, V4) of the second lens L2 and the fourth lens L4 is greater than or equal to 15, and less than or equal to 21; the dispersion coefficient of the sixth lens L6 (V6) Greater than or equal to 35 and less than or equal to 40.
  • the first lens L1 selects a material with a low dispersion coefficient or a medium dispersion coefficient or a material with a relatively high dispersion coefficient or a very high dispersion coefficient
  • the third lens L3, the fifth lens L5, the seventh lens L7 and the eighth lens L8 select
  • materials with higher dispersion coefficients materials with low dispersion coefficients are selected for the second lens L2 and fourth lens L4, and materials with medium dispersion coefficients are selected for the sixth lens L6.
  • the above-mentioned limited value can ensure that the imaging effect of the optical lens 10 is good on the basis of a wide range of aperture values.
  • the sum of the reciprocal focal lengths (1/f1+1/f2+1/f3+1/f4) of the first lens L1 to the fourth lens L4 is 0.118; the above-mentioned limit value ensures that when the aperture value is 1.2, the A large amount of light entering the lens through the STO can be coordinated and modulated by the first lens L1 to the fourth lens L4 to achieve a better light-gathering effect and effectively improve the imaging quality of the optical lens 10 .
  • the sum of the reciprocal focal lengths (1/f1+1/f3+1/f5+1/f7) of the first lens L1, the third lens L3, the fifth lens L5, and the seventh lens L7 is 0.317, and the above-mentioned limited value is conducive to correction
  • the aberration of the optical lens 10 balances the spherical aberration and chromatic aberration generated by the first lens L1, and improves the imaging effect of the optical lens 10 .
  • ) of the focal length of the optical lens 10 to the focal length of each lens is 1.4; the ratio (
  • the radius of curvature of the object-side surface of the first lens L1 is R1, the radius of curvature of the image-side surface of the first lens L1 is R2, the radius of curvature of the object-side surface of the second lens L2 is R3, and the radius of curvature of the image-side surface of the second lens L2 is R4, the radius of curvature of the third lens L3 object side surface is R5, the curvature radius of the third lens L3 image side surface is R6, the curvature radius of the fourth lens L4 object side surface is R7, the curvature of the fourth lens L4 image side surface
  • the radius is R8, the radius of curvature of the object-side surface of the fifth lens L5 is R9, the radius of curvature of the image-side surface of the fifth lens L5 is R10, the curvature radius of the object-side surface of the sixth lens L6 is R11, and the image-side surface of the sixth lens L6 is R10.
  • the radius of curvature of the object-side surface of the seventh lens L7 is R13
  • the radius of curvature of the image-side surface of the seventh lens L7 is R14
  • the radius of curvature of the object-side surface of the eighth lens L8 is R15
  • the image-side surface of the eighth lens L8 is R15.
  • the radius of curvature of the side surface is R16.
  • 0.44,
  • 1.35,
  • 0.52,
  • 0.12,
  • 1.09,
  • 2.02,
  • 0.0001,
  • 6.86.
  • the above limit values ensure that the optical lens 10 can obtain better imaging effects.
  • the optical lens 10 satisfies that R1, R2, R3, R4, R5 and R6 are all greater than 0; at least one of R7 and R8 is greater than 0.
  • R1, R2, R3, R4, R5, R6 to be greater than 0, and at least one of R7, R8 is greater than 0, so that the optical lens 10 can obtain a better imaging effect.
  • the ratio of the maximum value of the thickness of each lens on the optical axis A from the first lens L1 to the eighth lens L8 to the minimum value of the thickness of each lens on the optical axis A from the first lens L1 to the eighth lens L8 (CTmax/CTmin) is 3.11; the ratio (Tmin/Tmax) of the maximum value of the interval between any two adjacent lenses in the first lens L1 to the eighth lens L8 to the minimum value of the interval between any two adjacent lenses in the first lens L1 to the eighth lens L8 ) is 0.061; the ratio (Dr5r10/TTL) of the distance from the object-side surface of the third lens L3 to the image-side surface of the fifth lens L5 on the optical axis A and the total optical length (Dr5r10/TTL) is 0.24; the object-side surface or image-side surface of all lenses The ratio (Dmax/Dmin) of the maximum value of the clear hole of the lens to the minimum value of the clear hole of the object-side surface or image-side surface of all lenses is
  • the ratio (EPD/Dmax) of the diameter of the entrance pupil to the maximum value of the aperture of the object-side surface or image-side surface of all lenses is in the range of 0.25 to 1.35 (including 0.25 and 1.35); the diameter of the entrance pupil to the third lens L3
  • the ratio (EPD/Dr5r10) of the distance from the object-side surface to the image-side surface of the fifth lens L5 on the optical axis A is in the range of 0.55 to 3.15 (including 0.55 and 3.15); the above-mentioned limited value ensures the small size of the optical lens 10 , and the variable range of the aperture value of the iris is large.
  • the ratio (MaxCT1/MaxCT2L) of the thickness of the first lens L1 on the optical axis A to the maximum value of the thickness of each lens in the second lens L2 to the eighth lens L8 on the optical axis A is 1.51; the above-mentioned limit value ensures that the optical lens
  • the 10 can be rationally configured with lenses made of different materials, which is beneficial to the miniaturization and manufacturability of the optical lens 10 .
  • the distance between the first lens L1 and the second lens L2 on the optical axis A is T12
  • the distance between the second lens L2 and the third lens L3 on the optical axis A is T23
  • the distance between the third lens L3 and the fourth lens L4 is
  • the separation distance on the optical axis A is T34
  • the separation distance between the fourth lens L4 and the fifth lens L5 on the optical axis A is T45
  • the separation distance between the fifth lens L5 and the sixth lens L6 on the optical axis A is T56
  • the distance between the sixth lens L6 and the seventh lens L7 on the optical axis A is T67
  • the distance between the seventh lens L7 and the eighth lens L8 on the optical axis A is T78
  • the distance on the optical axis A is BL.
  • Tmax is the maximum value of the distance between any two adjacent lenses in the first lens L1 to the eighth lens L8.
  • Tmax/T12 16.4
  • Tmax/T23 9.0
  • Tmax/T34 2.5
  • Tmax/T45 14.0
  • Tmax/T56 2.7
  • Tmax/T67 5.1
  • Tmax/BL 1.2.
  • the above-mentioned limit values ensure miniaturization of the optical lens 10 .
  • the optical lens 10 has a better imaging effect on the basis of a wide range of aperture values through cooperation between different lenses, and at the same time, the thinning of the electronic device 100 is realized.
  • optical lens may exist independently of each other, or may be combined with each other.
  • the optical lens is thinner or can obtain better imaging quality.
  • Table 11 shows the clear apertures of the object-side surface and the image-side surface of each lens of the optical lens 10 in this embodiment, as shown in Table 11 in detail.
  • Table 11 The clear aperture of each lens of the optical lens 10 of the third embodiment
  • Table 12 shows the aspheric coefficients of the optical lens 10 of this embodiment.
  • the number of aspheric surfaces in the optical lens 10 of this embodiment is 16, as shown in Table 12 for details.
  • K represents the cone coefficient in the aspheric curve equation
  • A4, A6, A8, A10, A12, A14, A16, A19, A20 represent the 4th, 6th, 8th, 10th, 12th, 14th, 16th, 18, 20 order aspheric coefficients.
  • each parameter in the table is expressed in scientific notation.
  • -1.07E-01 means -1.07 ⁇ 10 -1
  • -4.11E-02 means -4.11 ⁇ 10 -2 .
  • each lens of the optical lens 10 of the present embodiment wherein, z is a point on the aspheric surface that is r from the optical axis A, and it is the relative distance to the intersection point tangent plane tangent to the aspheric optical axis A, and r is The vertical distance between the point on the aspheric curve and the optical axis A, c is the curvature, k is the cone coefficient, and ⁇ i is the i-th order aspheric coefficient.
  • the different lenses of the optical lens 10 obtained through the above parameter design can play different roles, so that through the cooperation of each lens, a good background blur effect can be obtained on the basis of a large aperture value range. and imaging quality and thin optical lens 10.
  • FIG 13 and 14 are graphs showing the optical properties of the optical lens 10 according to the third embodiment.
  • FIG. 13 shows the axial chromatic aberration of light with wavelengths of 650 nm, 610 nm, 555 nm, 510 nm, and 470 nm in the optical lens 10 after passing through the optical lens 10 of the third embodiment.
  • the ordinate in FIG. 13 represents the normalized pupil coordinates, and the abscissa represents the axial chromatic aberration, and the unit is mm. It can be seen from FIG. 13 that in this embodiment, the axial chromatic aberration of the optical lens 10 in each state is controlled within a small range.
  • the left diagram is a schematic diagram of field curvature of the optical lens 10
  • the right diagram is a schematic diagram of optical distortion of the optical lens 10
  • the solid line in the left figure is a schematic diagram of field curvature in the meridional direction after the 650nm light passes through the optical lens 10
  • the dotted line is a schematic diagram of the field curvature in the sagittal direction after the 650nm light passes through the optical lens 10.
  • the figure on the right is a schematic diagram of optical distortion of 650nm light passing through the optical lens 10 of the third embodiment.
  • the vertical coordinates of the two graphs are object angles, and the horizontal coordinates of the left graph represent the astigmatism values in the meridional direction (dotted line) and sagittal direction (solid line), in millimeters.
  • the figure on the right shows the optical distortion values corresponding to different fields of view, and the unit is percentage. It can be seen from FIG. 14 that in this embodiment, the optical system controls the distortion within a range that cannot be clearly recognized by the naked eye.
  • the optical lens 10 provided in this embodiment through the arrangement of each lens in each lens group and the combination of lenses with a specific optical design, can make the optical lens 10 have better background blur on the basis of a large aperture value range.
  • the miniaturization effect and the imaging effect can be improved, and the thinning of the electronic device 100 can be realized at the same time.
  • FIG. 15 is a schematic structural diagram of the camera module 1 according to the fourth embodiment of the present application.
  • the optical lens 10 includes an aperture STO and eight lenses.
  • the optical lens 10 includes a diaphragm STO, a first lens L1, a second lens L2, a third lens L3, a fourth lens L4, a fifth lens L5, a sixth lens L6, Seventh lens L7 and eighth lens L8.
  • the aperture STO is a variable aperture, and the aperture value of the aperture STO can be adjusted within the range of 1.2 to 5.0 (including 1.2 and 5.0), realizing multiple position features such as large aperture and small aperture.
  • the structural size of the iris By adjusting the structural size of the iris, the amount of light passing through the optical lens 10 can be controlled, the depth of field of the camera module 1 can be controlled, the effect of blurring the background can be improved, and the image quality can be improved to realize "portrait mode" photography and the like.
  • the ratio of the total optical length of the optical lens 10 to the diagonal half length of the effective pixel area of the imaging surface of the optical lens 10 and the product of the entrance pupil diameter of the optical lens 10 is greater than or equal to 0.10 , and less than or equal to 1.10.
  • the above-mentioned limited value ensures that the optical total length of the optical lens 10 is the smallest enough, the imaging surface is large, and the range of the aperture value is large, which is conducive to the miniaturization of the optical lens 10 and the improvement of imaging quality.
  • the ratio (STL/TTL) of the distance between the infinite object of the aperture STO and the imaging plane on the optical axis A to the total optical length is in the range of 0.8 to 1.5 (including 0.8 and 1.5).
  • the above-mentioned limited value ensures that the stop STO can be set on the object side of the first lens L1, and can also be set between any two adjacent lenses.
  • the first lens L1 has a positive refractive power
  • the object-side surface of the first lens L1 near the optical axis A is a convex surface, so as to provide the optical lens 10 with the ability to gather light at the object-side end, shorten its total length, and facilitate the optics. Miniaturization of the lens 10.
  • the image-side surface of the first lens L1 is concave near the optical axis A, which can correct astigmatism.
  • the second lens L2 has a negative refractive power.
  • the object-side surface of the second lens L2 is convex near the optical axis A, and the image-side surface of the second lens L2 is concave near the optical axis A.
  • the second lens L2 is beneficial to balance the spherical aberration and chromatic aberration produced by the first lens L1, so as to reduce the generation of color shift and make the image sharper.
  • the third lens L3 has a positive refractive power, the object-side surface of the third lens L3 near the optical axis A is convex, and the image-side surface of the third lens L3 near the optical axis A is concave.
  • the third lens L3 is beneficial to correct the aberration of the optical lens 10 and further balance the spherical aberration and chromatic aberration produced by the first lens L1.
  • the fourth lens L4 has a negative refractive power.
  • the object-side surface of the fourth lens L4 near the optical axis A is convex, and the image-side surface of the fourth lens L4 near the optical axis A is concave.
  • the fourth lens L4 is beneficial to correct the aberration of the optical lens 10 and balance the spherical aberration and chromatic aberration produced by the first lens L1.
  • the first lens L1 has positive refractive power
  • the second lens L2 has negative refractive power
  • the third lens L3 has positive refractive power
  • the fourth lens L4 has negative refractive power.
  • the fifth lens L5 has a positive refractive power.
  • the object-side surface of the fifth lens L5 near the optical axis A is concave, and the image-side surface of the fifth lens L5 near the optical axis A is convex.
  • the fifth lens L5 can facilitate the optical lens 10 to focus light, effectively shortening the back focal length and the total optical length.
  • the sixth lens L6 has a negative refractive power.
  • the object-side surface of the sixth lens L6 near the optical axis A is convex, and the image-side surface of the sixth lens L6 near the optical axis A is concave.
  • the sixth lens L6 is beneficial to balance the distribution of negative refractive power of the optical lens 10, reduce its sensitivity, and reduce spherical aberration.
  • the seventh lens L7 has a positive refractive power, the object-side surface of the seventh lens L7 is convex at the near optical axis A, the image-side surface of the seventh lens L7 is convex at the near optical axis A, and includes at least one concave surface off-axis,
  • the seventh lens L7 is beneficial to the light-gathering of the optical lens 10, and can effectively shorten the back focal length and the total optical length.
  • the eighth lens L8 has negative refractive power, the object-side surface of the eighth lens L8 is concave near the optical axis A, and the image-side surface S16 of the eighth lens L8 is concave near the optical axis A.
  • the object-side surface S15 of the eighth lens L8 includes at least one concave surface off-axis, and the image-side surface S16 of the eighth lens L8 includes at least one convex surface off-axis.
  • the eighth lens L8 is beneficial to move the principal point of the optical lens 10 toward the object side, thereby effectively shortening the back focal length and the total optical length, and helping to correct the aberration of the off-axis field of view.
  • Both the object-side surface and the image-side surface of the eighth lens L8 include at least one inflection point to correct the aberration of the off-axis field of view.
  • the inflection point is a curve from the near optical axis A of the lens to the off-axis lens surface, and the center of curvature of the curve moves from the object side to the image side (or from the image side to the object side).
  • the image-side surface of the eighth lens L8 includes at least two critical points to correct off-axis aberrations. Among them, the critical point is defined as the tangent point on the lens surface, except the intersection point with the optical axis, which is tangent to a tangent plane perpendicular to the optical axis.
  • the sixth lens L6 has a negative refractive power, and its image-side surface near the optical axis is concave, the seventh lens L7 has positive refractive power, and its object-side surface is convex near the optical axis, and the eighth lens L8 has Negative refractive power, the near optical axis of the image side surface is concave.
  • the sixth lens L6 , the seventh lens L7 , and the eighth lens L8 are configured with proper surface shapes to correct the peripheral aberration of the image to improve the imaging quality and shorten the back focal length, which is helpful for the miniaturization of the camera module.
  • the optical lens 10 through cooperation between different lenses, the optical lens 10 has a better imaging effect in the case of a large aperture value variation range, and realizes miniaturization of the camera module.
  • all surfaces of the lenses of the optical lens 10 are aspheric surfaces, that is, the first lens L1, the second lens L2, the third lens L3, the fourth lens L4, the fifth lens L5, the sixth lens L6,
  • the image-side surface and the object-side surface of the seven lenses L7 and the eighth lens L8 are all aspheric surfaces, the aspheric surfaces have a higher degree of freedom in configuration, and have a good effect of eliminating aberrations, thereby reducing the total length of the optical lens 10, which is conducive to the miniaturization of the optical lens 10 change.
  • the refractive index (Nmax) of the lens with the largest refractive index among all the lenses in the optical lens 10 is 1.67
  • the refractive index (Nmin) of the lens with the smallest refractive index among all the lenses is 1.54.
  • the first lens L1 (N1) is greater than or equal to 1.40 and less than or equal to 2.0; the refractive indices (N3, N5, N7, N8) greater than or equal to 1.50 and less than or equal to 1.55; the refractive index (N2, N4) of the second lens L2 and the fourth lens L4 is greater than or equal to 1.65 and less than or equal to 1.70; the refractive index of the sixth lens L6 (N6) is greater than or equal to 1.57 , and less than or equal to 1.58.
  • the first lens L1 selects low refraction material, medium refraction index material, higher refraction material or very high refraction material
  • the third lens L3, fifth lens L5, seventh lens L7 and eighth lens L8 select low refraction material
  • Higher refractive index materials are selected for the second lens L2 and the fourth lens L4
  • medium refractive index materials are selected for the sixth lens L6.
  • the above-mentioned limited value can ensure that the imaging effect of the optical lens 10 is good on the basis of a wide range of aperture values.
  • the dispersion coefficient (Vmax) of the lens with the largest dispersion coefficient is 56; among all the lenses, the dispersion coefficient (Vmin) of the lens with the smallest dispersion coefficient is 19.5.
  • the above-mentioned limited value ensures the ability of the optical lens 10 to eliminate chromatic aberration and improves the imaging quality of the optical lens 10 .
  • the dispersion coefficient (V1) of the first lens L1 is greater than or equal to 30 and less than or equal to 90; the dispersion coefficients (V3, V5) of the third lens L3, the fifth lens L5, the seventh lens L7, and the eighth lens L8 , V7, V8) greater than or equal to 52, and less than or equal to 60; the dispersion coefficient (V2, V4) of the second lens L2 and the fourth lens L4 is greater than or equal to 15, and less than or equal to 21; the dispersion coefficient of the sixth lens L6 (V6) Greater than or equal to 35 and less than or equal to 40.
  • the first lens L1 selects a material with a low dispersion coefficient or a medium dispersion coefficient or a material with a relatively high dispersion coefficient or a very high dispersion coefficient
  • the third lens L3, the fifth lens L5, the seventh lens L7 and the eighth lens L8 select
  • materials with higher dispersion coefficients materials with low dispersion coefficients are selected for the second lens L2 and fourth lens L4, and materials with medium dispersion coefficients are selected for the sixth lens L6.
  • the above-mentioned limited value can ensure that the imaging effect of the optical lens 10 is good on the basis of a wide range of aperture values.
  • the sum of the reciprocal focal lengths (1/f1+1/f2+1/f3+1/f4) of the first lens L1 to the fourth lens L4 is 0.117; the above-mentioned limit value ensures that when the aperture value is 1.2, the A large amount of light entering the lens through the STO can be coordinated and modulated by the first lens L1 to the fourth lens L4 to achieve a better light-gathering effect and effectively improve the imaging quality of the optical lens 10 .
  • the sum of the reciprocal focal lengths (1/f1+1/f3+1/f5+1/f7) of the first lens L1, the third lens L3, the fifth lens L5, and the seventh lens L7 is 0.328, and the above-mentioned limited value is conducive to correction
  • the aberration of the optical lens 10 balances the spherical aberration and chromatic aberration generated by the first lens L1, and improves the imaging effect of the optical lens 10 .
  • ) of the focal length of the optical lens 10 to the focal length of each lens is 1.4; the ratio (
  • the radius of curvature of the object-side surface of the first lens L1 is R1, the radius of curvature of the image-side surface of the first lens L1 is R2, the radius of curvature of the object-side surface of the second lens L2 is R3, and the radius of curvature of the image-side surface of the second lens L2 is R4, the radius of curvature of the third lens L3 object side surface is R5, the curvature radius of the third lens L3 image side surface is R6, the curvature radius of the fourth lens L4 object side surface is R7, the curvature of the fourth lens L4 image side surface
  • the radius is R8, the radius of curvature of the object-side surface of the fifth lens L5 is R9, the radius of curvature of the image-side surface of the fifth lens L5 is R10, the curvature radius of the object-side surface of the sixth lens L6 is R11, and the image-side surface of the sixth lens L6 is R10.
  • the radius of curvature of the object-side surface of the seventh lens L7 is R13
  • the radius of curvature of the image-side surface of the seventh lens L7 is R14
  • the radius of curvature of the object-side surface of the eighth lens L8 is R15
  • the image-side surface of the eighth lens L8 is R15.
  • the radius of curvature of the side surface is R16.
  • 0.41,
  • 1.35,
  • 0.49,
  • 3.68,
  • 1.19,
  • 2.34,
  • 0.06,
  • 4.46.
  • the above limit values ensure that the optical lens 10 can obtain better imaging effects.
  • the optical lens 10 satisfies that R1, R2, R3, R4, R5 and R6 are all greater than 0; at least one of R7 and R8 is greater than 0.
  • R1 , R2 , R3 , R4 , R5 and R6 to be greater than 0, and at least one of R7 and R8 is greater than 0, the optical lens 10 can obtain a better imaging effect.
  • the ratio of the maximum value of the thickness of each lens on the optical axis A from the first lens L1 to the eighth lens L8 to the minimum value of the thickness of each lens on the optical axis A from the first lens L1 to the eighth lens L8 (CTmax/CTmin) Be 3.32;
  • the ratio (Tmin/Tmax) of the maximum value of the interval between any two adjacent lenses in the first lens L1 to the eighth lens L8 and the minimum value of the interval between any two adjacent lenses in the first lens L1 to the eighth lens L8 ) is 0.067;
  • the ratio (Dr5r10/TTL) of the distance from the object-side surface of the third lens L3 to the image-side surface of the fifth lens L5 on the optical axis A and the total optical length (Dr5r10/TTL) is 0.24;
  • the ratio (Dmax/Dmin) of the maximum value of the clear hole of the lens to the minimum value of the clear hole of the object-side surface or image-side surface of all lenses is 2.
  • the ratio (EPD/Dmax) of the diameter of the entrance pupil to the maximum value of the aperture of the object-side surface or image-side surface of all lenses is in the range of 0.25 to 1.35 (including 0.25 and 1.35); the diameter of the entrance pupil to the third lens L3
  • the ratio (EPD/Dr5r10) of the distance from the object side surface to the image side surface of the fifth lens L5 on the optical axis A is in the range of 0.55 to 3.15 (including 0.55 and 3.15); the above-mentioned limited value ensures the small size of the optical lens 10 , and the variable range of the aperture value of the iris is large.
  • the ratio (MaxCT1/MaxCT2L) of the thickness of the first lens L1 on the optical axis A to the maximum value of the thickness of each lens in the second lens L2 to the eighth lens L8 on the optical axis A is 1.46; the above-mentioned limit value ensures that the optical lens
  • the 10 can be rationally configured with lenses made of different materials, which is beneficial to the miniaturization and manufacturability of the optical lens 10 .
  • the distance between the first lens L1 and the second lens L2 on the optical axis A is T12
  • the distance between the second lens L2 and the third lens L3 on the optical axis A is T23
  • the distance between the third lens L3 and the fourth lens L4 is
  • the separation distance on the optical axis A is T34
  • the separation distance between the fourth lens L4 and the fifth lens L5 on the optical axis A is T45
  • the separation distance between the fifth lens L5 and the sixth lens L6 on the optical axis A is T56
  • the distance between the sixth lens L6 and the seventh lens L7 on the optical axis A is T67
  • the distance between the seventh lens L7 and the eighth lens L8 on the optical axis A is T78
  • the distance on the optical axis A is BL
  • Tmax is the maximum value of the distance between any two adjacent lenses in the first lens L1 to the eighth lens L8 .
  • Tmax/T12 15.0
  • Tmax/T23 7.3
  • Tmax/T34 2.5
  • Tmax/T45 14.0
  • Tmax/T56 2.4
  • Tmax/T67 4.5
  • Tmax/BL 1.1.
  • the above-mentioned limit values ensure miniaturization of the optical lens 10 .
  • the optical lens 10 has a better imaging effect on the basis of a wide range of aperture values through cooperation between different lenses, and at the same time, the thinning of the electronic device 100 is realized.
  • optical lens may exist independently of each other, or may be combined with each other.
  • the optical lens is thinner or can obtain better imaging quality.
  • Table 15 shows the clear apertures of the object-side surface and the image-side surface of each lens of the optical lens 10 in this embodiment, as shown in Table 15 in detail.
  • Table 15 The clear aperture of each lens of the optical lens 10 of the fourth embodiment
  • Table 16 shows the aspheric coefficients of the optical lens 10 of this embodiment.
  • the number of aspheric surfaces in the optical lens 10 of this embodiment is 16, as shown in Table 16 for details.
  • K represents the cone coefficient in the aspheric curve equation
  • A4, A6, A8, A10, A12, A14, A16, A19, A20 represent the 4th, 6th, 8th, 10th, 12th, 14th, 16th, 18, 20 order aspherical coefficients.
  • each parameter in the table is expressed in scientific notation.
  • -1.07E-01 means -1.07 ⁇ 10 -1
  • -4.11E-02 means -4.11 ⁇ 10 -2 .
  • each lens of the optical lens 10 of the present embodiment wherein, z is a point on the aspheric surface that is r from the optical axis A, and it is the relative distance to the intersection point tangent plane tangent to the aspheric optical axis A, and r is The vertical distance between the point on the aspheric curve and the optical axis A, c is the curvature, k is the cone coefficient, and ⁇ i is the i-th order aspheric coefficient.
  • the different lenses of the optical lens 10 obtained through the above parameter design can play different roles, so that through the cooperation of each lens, a good background blur effect can be obtained on the basis of a large aperture value range. and imaging quality and thin optical lens 10.
  • 16 and 17 are graphs showing the optical performance of the optical lens 10 according to the fourth embodiment.
  • FIG. 16 shows the axial chromatic aberration of light with wavelengths of 650 nm, 610 nm, 555 nm, 510 nm, and 470 nm in the optical lens 10 after passing through the optical lens 10 of the fourth embodiment.
  • the ordinate in FIG. 16 represents the normalized pupil coordinates, and the abscissa represents the axial chromatic aberration, and the unit is mm. It can be seen from FIG. 16 that in this embodiment, the axial chromatic aberration of the optical lens 10 in each state is controlled within a small range.
  • the left diagram is a schematic diagram of field curvature of the optical lens 10
  • the right diagram is a schematic diagram of optical distortion of the optical lens 10
  • the solid line in the left figure is a schematic diagram of field curvature in the meridional direction after the 650nm light passes through the optical lens 10
  • the dotted line is a schematic diagram of the field curvature in the sagittal direction after the 650nm light passes through the optical lens 10
  • the figure on the right is a schematic diagram of optical distortion of 650nm light passing through the optical lens 10 of the fourth embodiment.
  • the vertical coordinates of the two graphs are object angles, and the horizontal coordinates of the left graph represent the astigmatism values in the meridional direction (dotted line) and sagittal direction (solid line), in millimeters.
  • the figure on the right shows the optical distortion values corresponding to different fields of view, and the unit is percentage. It can be seen from FIG. 17 that in this embodiment, the optical system controls the distortion within a range that cannot be clearly recognized by the naked eye.
  • the optical lens 10 provided in this embodiment through the arrangement of each lens in each lens group and the combination of lenses with a specific optical design, can make the optical lens 10 have better background blur on the basis of a large aperture value range.
  • the miniaturization effect and the imaging effect can be improved, and the thinning of the electronic device 100 can be realized at the same time.
  • FIG. 18 is a schematic structural diagram of the camera module 1 according to the fifth embodiment of the present application.
  • the optical lens 10 includes an aperture STO and eight lenses.
  • the optical lens 10 includes a diaphragm STO, a first lens L1, a second lens L2, a third lens L3, a fourth lens L4, a fifth lens L5, a sixth lens L6, Seventh lens L7 and eighth lens L8.
  • the aperture STO is a variable aperture, and the aperture value of the aperture STO can be adjusted within the range of 1.2 to 5.0 (including 1.2 and 5.0), realizing multiple position features such as large aperture and small aperture.
  • the structural size of the iris By adjusting the structural size of the iris, the amount of light passing through the optical lens 10 can be controlled, the depth of field of the camera module 1 can be controlled, the background blur effect can be improved, the image quality can be improved, and "portrait mode" photography can be realized.
  • the ratio (TTL/(ImgH ⁇ EPD)) of the product of the total optical length of the optical lens 10 to the diagonal half length of the effective pixel area of the imaging surface of the optical lens 10 and the diameter of the entrance pupil of the optical lens 10 is greater than or equal to 0.10 , and less than or equal to 1.10.
  • the above-mentioned limited value ensures that the total optical length of the optical lens 10 is the smallest enough, the imaging surface is large, and the range of the aperture value is large, which is conducive to the miniaturization of the optical lens 10 and the improvement of imaging quality.
  • the ratio (STL/TTL) of the distance between the infinite object of the aperture STO and the imaging plane on the optical axis A to the total optical length is in the range of 0.8 to 1.5 (including 0.8 and 1.5).
  • the above-mentioned limited value ensures that the stop STO can be set on the object side of the first lens L1, and can also be set between any two adjacent lenses.
  • the first lens L1 has a positive refractive power
  • the object-side surface of the first lens L1 near the optical axis A is a convex surface, so as to provide the optical lens 10 with the ability to gather light at the object-side end, shorten its total length, and facilitate the optics. Miniaturization of the lens 10.
  • the image-side surface of the first lens L1 is concave near the optical axis A, which can correct astigmatism.
  • the second lens L2 has a negative refractive power.
  • the object-side surface of the second lens L2 is convex near the optical axis A, and the image-side surface of the second lens L2 is concave near the optical axis A.
  • the second lens L2 is beneficial to balance the spherical aberration and chromatic aberration produced by the first lens L1, so as to reduce the generation of color shift and make the image sharper.
  • the third lens L3 has a positive refractive power, the object-side surface of the third lens L3 near the optical axis A is convex, and the image-side surface of the third lens L3 near the optical axis A is concave.
  • the third lens L3 is beneficial to correct the aberration of the optical lens 10 and further balance the spherical aberration and chromatic aberration produced by the first lens L1.
  • the fourth lens L4 has a negative refractive power.
  • the object-side surface of the fourth lens L4 near the optical axis A is convex, and the image-side surface of the fourth lens L4 near the optical axis A is concave.
  • the fourth lens L4 is beneficial to correct the aberration of the optical lens 10 and balance the spherical aberration and chromatic aberration produced by the first lens L1.
  • the first lens L1 has positive refractive power
  • the second lens L2 has negative refractive power
  • the third lens L3 has positive refractive power
  • the fourth lens L4 has negative refractive power.
  • the fifth lens L5 has a positive refractive power.
  • the object-side surface of the fifth lens L5 near the optical axis A is concave, and the image-side surface of the fifth lens L5 near the optical axis A is convex.
  • the fifth lens L5 can facilitate the optical lens 10 to focus light, effectively shortening the back focal length and the total optical length.
  • the sixth lens L6 has a negative refractive power.
  • the object-side surface of the sixth lens L6 near the optical axis A is convex, and the image-side surface of the sixth lens L6 near the optical axis A is concave.
  • the sixth lens L6 is beneficial to balance the distribution of negative refractive power of the optical lens 10, reduce its sensitivity, and reduce spherical aberration.
  • the seventh lens L7 has a positive refractive power, the object-side surface of the seventh lens L7 is convex at the near optical axis A, the image-side surface of the seventh lens L7 is convex at the near optical axis A, and includes at least one concave surface off-axis,
  • the seventh lens L7 is beneficial to the light-gathering of the optical lens 10, and can effectively shorten the back focal length and the total optical length.
  • the eighth lens L8 has negative refractive power, the object-side surface of the eighth lens L8 is concave near the optical axis A, and the image-side surface S16 of the eighth lens L8 is concave near the optical axis A.
  • the object-side surface S15 of the eighth lens L8 includes at least one concave surface off-axis, and the image-side surface S16 of the eighth lens L8 includes at least one convex surface off-axis.
  • the eighth lens L8 is beneficial to move the principal point of the optical lens 10 toward the object side, thereby effectively shortening the back focal length and the total optical length, and helping to correct the aberration of the off-axis field of view.
  • Both the object-side surface and the image-side surface of the eighth lens L8 include at least one inflection point to correct the aberration of the off-axis field of view.
  • the inflection point is a curve from the near optical axis A of the lens to the off-axis lens surface, and the center of curvature of the curve moves from the object side to the image side (or from the image side to the object side).
  • the image-side surface of the eighth lens L8 includes at least two critical points to correct off-axis aberrations. Among them, the critical point is defined as the tangent point on the lens surface, except the intersection point with the optical axis, which is tangent to a tangent plane perpendicular to the optical axis.
  • the sixth lens L6 has a negative refractive power, and its image-side surface near the optical axis is concave, the seventh lens L7 has positive refractive power, and its object-side surface is convex near the optical axis, and the eighth lens L8 has Negative refractive power, the near optical axis of the image side surface is concave.
  • the sixth lens L6 , the seventh lens L7 , and the eighth lens L8 are configured with proper surface shapes to correct the peripheral aberration of the image to improve the imaging quality and shorten the back focal length, which is helpful for the miniaturization of the camera module.
  • the optical lens 10 through cooperation between different lenses, the optical lens 10 has a better imaging effect in the case of a large aperture value variation range, and realizes miniaturization of the camera module.
  • all surfaces of the lenses of the optical lens 10 are aspheric surfaces, that is, the first lens L1, the second lens L2, the third lens L3, the fourth lens L4, the fifth lens L5, the sixth lens L6,
  • the image-side surface and the object-side surface of the seven lenses L7 and the eighth lens L8 are all aspheric surfaces, the aspheric surfaces have a higher degree of freedom in configuration, and have a good effect of eliminating aberrations, thereby reducing the total length of the optical lens 10, which is conducive to the miniaturization of the optical lens 10 change.
  • the refractive index (Nmax) of the lens with the largest refractive index among all the lenses in the optical lens 10 is 1.67
  • the refractive index (Nmin) of the lens with the smallest refractive index among all the lenses is 1.54.
  • the first lens L1 (N1) is greater than or equal to 1.40 and less than or equal to 2.0; the refractive indices (N3, N5, N7, N8) greater than or equal to 1.50 and less than or equal to 1.55; the refractive index (N2, N4) of the second lens L2 and the fourth lens L4 is greater than or equal to 1.65 and less than or equal to 1.70; the refractive index of the sixth lens L6 (N6) is greater than or equal to 1.57 , and less than or equal to 1.58.
  • the first lens L1 selects low refraction material, medium refraction index material, higher refraction material or very high refraction material
  • the third lens L3, fifth lens L5, seventh lens L7 and eighth lens L8 select low refraction material
  • Higher refractive index materials are selected for the second lens L2 and the fourth lens L4
  • medium refractive index materials are selected for the sixth lens L6.
  • the above-mentioned limited value can ensure that the imaging effect of the optical lens 10 is good on the basis of a wide range of aperture values.
  • the dispersion coefficient (Vmax) of the lens with the largest dispersion coefficient is 56; among all the lenses, the dispersion coefficient (Vmin) of the lens with the smallest dispersion coefficient is 19.5.
  • the above-mentioned limited value ensures the ability of the optical lens 10 to eliminate chromatic aberration and improves the imaging quality of the optical lens 10 .
  • the dispersion coefficient (V1) of the first lens L1 is greater than or equal to 30 and less than or equal to 90; the dispersion coefficients (V3, V5) of the third lens L3, the fifth lens L5, the seventh lens L7, and the eighth lens L8 , V7, V8) greater than or equal to 52, and less than or equal to 60; the dispersion coefficient (V2, V4) of the second lens L2 and the fourth lens L4 is greater than or equal to 15, and less than or equal to 21; the dispersion coefficient of the sixth lens L6 (V6) Greater than or equal to 35 and less than or equal to 40.
  • the first lens L1 selects a material with a low dispersion coefficient or a medium dispersion coefficient or a material with a relatively high dispersion coefficient or a very high dispersion coefficient
  • the third lens L3, the fifth lens L5, the seventh lens L7 and the eighth lens L8 select
  • materials with higher dispersion coefficients materials with low dispersion coefficients are selected for the second lens L2 and fourth lens L4, and materials with medium dispersion coefficients are selected for the sixth lens L6.
  • the above-mentioned limited value can ensure that the imaging effect of the optical lens 10 is good on the basis of a wide range of aperture values.
  • the sum of the reciprocal focal lengths (1/f1+1/f2+1/f3+1/f4) of the first lens L1 to the fourth lens L4 is 0.123; the above-mentioned limit value ensures that when the aperture value is 1.2, the A large amount of light entering the lens through the STO can be coordinated and modulated by the first lens L1 to the fourth lens L4 to achieve a better light-gathering effect and effectively improve the imaging quality of the optical lens 10 .
  • the sum of the reciprocal focal lengths (1/f1+1/f3+1/f5+1/f7) of the first lens L1, the third lens L3, the fifth lens L5 and the seventh lens L7 is 0.321, and the above-mentioned limited value is conducive to correction
  • the aberration of the optical lens 10 balances the spherical aberration and chromatic aberration generated by the first lens L1, and improves the imaging effect of the optical lens 10 .
  • ) of the focal length of the optical lens 10 to the focal length of each lens is 1.4; the ratio (
  • the radius of curvature of the object-side surface of the first lens L1 is R1, the radius of curvature of the image-side surface of the first lens L1 is R2, the radius of curvature of the object-side surface of the second lens L2 is R3, and the radius of curvature of the image-side surface of the second lens L2 is R4, the radius of curvature of the third lens L3 object side surface is R5, the curvature radius of the third lens L3 image side surface is R6, the curvature radius of the fourth lens L4 object side surface is R7, the curvature of the fourth lens L4 image side surface
  • the radius is R8, the radius of curvature of the object-side surface of the fifth lens L5 is R9, the radius of curvature of the image-side surface of the fifth lens L5 is R10, the curvature radius of the object-side surface of the sixth lens L6 is R11, and the image-side surface of the sixth lens L6 is R10.
  • the radius of curvature of the object-side surface of the seventh lens L7 is R13
  • the radius of curvature of the image-side surface of the seventh lens L7 is R14
  • the radius of curvature of the object-side surface of the eighth lens L8 is R15
  • the image-side surface of the eighth lens L8 is R15.
  • the radius of curvature of the side surface is R16.
  • 0.44,
  • 1.36,
  • 0.50,
  • 1.24,
  • 1.06,
  • 2.16,
  • 0.01,
  • 7.51.
  • the above limit values ensure that the optical lens 10 can obtain better imaging effects.
  • the optical lens 10 satisfies that R1, R2, R3, R4, R5 and R6 are all greater than 0; at least one of R7 and R8 is greater than 0.
  • R1 , R2 , R3 , R4 , R5 and R6 to be greater than 0, and at least one of R7 and R8 is greater than 0, the optical lens 10 can obtain a better imaging effect.
  • the ratio of the maximum value of the thickness of each lens on the optical axis A from the first lens L1 to the eighth lens L8 to the minimum value of the thickness of each lens on the optical axis A from the first lens L1 to the eighth lens L8 (CTmax/CTmin) Be 3.16;
  • the ratio (Tmin/Tmax) of the maximum value of the interval between any two adjacent lenses in the first lens L1 to the eighth lens L8 and the minimum value of the interval between any two adjacent lenses in the first lens L1 to the eighth lens L8 ) is 0.064;
  • the ratio (Dr5r10/TTL) of the distance from the object-side surface of the third lens L3 to the image-side surface of the fifth lens L5 on the optical axis A and the total optical length (Dr5r10/TTL) is 0.24;
  • the ratio (Dmax/Dmin) of the maximum value of the clear hole of the lens to the minimum value of the clear hole of the object side surface or image side surface of all lenses is 2.93;
  • the ratio (EPD/Dmax) of the diameter of the entrance pupil to the maximum value of the aperture of the object-side surface or image-side surface of all lenses is in the range of 0.25 to 1.35 (including 0.25 and 1.35); the diameter of the entrance pupil to the third lens L3
  • the ratio (EPD/Dr5r10) of the distance from the object-side surface to the image-side surface of the fifth lens L5 on the optical axis A is in the range of 0.55 to 3.15 (including 0.55 and 3.15); the above-mentioned limited value ensures the small size of the optical lens 10 , and the variable range of the aperture value of the iris is large.
  • the ratio (MaxCT1/MaxCT2L) of the thickness of the first lens L1 on the optical axis A to the maximum value of the thickness of each lens in the second lens L2 to the eighth lens L8 on the optical axis A is 1.55; the above-mentioned limit value ensures that the optical lens
  • the 10 can be rationally configured with lenses made of different materials, which is beneficial to the miniaturization and manufacturability of the optical lens 10 .
  • the distance between the first lens L1 and the second lens L2 on the optical axis A is T12
  • the distance between the second lens L2 and the third lens L3 on the optical axis A is T23
  • the distance between the third lens L3 and the fourth lens L4 is
  • the separation distance on the optical axis A is T34
  • the separation distance between the fourth lens L4 and the fifth lens L5 on the optical axis A is T45
  • the separation distance between the fifth lens L5 and the sixth lens L6 on the optical axis A is T56
  • the distance between the sixth lens L6 and the seventh lens L7 on the optical axis A is T67
  • the distance between the seventh lens L7 and the eighth lens L8 on the optical axis A is T78
  • the distance on the optical axis A is BL
  • Tmax is the maximum value of the distance between any two adjacent lenses in the first lens L1 to the eighth lens L8 .
  • the above-mentioned limit values ensure miniaturization of the optical lens 10 .
  • the optical lens 10 through cooperation between different lenses, on the basis of a wide range of aperture values, the optical lens 10 has a better imaging effect, and at the same time, the thinning of the electronic device 100 is realized.
  • optical lens may exist independently of each other, or may be combined with each other.
  • the optical lens is thinner or can obtain better imaging quality.
  • Table 19 shows the clear apertures of the object-side surface and the image-side surface of each lens of the optical lens 10 in this embodiment, as shown in Table 19 in detail.
  • Table 19 The clear aperture of each lens of the optical lens 10 of the fifth embodiment
  • Table 20 shows the aspheric coefficients of the optical lens 10 of this embodiment.
  • the number of aspheric surfaces in the optical lens 10 of this embodiment is 16, as shown in Table 20 for details.
  • K represents the cone coefficient in the aspheric curve equation
  • A4, A6, A8, A10, A12, A14, A16, A19, A20 represent the 4th, 6th, 8th, 10th, 12th, 14th, 16th, 18, 20 order aspherical coefficients.
  • each parameter in the table is expressed in scientific notation.
  • -1.07E-01 means -1.07 ⁇ 10 -1
  • -4.11E-02 means -4.11 ⁇ 10 -2 .
  • each lens of the optical lens 10 of the present embodiment wherein, z is a point on the aspheric surface that is r from the optical axis A, and it is the relative distance to the intersection point tangent plane tangent to the aspheric optical axis A, and r is The vertical distance between the point on the aspheric curve and the optical axis A, c is the curvature, k is the cone coefficient, and ⁇ i is the i-th order aspheric coefficient.
  • the different lenses of the optical lens 10 obtained through the above parameter design can play different roles, so that through the cooperation of each lens, a good background blur effect can be obtained on the basis of a large aperture value range. and imaging quality and thin optical lens 10.
  • 19 and 20 are graphs showing the optical performance of the optical lens 10 according to the fifth embodiment.
  • FIG. 19 shows the axial chromatic aberration of light with wavelengths of 650 nm, 610 nm, 555 nm, 510 nm, and 470 nm in the optical lens 10 after passing through the optical lens 10 of the fifth embodiment.
  • the ordinate in FIG. 19 represents the normalized pupil coordinates, and the abscissa represents the axial chromatic aberration, and the unit is mm. It can be seen from FIG. 19 that in this embodiment, the axial chromatic aberration of the optical lens 10 in each state is controlled within a small range.
  • the left diagram is a schematic diagram of field curvature of the optical lens 10
  • the right diagram is a schematic diagram of optical distortion of the optical lens 10
  • the solid line in the left figure is a schematic diagram of field curvature in the meridional direction after the 650nm light passes through the optical lens 10
  • the dotted line is a schematic diagram of the field curvature in the sagittal direction after the 650nm light passes through the optical lens 10
  • the figure on the right is a schematic diagram of optical distortion of 650nm light passing through the optical lens 10 of the fifth embodiment.
  • the vertical coordinates of the two graphs are object angles, and the horizontal coordinates of the left graph represent the astigmatism values in the meridional direction (dotted line) and sagittal direction (solid line), in millimeters.
  • the figure on the right shows the optical distortion values corresponding to different fields of view, and the unit is percentage. It can be seen from FIG. 20 that in this embodiment, the optical system controls the distortion within a range that cannot be clearly recognized by the naked eye.
  • the optical lens 10 provided in this embodiment through the arrangement of each lens in each lens group and the combination of lenses with a specific optical design, can make the optical lens 10 have better background blur on the basis of a large aperture value range.
  • the miniaturization effect and the imaging effect can be improved, and the thinning of the electronic device 100 can be realized at the same time.
  • FIG. 21 is a schematic structural diagram of the camera module 1 according to the sixth embodiment of the present application.
  • the optical lens 10 includes an aperture STO and eight lenses.
  • the optical lens 10 includes a diaphragm STO, a first lens L1, a second lens L2, a third lens L3, a fourth lens L4, a fifth lens L5, a sixth lens L6, Seventh lens L7 and eighth lens L8.
  • the aperture STO is a variable aperture, and the aperture value of the aperture STO can be adjusted within the range of 1.2 to 5.0 (including 1.2 and 5.0), realizing multiple position features such as large aperture and small aperture.
  • the structural size of the iris By adjusting the structural size of the iris, the amount of light passing through the optical lens 10 can be controlled, the depth of field of the camera module 1 can be controlled, the effect of blurring the background can be improved, and the image quality can be improved to realize "portrait mode" photography and the like.
  • the ratio (TTL/(ImgH ⁇ EPD)) of the product of the total optical length of the optical lens 10 to the diagonal half length of the effective pixel area of the imaging surface of the optical lens 10 and the diameter of the entrance pupil of the optical lens 10 is greater than or equal to 0.10 , and less than or equal to 1.10.
  • the above-mentioned limited value ensures that the total optical length of the optical lens 10 is the smallest enough, the imaging surface is large, and the range of the aperture value is large, which is conducive to the miniaturization of the optical lens 10 and the improvement of imaging quality.
  • the ratio (STL/TTL) of the distance between the infinite object of the aperture STO and the imaging plane on the optical axis A to the total optical length is in the range of 0.8 to 1.5 (including 0.8 and 1.5).
  • the above-mentioned limited value ensures that the stop STO can be set on the object side of the first lens L1, and can also be set between any two adjacent lenses.
  • the first lens L1 has a positive refractive power
  • the object-side surface of the first lens L1 near the optical axis A is a convex surface, so as to provide the optical lens 10 with the ability to gather light at the object-side end, shorten its total length, and facilitate the optics. Miniaturization of the lens 10.
  • the image-side surface of the first lens L1 is concave near the optical axis A, which can correct astigmatism.
  • the second lens L2 has a positive refractive power.
  • the object-side surface of the second lens L2 is convex near the optical axis A, and the image-side surface of the second lens L2 is concave near the optical axis A.
  • the second lens L2 is beneficial to balance the spherical aberration and chromatic aberration produced by the first lens L1, so as to reduce the generation of color shift and make the image sharper.
  • the third lens L3 has a positive refractive power, the object-side surface of the third lens L3 near the optical axis A is convex, and the image-side surface of the third lens L3 near the optical axis A is concave.
  • the third lens L3 is beneficial to correct the aberration of the optical lens 10 and further balance the spherical aberration and chromatic aberration produced by the first lens L1.
  • the fourth lens L4 has a negative refractive power.
  • the object-side surface of the fourth lens L4 near the optical axis A is convex, and the image-side surface of the fourth lens L4 near the optical axis A is concave.
  • the fourth lens L4 is beneficial to correct the aberration of the optical lens 10 and balance the spherical aberration and chromatic aberration produced by the first lens L1.
  • the first lens L1 has positive refractive power
  • the second lens L2 has positive refractive power
  • the third lens L3 has positive refractive power
  • the fourth lens L4 has negative refractive power.
  • the fifth lens L5 has a positive refractive power.
  • the object-side surface of the fifth lens L5 near the optical axis A is concave, and the image-side surface of the fifth lens L5 near the optical axis A is convex.
  • the fifth lens L5 can facilitate the optical lens 10 to focus light, effectively shortening the back focal length and the total optical length.
  • the sixth lens L6 has a negative refractive power.
  • the object-side surface of the sixth lens L6 near the optical axis A is convex, and the image-side surface of the sixth lens L6 near the optical axis A is concave.
  • the sixth lens L6 is beneficial to balance the distribution of negative refractive power of the optical lens 10, reduce its sensitivity, and reduce spherical aberration.
  • the seventh lens L7 has a positive refractive power, the object-side surface of the seventh lens L7 is convex at the near optical axis A, the image-side surface of the seventh lens L7 is convex at the near optical axis A, and includes at least one concave surface off-axis,
  • the seventh lens L7 is beneficial to the light-gathering of the optical lens 10, and can effectively shorten the back focal length and the total optical length.
  • the eighth lens L8 has negative refractive power, the object-side surface of the eighth lens L8 is concave near the optical axis A, and the image-side surface S16 of the eighth lens L8 is concave near the optical axis A.
  • the object-side surface S15 of the eighth lens L8 includes at least one concave surface off-axis, and the image-side surface S16 of the eighth lens L8 includes at least one convex surface off-axis.
  • the eighth lens L8 is beneficial to move the principal point of the optical lens 10 toward the object side, thereby effectively shortening the back focal length and the total optical length, and helping to correct the aberration of the off-axis field of view.
  • Both the object-side surface and the image-side surface of the eighth lens L8 include at least one inflection point to correct the aberration of the off-axis field of view.
  • the inflection point is a curve from the near optical axis A of the lens to the off-axis lens surface, and the center of curvature of the curve moves from the object side to the image side (or from the image side to the object side).
  • the image-side surface of the eighth lens L8 includes at least two critical points to correct off-axis aberrations. Among them, the critical point is defined as the tangent point on the lens surface, except the intersection point with the optical axis, which is tangent to a tangent plane perpendicular to the optical axis.
  • the sixth lens L6 has a negative refractive power, and its image-side surface near the optical axis is concave, the seventh lens L7 has positive refractive power, and its object-side surface is convex near the optical axis, and the eighth lens L8 has Negative refractive power, the near optical axis of the image side surface is concave.
  • the sixth lens L6 , the seventh lens L7 , and the eighth lens L8 are configured with proper surface shapes to correct the peripheral aberration of the image to improve the imaging quality and shorten the back focal length, which is helpful for the miniaturization of the camera module.
  • the optical lens 10 through cooperation between different lenses, the optical lens 10 has a better imaging effect in the case of a large aperture value variation range, and realizes miniaturization of the camera module.
  • all surfaces of the lenses of the optical lens 10 are aspheric surfaces, that is, the first lens L1, the second lens L2, the third lens L3, the fourth lens L4, the fifth lens L5, the sixth lens L6,
  • the image-side surface and the object-side surface of the seven lenses L7 and the eighth lens L8 are all aspheric surfaces, the aspheric surfaces have a higher degree of freedom in configuration, and have a good effect of eliminating aberrations, thereby reducing the total length of the optical lens 10, which is conducive to the miniaturization of the optical lens 10 change.
  • the refractive index (Nmax) of the lens with the largest refractive index among all the lenses in the optical lens 10 is 1.68
  • the refractive index (Nmin) of the smallest lens among all the lenses is 1.50.
  • the above limit values ensure that the lens can be made of resin or glass.
  • the first lens L1 (N1) is greater than or equal to 1.40 and less than or equal to 2.0; the refractive indices (N3, N5, N7, N8) greater than or equal to 1.50 and less than or equal to 1.55; the refractive index (N2, N4) of the second lens L2 and the fourth lens L4 is greater than or equal to 1.65 and less than or equal to 1.70; the refractive index of the sixth lens L6 (N6) is greater than or equal to 1.57 , and less than or equal to 1.58.
  • the first lens L1 selects low refraction material, medium refraction index material, higher refraction material or very high refraction material
  • the third lens L3, fifth lens L5, seventh lens L7 and eighth lens L8 select low refraction material
  • Higher refractive index materials are selected for the second lens L2 and the fourth lens L4
  • medium refractive index materials are selected for the sixth lens L6.
  • the above-mentioned limited value can ensure that the imaging effect of the optical lens 10 is good on the basis of a wide range of aperture values.
  • the dispersion coefficient (Vmax) of the lens with the largest dispersion coefficient is 81.00; among all the lenses, the dispersion coefficient (Vmin) of the lens with the smallest dispersion coefficient is 19.5.
  • the above-mentioned limited value ensures the ability of the optical lens 10 to eliminate chromatic aberration and improves the imaging quality of the optical lens 10 .
  • the dispersion coefficient (V1) of the first lens L1 is greater than or equal to 30 and less than or equal to 90; the dispersion coefficients (V3, V5) of the third lens L3, the fifth lens L5, the seventh lens L7, and the eighth lens L8 , V7, V8) greater than or equal to 52, and less than or equal to 60; the dispersion coefficient (V2, V4) of the second lens L2 and the fourth lens L4 is greater than or equal to 15, and less than or equal to 21; the dispersion coefficient of the sixth lens L6 (V6) Greater than or equal to 35 and less than or equal to 40.
  • the first lens L1 selects a material with a low dispersion coefficient or a medium dispersion coefficient or a material with a relatively high dispersion coefficient or a very high dispersion coefficient
  • the third lens L3, the fifth lens L5, the seventh lens L7 and the eighth lens L8 select
  • materials with higher dispersion coefficients materials with low dispersion coefficients are selected for the second lens L2 and fourth lens L4, and materials with medium dispersion coefficients are selected for the sixth lens L6.
  • the above-mentioned limited value can ensure that the imaging effect of the optical lens 10 is good on the basis of a wide range of aperture values.
  • the sum of the reciprocal focal lengths (1/f1+1/f2+1/f3+1/f4) of the first lens L1 to the fourth lens L4 is 0.11; the above-mentioned limit value ensures that when the aperture value is 1.2, the A large amount of light entering the lens through the STO can be coordinated and modulated by the first lens L1 to the fourth lens L4 to achieve a better light-gathering effect and effectively improve the imaging quality of the optical lens 10 .
  • the sum of the reciprocal focal lengths (1/f1+1/f3+1/f5+1/f7) of the first lens L1, the third lens L3, the fifth lens L5 and the seventh lens L7 is 0.32, and the above-mentioned limited value is conducive to correction
  • the aberration of the optical lens 10 balances the spherical aberration and chromatic aberration generated by the first lens L1, and improves the imaging effect of the optical lens 10 .
  • ) of the focal length of the optical lens 10 to the focal length of each lens is 1.34; the ratio (
  • the radius of curvature of the object-side surface of the first lens L1 is R1, the radius of curvature of the image-side surface of the first lens L1 is R2, the radius of curvature of the object-side surface of the second lens L2 is R3, and the radius of curvature of the image-side surface of the second lens L2 is R4, the radius of curvature of the third lens L3 object side surface is R5, the curvature radius of the third lens L3 image side surface is R6, the curvature radius of the fourth lens L4 object side surface is R7, the curvature of the fourth lens L4 image side surface
  • the radius is R8, the radius of curvature of the object-side surface of the fifth lens L5 is R9, the radius of curvature of the image-side surface of the fifth lens L5 is R10, the curvature radius of the object-side surface of the sixth lens L6 is R11, and the image-side surface of the sixth lens L6 is R10.
  • the radius of curvature of the object-side surface of the seventh lens L7 is R13
  • the radius of curvature of the image-side surface of the seventh lens L7 is R14
  • the radius of curvature of the object-side surface of the eighth lens L8 is R15
  • the image-side surface of the eighth lens L8 is R15.
  • the radius of curvature of the side surface is R16.
  • the optical lens 10 satisfies that R1, R2, R3, R4, R5 and R6 are all greater than 0; at least one of R7 and R8 is greater than 0.
  • R1 , R2 , R3 , R4 , R5 and R6 to be greater than 0, and at least one of R7 and R8 is greater than 0, the optical lens 10 can obtain a better imaging effect.
  • the ratio of the maximum value of the thickness of each lens on the optical axis A from the first lens L1 to the eighth lens L8 to the minimum value of the thickness of each lens on the optical axis A from the first lens L1 to the eighth lens L8 (CTmax/CTmin) is 3.30; the ratio of the maximum value of the interval between any two adjacent lenses in the first lens L1 to the eighth lens L8 to the minimum value of the interval between any two adjacent lenses in the first lens L1 to the eighth lens L8 (Tmin/Tmax ) is 0.080; the ratio (Dr5r10/TTL) of the distance from the object-side surface of the third lens L3 to the image-side surface of the fifth lens L5 on the optical axis A and the total optical length (Dr5r10/TTL) is 0.27; the object-side surface or image-side surface of all lenses The ratio (Dmax/Dmin) of the maximum value of the clear hole of the lens to the minimum value of the clear hole of the object side surface or image side surface of all lenses is 2.82;
  • the ratio (EPD/Dmax) of the diameter of the entrance pupil to the maximum value of the aperture of the object-side surface or image-side surface of all lenses is in the range of 0.25 to 1.35 (including 0.25 and 1.35); the diameter of the entrance pupil to the third lens L3
  • the ratio (EPD/Dr5r10) of the distance from the object-side surface to the image-side surface of the fifth lens L5 on the optical axis A is in the range of 0.55 to 3.15 (including 0.55 and 3.15); the above-mentioned limited value ensures the small size of the optical lens 10 , and the variable range of the aperture value of the iris is large.
  • the ratio (MaxCT1/MaxCT2L) of the thickness of the first lens L1 on the optical axis A to the maximum value of the thickness of the second lens L2 to the eighth lens L8 on the optical axis A is 1.58; the above-mentioned limit value ensures that the optical lens
  • the 10 can be rationally configured with lenses made of different materials, which is beneficial to the miniaturization and manufacturability of the optical lens 10 .
  • the distance between the first lens L1 and the second lens L2 on the optical axis A is T12
  • the distance between the second lens L2 and the third lens L3 on the optical axis A is T23
  • the distance between the third lens L3 and the fourth lens L4 is
  • the separation distance on the optical axis A is T34
  • the separation distance between the fourth lens L4 and the fifth lens L5 on the optical axis A is T45
  • the separation distance between the fifth lens L5 and the sixth lens L6 on the optical axis A is T56
  • the distance between the sixth lens L6 and the seventh lens L7 on the optical axis A is T67
  • the distance between the seventh lens L7 and the eighth lens L8 on the optical axis A is T78
  • the distance on the optical axis A is BL
  • Tmax is the maximum value of the distance between any two adjacent lenses in the first lens L1 to the eighth lens L8 .
  • Tmax/T12 41.63
  • Tmax/T23 6.24
  • Tmax/T34 1.6
  • Tmax/T45 13.92
  • Tmax/T56 2.74
  • Tmax/T67 3.37
  • Tmax/BL 0.75.
  • the optical lens 10 has a better imaging effect on the basis of a wide range of aperture values through cooperation between different lenses, and at the same time, the thinning of the electronic device 100 is realized.
  • optical lens may exist independently of each other, or may be combined with each other.
  • the optical lens is thinner or can obtain better imaging quality.
  • Table 23 shows the clear apertures of the object-side surface and the image-side surface of each lens of the optical lens 10 in this embodiment, as shown in Table 23 specifically.
  • Table 23 Clear aperture of each lens in the optical lens 10 of the sixth embodiment
  • Table 24 shows the aspheric coefficients of the optical lens 10 of this embodiment.
  • the number of aspheric surfaces in the optical lens 10 of this embodiment is 16, as shown in Table 24 for details.
  • K represents the cone coefficient in the aspheric curve equation
  • A4, A6, A8, A10, A12, A14, A16, A19, A20, A22, A24, A26, A28 represent the 4th, 6th, 8th, 10, 12, 14, 16, 18, 20, 22, 24, 26, 28 order aspheric coefficients.
  • each parameter in the table is expressed in scientific notation. For example, -1.07E-01 means -1.07 ⁇ 10 -1 ; -4.11E-02 means -4.11 ⁇ 10 -2 .
  • each lens of the optical lens 10 of the present embodiment wherein, z is a point on the aspheric surface that is r from the optical axis A, and it is the relative distance to the intersection point tangent plane tangent to the aspheric optical axis A, and r is The vertical distance between the point on the aspheric curve and the optical axis A, c is the curvature, k is the cone coefficient, and ⁇ i is the i-th order aspheric coefficient.
  • the different lenses of the optical lens 10 obtained through the above parameter design can play different roles, so that through the cooperation of each lens, a good background blur effect can be obtained on the basis of a large aperture value range. and imaging quality and thin optical lens 10.
  • 22 and 23 are graphs showing the optical performance of the optical lens 10 according to the sixth embodiment.
  • FIG. 22 shows the axial chromatic aberration of the light of the optical lens 10 with wavelengths of 650 nm, 610 nm, 555 nm, 510 nm, and 470 nm passing through the optical lens 10 of the sixth embodiment.
  • the ordinate in FIG. 22 represents the normalized pupil coordinates, and the abscissa represents the axial chromatic aberration, and the unit is mm. It can be seen from FIG. 22 that in this embodiment, the axial chromatic aberration of the optical lens 10 in each state is controlled within a small range.
  • the left diagram is a schematic diagram of field curvature of the optical lens 10
  • the right diagram is a schematic diagram of optical distortion of the optical lens 10
  • the solid line in the left figure is a schematic diagram of field curvature in the meridional direction after the 650nm light passes through the optical lens 10
  • the dotted line is a schematic diagram of the field curvature in the sagittal direction after the 650nm light passes through the optical lens 10
  • the figure on the right is a schematic diagram of optical distortion of 650nm light passing through the optical lens 10 of the sixth embodiment.
  • the vertical coordinates of the two graphs are object angles, and the horizontal coordinates of the left graph represent the astigmatism values in the meridional direction (dotted line) and sagittal direction (solid line), in millimeters.
  • the figure on the right shows the optical distortion values corresponding to different fields of view, and the unit is percentage. It can be seen from FIG. 23 that in this embodiment, the optical system controls the distortion within a range that cannot be clearly recognized by the naked eye.
  • the optical lens 10 provided in this embodiment through the arrangement of each lens in each lens group and the combination of lenses with a specific optical design, can make the optical lens 10 have better background blur on the basis of a large aperture value range.
  • the miniaturization effect and the imaging effect can be improved, and the thinning of the electronic device 100 can be realized at the same time.
  • FIG. 24 is a schematic structural diagram of the camera module 1 according to the seventh embodiment of the present application.
  • the optical lens 10 includes an aperture STO and eight lenses.
  • the optical lens 10 includes a diaphragm STO, a first lens L1, a second lens L2, a third lens L3, a fourth lens L4, a fifth lens L5, a sixth lens L6, Seventh lens L7 and eighth lens L8.
  • the aperture STO is a variable aperture, and the aperture value of the aperture STO can be adjusted within the range of 1.2 to 5.0 (including 1.2 and 5.0), realizing multiple position features such as large aperture and small aperture.
  • the structural size of the iris By adjusting the structural size of the iris, the amount of light passing through the optical lens 10 can be controlled, the depth of field of the camera module 1 can be controlled, the effect of blurring the background can be improved, and the image quality can be improved to realize "portrait mode" photography and the like.
  • the ratio (TTL/(ImgH ⁇ EPD)) of the product of the total optical length of the optical lens 10 to the diagonal half length of the effective pixel area of the imaging surface of the optical lens 10 and the diameter of the entrance pupil of the optical lens 10 is greater than or equal to 0.10 , and less than or equal to 1.10.
  • the above-mentioned limited value ensures that the total optical length of the optical lens 10 is the smallest enough, the imaging surface is large, and the range of the aperture value is large, which is conducive to the miniaturization of the optical lens 10 and the improvement of imaging quality.
  • the ratio (STL/TTL) of the distance between the infinite object of the diaphragm STO and the imaging plane on the optical axis A to the total optical length is in the range of 0.8 to 1.5 (including 0.8 and 1.5).
  • the above-mentioned limited value ensures that the stop STO can be set on the object side of the first lens L1, and can also be set between any two adjacent lenses.
  • the first lens L1 has a positive refractive power
  • the object-side surface of the first lens L1 near the optical axis A is a convex surface, so as to provide the optical lens 10 with the ability to gather light at the object-side end, shorten its total length, and facilitate the optics. Miniaturization of the lens 10.
  • the image-side surface of the first lens L1 is concave near the optical axis A, which can correct astigmatism.
  • the second lens L2 has a negative refractive power.
  • the object-side surface of the second lens L2 is convex near the optical axis A, and the image-side surface of the second lens L2 is concave near the optical axis A.
  • the second lens L2 is beneficial to balance the spherical aberration and chromatic aberration produced by the first lens L1, so as to reduce the generation of color shift and make the image sharper.
  • the third lens L3 has a positive refractive power, the object-side surface of the third lens L3 near the optical axis A is convex, and the image-side surface of the third lens L3 near the optical axis A is concave.
  • the third lens L3 is beneficial to correct the aberration of the optical lens 10 and further balance the spherical aberration and chromatic aberration produced by the first lens L1.
  • the fourth lens L4 has a negative refractive power.
  • the object-side surface of the fourth lens L4 near the optical axis A is convex, and the image-side surface of the fourth lens L4 near the optical axis A is concave.
  • the fourth lens L4 is beneficial to correct the aberration of the optical lens 10 and balance the spherical aberration and chromatic aberration produced by the first lens L1.
  • the first lens L1 has positive refractive power
  • the second lens L2 has negative refractive power
  • the third lens L3 has positive refractive power
  • the fourth lens L4 has negative refractive power.
  • the fifth lens L5 has a positive refractive power.
  • the object-side surface of the fifth lens L5 near the optical axis A is concave, and the image-side surface of the fifth lens L5 near the optical axis A is convex.
  • the fifth lens L5 can facilitate the optical lens 10 to focus light, effectively shortening the back focal length and the total optical length.
  • the sixth lens L6 has a negative refractive power.
  • the object-side surface of the sixth lens L6 near the optical axis A is convex, and the image-side surface of the sixth lens L6 near the optical axis A is concave.
  • the sixth lens L6 is beneficial to balance the distribution of negative refractive power of the optical lens 10, reduce its sensitivity, and reduce spherical aberration.
  • the seventh lens L7 has a positive refractive power, the object-side surface of the seventh lens L7 is convex at the near optical axis A, the image-side surface of the seventh lens L7 is convex at the near optical axis A, and includes at least one concave surface off-axis,
  • the seventh lens L7 is beneficial to the light-gathering of the optical lens 10, and can effectively shorten the back focal length and the total optical length.
  • the eighth lens L8 has negative refractive power, the object-side surface of the eighth lens L8 is concave near the optical axis A, and the image-side surface S16 of the eighth lens L8 is concave near the optical axis A.
  • the object-side surface S15 of the eighth lens L8 includes at least one concave surface off-axis, and the image-side surface S16 of the eighth lens L8 includes at least one convex surface off-axis.
  • the eighth lens L8 is beneficial to move the principal point of the optical lens 10 toward the object side, thereby effectively shortening the back focal length and the total optical length, and helping to correct the aberration of the off-axis field of view.
  • Both the object-side surface and the image-side surface of the eighth lens L8 include at least one inflection point to correct the aberration of the off-axis field of view.
  • the inflection point is a curve from the near optical axis A of the lens to the off-axis lens surface, and the center of curvature of the curve moves from the object side to the image side (or from the image side to the object side).
  • the image-side surface of the eighth lens L8 includes at least two critical points to correct off-axis aberrations. Among them, the critical point is defined as the tangent point on the lens surface, except the intersection point with the optical axis, which is tangent to a tangent plane perpendicular to the optical axis.
  • the sixth lens L6 has a negative refractive power, and its image-side surface near the optical axis is concave, the seventh lens L7 has positive refractive power, and its object-side surface is convex near the optical axis, and the eighth lens L8 has Negative refractive power, the near optical axis of the image side surface is concave.
  • the sixth lens L6 , the seventh lens L7 , and the eighth lens L8 are configured with proper surface shapes to correct the peripheral aberration of the image to improve the imaging quality and shorten the back focal length, which is helpful for the miniaturization of the camera module.
  • the optical lens 10 through cooperation between different lenses, the optical lens 10 has a better imaging effect in the case of a large aperture value variation range, and realizes miniaturization of the camera module.
  • all surfaces of the lenses of the optical lens 10 are aspheric surfaces, that is, the first lens L1, the second lens L2, the third lens L3, the fourth lens L4, the fifth lens L5, the sixth lens L6,
  • the image-side surface and the object-side surface of the seven lenses L7 and the eighth lens L8 are all aspheric surfaces, the aspheric surfaces have a higher degree of freedom in configuration, and have a good effect of eliminating aberrations, thereby reducing the total length of the optical lens 10, which is conducive to the miniaturization of the optical lens 10 change.
  • the refractive index (Nmax) of the lens with the largest refractive index among all the lenses in the optical lens 10 is 1.80
  • the refractive index (Nmin) of the lens with the smallest refractive index among all the lenses is 1.54.
  • the first lens L1 (N1) is greater than or equal to 1.40 and less than or equal to 2.0; the refractive indices (N3, N5, N7, N8) greater than or equal to 1.50 and less than or equal to 1.55; the refractive index (N2, N4) of the second lens L2 and the fourth lens L4 is greater than or equal to 1.65 and less than or equal to 1.70; the refractive index of the sixth lens L6 (N6) is greater than or equal to 1.57 , and less than or equal to 1.58.
  • the first lens L1 selects low refraction material, medium refraction index material, higher refraction material or very high refraction material
  • the third lens L3, fifth lens L5, seventh lens L7 and eighth lens L8 select low refraction material
  • Higher refractive index materials are selected for the second lens L2 and the fourth lens L4
  • medium refractive index materials are selected for the sixth lens L6.
  • the above-mentioned limited value can ensure that the imaging effect of the optical lens 10 is good on the basis of a wide range of aperture values.
  • the dispersion coefficient (Vmax) of the lens with the largest dispersion coefficient is 55.8; among all the lenses, the dispersion coefficient (Vmin) of the lens with the smallest dispersion coefficient is 19.5.
  • the above-mentioned limited value ensures the ability of the optical lens 10 to eliminate chromatic aberration and improves the imaging quality of the optical lens 10 .
  • the dispersion coefficient (V1) of the first lens L1 is greater than or equal to 30 and less than or equal to 90; the dispersion coefficients (V3, V5) of the third lens L3, the fifth lens L5, the seventh lens L7, and the eighth lens L8 , V7, V8) greater than or equal to 52, and less than or equal to 60; the dispersion coefficient (V2, V4) of the second lens L2 and the fourth lens L4 is greater than or equal to 15, and less than or equal to 21; the dispersion coefficient of the sixth lens L6 (V6) Greater than or equal to 35 and less than or equal to 40.
  • the first lens L1 selects a material with a low dispersion coefficient or a medium dispersion coefficient or a material with a relatively high dispersion coefficient or a very high dispersion coefficient
  • the third lens L3, the fifth lens L5, the seventh lens L7 and the eighth lens L8 select
  • materials with higher dispersion coefficients materials with low dispersion coefficients are selected for the second lens L2 and fourth lens L4, and materials with medium dispersion coefficients are selected for the sixth lens L6.
  • the above-mentioned limited value can ensure that the imaging effect of the optical lens 10 is good on the basis of a wide range of aperture values.
  • the sum of the reciprocal focal lengths (1/f1+1/f2+1/f3+1/f4) of the first lens L1 to the fourth lens L4 is 0.10; the above-mentioned limit value ensures that when the aperture value is 1.2, the A large amount of light entering the lens through the STO can be coordinated and modulated by the first lens L1 to the fourth lens L4 to achieve a better light-gathering effect and effectively improve the imaging quality of the optical lens 10 .
  • the sum of the reciprocal focal lengths (1/f1+1/f3+1/f5+1/f7) of the first lens L1, the third lens L3, the fifth lens L5 and the seventh lens L7 is 0.37, and the above-mentioned limited value is conducive to correction
  • the aberration of the optical lens 10 balances the spherical aberration and chromatic aberration generated by the first lens L1, and improves the imaging effect of the optical lens 10 .
  • ) of the focal length of the optical lens 10 to the focal length of each lens is 1.35; the ratio (
  • the radius of curvature of the object-side surface of the first lens L1 is R1, the radius of curvature of the image-side surface of the first lens L1 is R2, the radius of curvature of the object-side surface of the second lens L2 is R3, and the radius of curvature of the image-side surface of the second lens L2 is R4, the radius of curvature of the third lens L3 object side surface is R5, the curvature radius of the third lens L3 image side surface is R6, the curvature radius of the fourth lens L4 object side surface is R7, the curvature of the fourth lens L4 image side surface
  • the radius is R8, the radius of curvature of the object-side surface of the fifth lens L5 is R9, the radius of curvature of the image-side surface of the fifth lens L5 is R10, the curvature radius of the object-side surface of the sixth lens L6 is R11, and the image-side surface of the sixth lens L6
  • the radius of curvature of the side surface is R16.
  • 0.61,
  • 1.34,
  • 0.45,
  • 2.29,
  • 2.54,
  • 1.37,
  • 0.25,
  • 8.70.
  • the above limit values ensure that the optical lens 10 can obtain better imaging effects.
  • the optical lens 10 satisfies that R1, R2, R3, R4, R5 and R6 are all greater than 0; at least one of R7 and R8 is greater than 0.
  • R1 , R2 , R3 , R4 , R5 and R6 to be greater than 0, and at least one of R7 and R8 is greater than 0, the optical lens 10 can obtain a better imaging effect.
  • the ratio of the maximum value of the thickness of each lens on the optical axis A from the first lens L1 to the eighth lens L8 to the minimum value of the thickness of each lens on the optical axis A from the first lens L1 to the eighth lens L8 (CTmax/CTmin) It is 2.29; the ratio of the maximum value of the interval between any two adjacent lenses in the first lens L1 to the eighth lens L8 to the minimum value of the interval between any two adjacent lenses in the first lens L1 to the eighth lens L8 (Tmin/Tmax ) is 0.08; the ratio (Dr5r10/TTL) of the distance from the object-side surface of the third lens L3 to the image-side surface of the fifth lens L5 on the optical axis A and the total optical length (Dr5r10/TTL) is 0.29; the object-side surface or image-side surface of all lenses The ratio (Dmax/Dmin) of the maximum value of the clear hole of the lens to the minimum value of the clear hole of the object-side surface or image-side surface of all lenses is 2.
  • the ratio (EPD/Dmax) of the diameter of the entrance pupil to the maximum value of the aperture of the object-side surface or image-side surface of all lenses is in the range of 0.25 to 1.35 (including 0.25 and 1.35); the diameter of the entrance pupil to the third lens L3
  • the ratio (EPD/Dr5r10) of the distance from the object-side surface to the image-side surface of the fifth lens L5 on the optical axis A is in the range of 0.55 to 3.15 (including 0.55 and 3.15); the above-mentioned limited value ensures the small size of the optical lens 10 , and the variable range of the aperture value of the iris is large.
  • the ratio (MaxCT1/MaxCT2L) of the thickness of the first lens L1 on the optical axis A to the maximum value of the thickness of each lens in the second lens L2 to the eighth lens L8 on the optical axis A is 1.10; the above-mentioned limit value ensures that the optical lens
  • the 10 can be rationally configured with lenses made of different materials, which is beneficial to the miniaturization and manufacturability of the optical lens 10 .
  • the distance between the first lens L1 and the second lens L2 on the optical axis A is T12
  • the distance between the second lens L2 and the third lens L3 on the optical axis A is T23
  • the distance between the third lens L3 and the fourth lens L4 is
  • the separation distance on the optical axis A is T34
  • the separation distance between the fourth lens L4 and the fifth lens L5 on the optical axis A is T45
  • the separation distance between the fifth lens L5 and the sixth lens L6 on the optical axis A is T56
  • the distance between the sixth lens L6 and the seventh lens L7 on the optical axis A is T67
  • the distance between the seventh lens L7 and the eighth lens L8 on the optical axis A is T78
  • the distance on the optical axis A is BL
  • Tmax is the maximum value of the distance between any two adjacent lenses in the first lens L1 to the eighth lens L8 .
  • the above-mentioned limit values ensure miniaturization of the optical lens 10 .
  • the optical lens 10 has a better imaging effect on the basis of a wide range of aperture values through cooperation between different lenses, and at the same time, the thinning of the electronic device 100 is realized.
  • optical lens may exist independently of each other, or may be combined with each other.
  • the optical lens is thinner or can obtain better imaging quality.
  • Table 27 shows the clear apertures of the object-side surface and the image-side surface of each lens of the optical lens 10 in this embodiment, as shown in Table 27 specifically.
  • Table 27 Clear aperture of each lens in the optical lens 10 of the seventh embodiment
  • Table 28 shows the aspheric coefficients of the optical lens 10 of this embodiment.
  • the number of aspheric surfaces in the optical lens 10 of this embodiment is 16, as shown in Table 28 for details.
  • K represents the cone coefficient in the aspheric curve equation
  • A4, A6, A8, A10, A12, A14, A16, A19, A20, A22, A24, A26, A28, A30 represent the 4th, 6th, 8, 10, 12, 14, 16, 18, 20, 22, 24, 26, 28, 30 order aspheric coefficients.
  • each parameter in the table is expressed in scientific notation. For example, -1.07E-01 means -1.07 ⁇ 10 -1 ; -4.11E-02 means -4.11 ⁇ 10 -2 .
  • each lens of the optical lens 10 of the present embodiment wherein, z is a point on the aspheric surface that is r from the optical axis A, and it is the relative distance to the intersection point tangent plane tangent to the aspheric optical axis A, and r is The vertical distance between the point on the aspheric curve and the optical axis A, c is the curvature, k is the cone coefficient, and ⁇ i is the i-th order aspheric coefficient.
  • the different lenses of the optical lens 10 obtained through the above parameter design can play different roles, so that through the cooperation of each lens, a good background blur effect can be obtained on the basis of a large aperture value range. and imaging quality and thin optical lens 10.
  • 25 and 26 are graphs showing the optical performance of the optical lens 10 according to the seventh embodiment.
  • FIG. 25 shows the axial chromatic aberration after the light of the optical lens 10 with wavelengths of 650 nm, 610 nm, 555 nm, 510 nm, and 470 nm passes through the optical lens 10 of the seventh embodiment.
  • the ordinate in FIG. 25 represents the normalized pupil coordinates, and the abscissa represents the axial chromatic aberration, and the unit is mm. It can be seen from FIG. 25 that in this embodiment, the axial chromatic aberration of the optical lens 10 in each state is controlled within a small range.
  • the left diagram is a schematic diagram of field curvature of the optical lens 10
  • the right diagram is a schematic diagram of optical distortion of the optical lens 10
  • the solid line in the left figure is a schematic diagram of field curvature in the meridional direction after the 650nm light passes through the optical lens 10
  • the dotted line is a schematic diagram of the field curvature in the sagittal direction after the 650nm light passes through the optical lens 10
  • the figure on the right is a schematic diagram of optical distortion of 650nm light passing through the optical lens 10 of the seventh embodiment.
  • the vertical coordinates of the two graphs are object angles, and the horizontal coordinates of the left graph represent the astigmatism values in the meridional direction (dotted line) and sagittal direction (solid line), in millimeters.
  • the figure on the right shows the optical distortion values corresponding to different fields of view, and the unit is percentage. It can be seen from FIG. 26 that in this embodiment, the optical system controls the distortion within a range that cannot be clearly recognized by the naked eye.
  • the optical lens 10 provided in this embodiment through the arrangement of each lens in each lens group and the combination of lenses with a specific optical design, can make the optical lens 10 have better background blur on the basis of a large aperture value range.
  • the miniaturization effect and the imaging effect can be improved, and the thinning of the electronic device 100 can be realized at the same time.
  • FIG. 27 is a schematic structural diagram of the camera module 1 according to the eighth embodiment of the present application.
  • the optical lens 10 includes an aperture STO and seven lenses.
  • the optical lens 10 includes a diaphragm STO, a first lens L1, a second lens L2, a third lens L3, a fourth lens L4, a fifth lens L5, a sixth lens L6 and The seventh lens L7.
  • the aperture STO is a variable aperture, and the aperture value of the aperture STO can be adjusted within the range of 1.2 to 5.0 (including 1.2 and 5.0), realizing multiple position features such as large aperture and small aperture.
  • the structural size of the iris By adjusting the structural size of the iris, the amount of light passing through the optical lens 10 can be controlled, the depth of field of the camera module 1 can be controlled, the effect of blurring the background can be improved, and the image quality can be improved to realize "portrait mode" photography and the like.
  • the ratio (TTL/(ImgH ⁇ EPD)) of the product of the total optical length of the optical lens 10 to the diagonal half length of the effective pixel area of the imaging surface of the optical lens 10 and the diameter of the entrance pupil of the optical lens 10 is greater than or equal to 0.10 , and less than or equal to 1.10.
  • the above-mentioned limited value ensures that the total optical length of the optical lens 10 is the smallest enough, the imaging surface is large, and the range of the aperture value is large, which is conducive to the miniaturization of the optical lens 10 and the improvement of imaging quality.
  • the ratio (STL/TTL) of the distance between the infinite object of the aperture STO and the imaging plane on the optical axis A to the total optical length is in the range of 0.8 to 1.5 (including 0.8 and 1.5).
  • the above-mentioned limited value ensures that the stop STO can be set on the object side of the first lens L1, and can also be set between any two adjacent lenses.
  • the first lens L1 has a positive refractive power
  • the object-side surface of the first lens L1 near the optical axis A is a convex surface, so as to provide the optical lens 10 with the ability to gather light at the object-side end, shorten its total length, and facilitate the optics. Miniaturization of the lens 10.
  • the image-side surface of the first lens L1 is concave near the optical axis A, which can correct astigmatism.
  • the second lens L2 has a negative refractive power.
  • the object-side surface of the second lens L2 is convex near the optical axis A, and the image-side surface of the second lens L2 is concave near the optical axis A.
  • the second lens L2 is beneficial to balance the spherical aberration and chromatic aberration produced by the first lens L1, so as to reduce the generation of color shift and make the image sharper.
  • the third lens L3 has a negative refractive power, the object-side surface of the third lens L3 near the optical axis A is convex, and the image-side surface of the third lens L3 near the optical axis A is concave.
  • the third lens L3 is beneficial to correct the aberration of the optical lens 10 and balance the spherical aberration and chromatic aberration produced by the first lens L1.
  • the first lens L1 has positive refractive power
  • the second lens L2 has negative refractive power
  • the third lens L3 has negative refractive power.
  • the fourth lens L4 has a positive refractive power, and the object-side surface of the fourth lens L4 is convex near the optical axis A, and the image-side surface of the fourth lens L4 is convex near the optical axis A.
  • the fourth lens L4 can facilitate the optical lens 10 to focus light, effectively shortening the back focal length and the total optical length.
  • the fifth lens L5 has a negative refractive power.
  • the object-side surface of the fifth lens L5 is concave near the optical axis A, and the image-side surface of the fifth lens L5 is concave near the optical axis A.
  • the fifth lens L5 is beneficial to balance the distribution of the negative refractive power of the optical lens 10, reduce its sensitivity, and reduce spherical aberration.
  • the sixth lens L6 has a positive refractive power, the object-side surface of the sixth lens L6 is convex at the near optical axis A, the image-side surface of the sixth lens L6 is concave at the near optical axis A, and includes at least one concave surface off-axis,
  • the sixth lens L6 is beneficial to adjust the curvature of field and balance the aberration of different object distances.
  • the seventh lens L7 has a negative refractive power
  • the object side surface of the seventh lens L7 is convex at the near optical axis A
  • the image side surface of the seventh lens L7 is concave at the near optical axis A
  • the object side surface S13 of the seventh lens L7 is
  • the off-axis location includes at least one concave surface
  • the off-axis location of the image-side surface S14 of the seventh lens L7 includes at least one convex surface.
  • the seventh lens L7 is beneficial to move the principal point of the optical lens 10 toward the object side, thereby effectively shortening the back focal length and the total optical length, and helping to correct the aberration of the off-axis field of view.
  • the critical point is defined as the tangent point on the lens surface, except the intersection point with the optical axis, which is tangent to a tangent plane perpendicular to the optical axis.
  • the fifth lens L5 has negative refractive power, and its image-side surface near the optical axis is concave
  • the sixth lens L6 has positive refractive power
  • its object-side surface is convex near the optical axis
  • the seventh lens L7 has Negative refractive power, the near optical axis of the image side surface is convex.
  • the fifth lens L5 , the sixth lens L6 , and the seventh lens L7 are configured with appropriate surface shapes to correct the peripheral aberration of the image to improve the imaging quality and shorten the back focal length, which is helpful for the miniaturization of the camera module.
  • the optical lens 10 through cooperation between different lenses, the optical lens 10 has a better imaging effect in the case of a large aperture value variation range, and realizes miniaturization of the camera module.
  • all the surfaces of the lenses of the optical lens 10 are aspheric, that is, the first lens L1, the second lens L2, the third lens L3, the fourth lens L4, the fifth lens L5, the sixth lens L6 and the first lens L1.
  • the image-side surface and the object-side surface of the seven lenses L7 are both aspherical, and the aspheric surface has a higher degree of freedom of configuration and a better effect of eliminating aberrations, thereby reducing the total length of the optical lens 10, which is beneficial to the miniaturization of the optical lens 10.
  • the refractive index (Nmax) of the lens with the largest refractive index among all the lenses in the optical lens 10 is 1.68
  • the refractive index (Nmin) of the lens with the smallest refractive index among all the lenses is 1.54.
  • the first lens L1 (N1) is greater than or equal to 1.40 and less than or equal to 2.0; the refractive indices (N3, N5, N7) of the third lens L3, fifth lens L5, and seventh lens L7 are greater than or equal to 1.50, and Less than or equal to 1.55; the refractive index (N2, N4) of the second lens L2 and the fourth lens L4 is greater than or equal to 1.65, and less than or equal to 1.70; the refractive index (N6) of the sixth lens L6 is greater than or equal to 1.57, and less than or equal to 1.58.
  • the first lens L1 selects low refraction material, medium refraction material, higher refraction material or very high refraction material
  • the third lens L3, the fifth lens L5 and the seventh lens L7 select low refraction material
  • the second The lens L2 and the fourth lens L4 are made of higher refractive index materials
  • the sixth lens L6 is made of medium refractive index materials.
  • the dispersion coefficient (Vmax) of the lens with the largest dispersion coefficient is 56; among all the lenses, the dispersion coefficient (Vmin) of the lens with the smallest dispersion coefficient is 20.4.
  • the above-mentioned limited value ensures the ability of the optical lens 10 to eliminate chromatic aberration and improves the imaging quality of the optical lens 10 .
  • the dispersion coefficient (V1) of the first lens L1 is greater than or equal to 30 and less than or equal to 90; the dispersion coefficients (V3, V5, V7) of the third lens L3, the fifth lens L5, and the seventh lens L7 are greater than or equal to 52 and less than or equal to 60; the dispersion coefficient (V2, V4) of the second lens L2 and the fourth lens L4 is greater than or equal to 15 and less than or equal to 21; the dispersion coefficient (V6) of the sixth lens L6 is greater than or equal to 35 and less than or equal to 40.
  • the first lens L1 selects a material with a low dispersion coefficient or a medium dispersion coefficient or a material with a high dispersion coefficient or a very high dispersion coefficient
  • the third lens L3, the fifth lens L5 and the seventh lens L7 select a material with a higher dispersion coefficient
  • the second lens L2 and the fourth lens L4 select materials with a low dispersion coefficient
  • the sixth lens L6 selects materials with a medium dispersion coefficient.
  • the above-mentioned limited value can ensure that the imaging effect of the optical lens 10 is good on the basis of a wide range of aperture values.
  • the sum of the reciprocal focal lengths (1/f1+1/f2+1/f3+1/f4) of the first lens L1 to the fourth lens L4 is 0.12; the above-mentioned limit value ensures that when the aperture value is 1.2, the A large amount of light entering the lens through the STO can be coordinated and modulated by the first lens L1 to the fourth lens L4 to achieve a better light-gathering effect and effectively improve the imaging quality of the optical lens 10 .
  • the sum of the reciprocal focal lengths (1/f1+1/f3+1/f5+1/f7) of the first lens L1, the third lens L3, the fifth lens L5 and the seventh lens L7 is -0.09, and the above-mentioned limit value is favorable
  • the aberration of the optical lens 10 is corrected, the spherical aberration and chromatic aberration produced by the first lens L1 are balanced, and the imaging effect of the optical lens 10 is improved.
  • ) of the focal length of the optical lens 10 to the focal length of each lens is 1.40; the ratio (
  • the radius of curvature of the object-side surface of the first lens L1 is R1, the radius of curvature of the image-side surface of the first lens L1 is R2, the radius of curvature of the object-side surface of the second lens L2 is R3, and the radius of curvature of the image-side surface of the second lens L2 is R4, the radius of curvature of the third lens L3 object side surface is R5, the curvature radius of the third lens L3 image side surface is R6, the curvature radius of the fourth lens L4 object side surface is R7, the curvature of the fourth lens L4 image side surface
  • the radius is R8, the radius of curvature of the object-side surface of the fifth lens L5 is R9, the radius of curvature of the image-side surface of the fifth lens L5 is R10, the curvature radius of the object-side surface of the sixth lens L6 is R11, and the image-side surface of the sixth lens L6 is R10.
  • the radius of curvature of the seventh lens L7 is R12
  • the radius of curvature of the object-side surface of the seventh lens L7 is R13
  • the radius of curvature of the image-side surface of the seventh lens L7 is R14.
  • 0.33,
  • 1.65,
  • 1.34,
  • -1.05,
  • -3.25,
  • 0.58,
  • 3.38.
  • the above limit values ensure that the optical lens 10 can obtain better imaging effects.
  • the optical lens 10 satisfies that R1, R2, R3, R4, R5 and R6 are all greater than 0, and at least one of R7 and R8 is greater than 0. Through the above limitations, the optical lens 10 can obtain a better imaging effect.
  • the ratio of the maximum value of the thickness of each lens on the optical axis A from the first lens L1 to the seventh lens L7 to the minimum value of the thickness of each lens on the optical axis A from the first lens L1 to the seventh lens L7 (CTmax/CTmin) is 3.5; the ratio of the maximum value of the interval between any two adjacent lenses in the first lens L1 to the seventh lens L7 to the minimum value of the interval between any two adjacent lenses in the first lens L1 to the seventh lens L7 (Tmin/Tmax ) is 0.04; the ratio (Dr5r10/TTL) of the distance from the object-side surface of the third lens L3 to the image-side surface of the fifth lens L5 on the optical axis A and the total optical length (Dr5r10/TTL) is 0.28; the object-side surface or image-side surface of all lenses
  • the ratio (Dmax/Dmin) of the maximum value of the clear hole of the lens to the minimum value of the clear hole of the object-side surface or image-side surface of all lenses is
  • the ratio (EPD/Dmax) of the diameter of the entrance pupil to the maximum value of the aperture of the object-side surface or image-side surface of all lenses is in the range of 0.25 to 1.35 (including 0.25 and 1.35); the diameter of the entrance pupil to the third lens L3
  • the ratio (EPD/Dr5r10) of the distance from the object-side surface to the image-side surface of the fifth lens L5 on the optical axis A is in the range of 0.55 to 3.15 (including 0.55 and 3.15); the above-mentioned limited value ensures the small size of the optical lens 10 , and the variable range of the aperture value of the iris is large.
  • the ratio (MaxCT1/MaxCT2L) of the thickness of the first lens L1 on the optical axis A to the maximum value of the thickness of each lens in the second lens L2 to the seventh lens L7 on the optical axis A is 1.10; the above-mentioned limit value ensures that the optical lens
  • the 10 can be rationally configured with lenses made of different materials, which is beneficial to the miniaturization and manufacturability of the optical lens 10 .
  • the distance between the first lens L1 and the second lens L2 on the optical axis A is T12
  • the distance between the second lens L2 and the third lens L3 on the optical axis A is T23
  • the distance between the third lens L3 and the fourth lens L4 is
  • the separation distance on the optical axis A is T34
  • the separation distance between the fourth lens L4 and the fifth lens L5 on the optical axis A is T45
  • the separation distance between the fifth lens L5 and the sixth lens L6 on the optical axis A is T56
  • the distance between the sixth lens L6 and the seventh lens L7 on the optical axis A is T67
  • the distance from the image-side surface of the seventh lens L7 to the imaging plane on the optical axis A is BL
  • the distance between the first lens L1 and the seventh lens L7 is
  • the maximum value of the distance between any two adjacent lenses is Tmax.
  • the above-mentioned limit values ensure miniaturization of the optical lens 10 .
  • the optical lens 10 has a better imaging effect on the basis of a wide range of aperture values through cooperation between different lenses, and at the same time, the thinning of the electronic device 100 is realized.
  • optical lens may exist independently of each other, or may be combined with each other.
  • the optical lens is thinner or can obtain better imaging quality.
  • Table 31 shows the clear apertures of the object-side surface and the image-side surface of each lens of the optical lens 10 in this embodiment, as shown in Table 31 in detail.
  • Table 32 shows the aspheric coefficients of the optical lens 10 of this embodiment.
  • the number of aspheric surfaces in the optical lens 10 of this embodiment is 16, as shown in Table 32 for details.
  • K represents the cone coefficient in the aspheric curve equation
  • A4, A6, A8, A10, A12, A14, A16, A19, A20 represent the 4th, 6th, 8th, 10th, 12th, 14th, 16th, 18, 20 order aspherical coefficients.
  • each parameter in the table is expressed in scientific notation.
  • -1.07E-01 means -1.07 ⁇ 10 -1
  • -4.11E-02 means -4.11 ⁇ 10 -2 .
  • each lens of the optical lens 10 of the present embodiment wherein, z is a point on the aspheric surface that is r from the optical axis A, and it is the relative distance to the intersection point tangent plane tangent to the aspheric optical axis A, and r is The vertical distance between the point on the aspheric curve and the optical axis A, c is the curvature, k is the cone coefficient, and ⁇ i is the i-th order aspheric coefficient.
  • the different lenses of the optical lens 10 obtained through the above parameter design can play different roles, so that through the cooperation of each lens, a good background blur effect can be obtained on the basis of a large aperture value range. and imaging quality and thin optical lens 10.
  • 28 and 29 are graphs showing the optical performance of the optical lens 10 according to the eighth embodiment.
  • FIG. 28 shows the axial chromatic aberration after the light of the optical lens 10 with wavelengths of 650 nm, 610 nm, 555 nm, 510 nm, and 470 nm passes through the optical lens 10 of the eighth embodiment.
  • the ordinate in FIG. 28 represents the normalized pupil coordinates, and the abscissa represents the axial chromatic aberration, and the unit is mm. It can be seen from FIG. 28 that in this embodiment, the axial chromatic aberration of the optical lens 10 in each state is controlled within a small range.
  • the left diagram is a schematic diagram of field curvature of the optical lens 10
  • the right diagram is a schematic diagram of optical distortion of the optical lens 10
  • the solid line in the left figure is a schematic diagram of field curvature in the meridional direction after the 650nm light passes through the optical lens 10
  • the dotted line is a schematic diagram of the field curvature in the sagittal direction after the 650nm light passes through the optical lens 10.
  • the right figure is a schematic diagram of optical distortion of 650nm light passing through the optical lens 10 of the eighth embodiment.
  • the vertical coordinates of the two graphs are object angles, and the horizontal coordinates of the left graph represent the astigmatism values in the meridional direction (dotted line) and sagittal direction (solid line), in millimeters.
  • the figure on the right shows the optical distortion values corresponding to different fields of view, and the unit is percentage. It can be seen from FIG. 29 that in this embodiment, the optical system controls the distortion within a range that cannot be clearly recognized by the naked eye.
  • the optical lens 10 provided in this embodiment through the arrangement of each lens in each lens group and the combination of lenses with a specific optical design, can make the optical lens 10 have better background blur on the basis of a large aperture value range.
  • the miniaturization effect and the imaging effect can be improved, and the thinning of the electronic device 100 can be realized at the same time.

Landscapes

  • Physics & Mathematics (AREA)
  • General Physics & Mathematics (AREA)
  • Optics & Photonics (AREA)
  • Lenses (AREA)

Abstract

一种光学镜头（10）、摄像模组（1）及电子设备（100）。光学镜头（10）包括光阑（STO）及从物侧至像侧依次排列的至少七片透镜（L1-L7），光阑（STO）为可变光圈，光阑（STO）的光圈值能够在1.2至5.0范围内调节，光学镜头（10）满足下列关系式：0.10≤TTL/(ImgH×EPD)≤1.10；及CTmax/CTmin≤3.5；其中，TTL为光学镜头（10）的光学总长，ImgH为光学镜头（10）的成像面的有效像素区域的对角线半长度，EPD为光学镜头（10）的入射瞳直径，CTmax为至少七片透镜（L1-L7）中各透镜于光轴（A）上厚度的最大值，CTmin为至少七片透镜（L1-L7）中各透镜于光轴（A）上厚度的最小值。能在实现良好成像效果的同时，获得一种具有较小厚度的光学镜头（10）。

Description

光学镜头、摄像模组及电子设备
本申请要求于2021年10月22日提交中国专利局、申请号为202111234324.8、申请名称为“光学镜头、摄像模组及电子设备”的中国专利申请的优先权，其全部内容通过引用结合在本申请中。
技术领域
本申请涉及光学镜头领域，特别涉及一种光学镜头、摄像模组及电子设备。
背景技术
随着消费者对便携终端摄像模组图像效果的要求越来越高，为了增加用户体验，业界将可变光圈引入便携式终端产品摄像模组中，其可以显著地提高图像效果。通过调整可变光圈的结构尺寸来控制光学镜头的通光量，可以控制摄像模组的景深，还可以提升背景虚化效果，进而提高图像质量，实现“人像模式”拍摄等。但要较大的光圈值范围的可变光圈会对光学镜头的厚度产生影响，影响光学镜头的小型化。
发明内容
本申请实施例提供一种光学镜头、包括所述光学镜头的摄像模组、以及包括所述摄像模组的电子设备，旨在实现良好成像效果的同时，获得一种具有厚度较小的光学镜头及摄像模组，以及一种厚度较小的电子设备。
第一方面，本申请保护一种光学镜头。光学镜头包括光阑及从物侧至像侧依次排列的至少七片透镜，光阑为可变光圈，光阑的光圈值能够在1.2至5.0范围内调节，光学镜头满足下列关系式：
0.10≤TTL/(ImgH×EPD)≤1.10；及
CTmax/CTmin≤3.5；
其中，TTL为光学镜头的光学总长，ImgH为光学镜头的成像面的有效像素区域的对角线半长度，EPD为光学镜头的入射瞳直径，CTmax为至少七片透镜中各透镜于光轴上厚度的最大值，CTmin为至少七片透镜中各透镜于光轴上厚度的最小值。
本申请通过限定光学总长与成像面有效像素区域对角线半长度和光学镜头的入射瞳直径的乘积的比值范围，及限定至少七片透镜中各透镜于光轴上厚度的最大值与至少七片透镜中各透镜于光轴上厚度的最小值的比值范围，能够保证光学镜头的光学总长最够小，成像面大，光圈值变化范围大，有利于光学镜头小型化及提高成像品质。
一些可能实现的方式中，光学镜头满足下列关系式：
Tmin/Tmax≤0.085；
其中，Tmax为至少七片透镜中任意相邻两个透镜间隔的最大值，Tmin为至少七片透镜中任意相邻两个透镜间隔的最小值。
本实现方式通过限定至少七片透镜中任意相邻两个透镜间隔的最大值与至少七片透镜中任意相邻两个透镜间隔的最小值的比值范围，有利于光学镜头的小型化。
一些可能实现的方式中，光学镜头满足下列关系式：
0.55≤EPD/Dr5r10≤3.15；
其中，Dr5r10为第三透镜的物侧表面至第五透镜的像侧表面于光轴上的距离。
可以理解的是，第三透镜至第五透镜厚度最大，在镜头总长中占比最大，光学镜头的入 射瞳直径与第三透镜的物侧表面至第五透镜的像侧表面于光轴上的距离的比值范围满足上述关系式时，有利于光学镜头的小型化，且光圈可变范围大。
一些可能实现的方式中，至少七片透镜包括从物侧至像侧依次排列的第一透镜、第二透镜、第三透镜、第四透镜、第五透镜、第六透镜和第七透镜，光学镜头满足下列关系式：
Tmax/T12≥.0；
Tmax/T23≥2.0；
Tmax/T34≥1.0；
Tmax/T45≥1.5；
Tmax/T56≥2.0；
Tmax/T67≥1.0；以及
Tmax/BL≥0.5；
其中，T12为第一透镜与第二透镜于光轴上的间隔距离，T23为第二透镜与第三透镜于光轴上的间隔距离，T34为第三透镜与第四透镜于光轴上的间隔距离，T45为第四透镜与第五透镜于光轴上的间隔距离，T56为第五透镜与第六透镜于光轴上的间隔距离，T67为第六透镜与第七透镜于光轴上的间隔距离，BL为最靠近成像面的透镜的像侧表面至成像面于光轴上的距离，Tmax为至少七片透镜中任意相邻两个透镜间隔的最大值。
本实现方式通过限定至少七片透镜中任意相邻两个透镜间隔的最大值与其他相邻两个透镜的间隔的比值范围，及至少七片透镜中任意相邻两个透镜间隔的最大值与最靠近成像面的透镜的像侧表面至成像面于光轴上的距离的比值范围，有利于光学镜头的小型化。
一些可能实现的方式中，光学镜头满足下列关系式：
0.1≤1/f1+1/f2+1/f3+1/f4≤0.15；
其中，f1为第一透镜的焦距，f2为第二透镜的焦距，f3为第三透镜的焦距，f4为第四透镜的焦距。
可以理解的是，第一透镜至第四透镜的焦距倒数加和越小，光学镜头的聚光效果越好，成像品质越好。通过将第一透镜至第四透镜的焦距的倒数之和限制在0.1至0.15之间(包括0.1和0.15)，当光圈值为1.2时，通过光阑进入透镜的大量光线可以在第一透镜至第四透镜配合调制下，达到更好的聚光效果，有效提高光学镜头的成像质量。
一些可能实现的方式中，光学镜头满足下列关系式：
-0.1≤1/f1+1/f3+1/f5+1/f7≤0.5；
其中，f1为第一透镜的焦距，f3为第三透镜的焦距，f5为第五透镜的焦距，f7为第七透镜的焦距。
可以理解的是，第一透镜、第三透镜、第五透镜和第七透镜的焦距倒数加和越小，光学镜头的聚光效果越好，成像品质越好。通过将第一透镜、第三透镜、第五透镜和第七透镜的焦距的倒数之和限制在0.3至0.5之间(包括0.3和0.5)有利于修正光学镜头的像差，平衡第一透镜产生的球差和色差，提高光学镜头的成像效果。
一些可能实现的方式中，光学镜头满足下列关系式：
|EFL/fi|≤1.5，其中i＝1、2、3、4、5、6、7，或i＝1、2、3、4、5、6、7、8；
|f1/fi|≤3.0，其中i＝2、3、4、5、6、7，或i＝2、3、4、5、6、7、8；
|f4/fi|≥0.05，其中i＝1、2、3、5、6、7，或i＝1、2、3、5、6、7、8；
其中，EFL为光学镜头的焦距，f1为第一透镜的焦距，f4为第四透镜的焦距，fi为第i透镜的焦距。
本实现方式通过限定光学镜头的焦距与各个透镜的焦距的比值范围，第一透镜的焦距与其他各个透镜的焦距的比值范围，及第四透镜的焦距与其他各个透镜的焦距的比值范围，能够保证光学镜头在大光圈的场景下具有很好的成像品质。
一些可能实现的方式中，光学镜头满足下列关系式：
0.3≤|R1/R2|≤1.0；
1.0≤|R3/R4|≤2.0；
0.3≤|R5/R6|≤1.5；
0.1≤|R7/R8|≤15；
1.0≤|R9/R10|≤3.5；
0.5≤|R11/R12|≤5.0；
0.0≤|R13/R14|≤3.5；
其中，R1为第一透镜物侧表面的曲率半径，R2为第一透镜像侧表面的曲率半径，R3为第二透镜物侧表面的曲率半径，R4为第二透镜像侧表面的曲率半径，R5为第三透镜物侧表面的曲率半径，R6为第三透镜像侧表面的曲率半径，R7为第四透镜物侧表面的曲率半径，R8为第四透镜像侧表面的曲率半径，R9为第五透镜物侧表面的曲率半径，R10为第五透镜像侧表面的曲率半径，R11为第六透镜物侧表面的曲率半径，R12为第六透镜像侧表面的曲率半径，R13为第七透镜物侧表面的曲率半径，R14为第七透镜像侧表面的曲率半径。
本实现方式通过限定每个透镜的物侧表面和像侧表面的曲率半径的比值范围，使得光学镜头能够得到更好的成像效果。
一些可能实现的方式中，光学镜头满足R1、R2、R3、R4、R5、R6均大于0；R7、R8中至少有一个大于0。
本实现方式通过限制R1、R2、R3、R4、R5、R6均大于0，且R7、R8中至少有一个大于0，以使光学镜头能够得到更好的成像效果。
一些可能实现的方式中，光学镜头满足下列关系式：
0.2≤Dr5r10/TTL≤0.4；
其中，Dr5r10为第三透镜物侧表面至第五透镜像侧表面于光轴上的距离。
可以理解的是，本实现方式中，第三透镜至第五透镜厚度最大。当第三透镜物侧表面至第五透镜的像侧表面于光轴上的距离与光学镜头的光学总长的比值范围满足上述关系式时，第三透镜至第五透镜在光学镜头的光学总长占比最大，有利于光学镜头的小型化，进而有利于实现摄像模组及电子设备的小型化。
一些可能实现的方式中，光学镜头满足下列关系式：
Dmax/Dmin≥2.3；
其中，Dmax为至少七片透镜中各透镜的物侧表面或像侧表面的通光孔径的最大值，Dmin为至少七片透镜中各透镜的物侧表面或像侧表面的通光孔径的最小值。
本实现方式通过限定所有透镜的物侧表面或像侧表面的通光孔最大值与所有透镜的物侧表面或像侧表面的通光孔最小值的比值范围，有利于光学镜头的小型化。
一些可能实现的方式中，光学镜头满足下列关系式：
0.25≤EPD/Dmax≤1.35。
本实现方式限定了光学镜头的入射瞳直径与所有透镜的物侧表面或像侧表面的通光孔最大值的比值范围，有利于光学镜头的小型化，且可变光圈的光圈值变化范围大。
一些可能实现的方式中，光学镜头中所有透镜的物侧表面和像侧表面均为非球面。非球 面配置自由度更高，消除像差效果好，进而缩减光学镜头总长度，有利于光学镜头的小型化。
一些可能实现的方式中，光学镜头满足下列关系式：
Tmax/CTmax≤1.5。
本实现方式限定了至少七片透镜中任意相邻两个透镜间隔的最大值与至少七片透镜中各透镜于光轴上厚度的最大值的比值范围，有利于光学镜头的小型化。
一些可能实现的方式中，光学镜头满足下列关系式：
0.8≤CT1/MaxCT2L≤2.0；
其中，CT1为第一透镜于光轴上的厚度，MaxCT2L为至少七片透镜中除第一透镜以外的其他透镜于光轴上厚度的最大值。
本实现方式限定了第一透镜于光轴上的厚度与至少七片透镜中除第一透镜以外的其他透镜于光轴上厚度的最大值的比值范围，光学镜头可以通过不同材质透镜的合理配置，有利于光学镜头的小型化和可制造性。
一些可能实现的方式中，光学镜头满足下列关系式：
Vmin≥15；
Vmax≤90；
其中，Vmax为光学镜头所有透镜中最大色散系数，Vmin为光学镜头所有透镜中最小色散系数。
本实现方式通过对光学镜头的所有透镜的色散系数进行限定，当光学镜头的所有透镜的色散系数满足上述关系式时，能够有效提高光学镜头消除色差的能力，提升光学镜头的成像品质。为达到上述色散范围，各个透镜的材质可选择树脂材料或者玻璃材料。
一些可能实现的方式中，光学镜头满足下列关系式：
1.65≤Nmax≤2.0；
1.30≤Nmin≤1.58；
其中，Nmax为光学镜头所有透镜中最大折射率，Nmin为光学镜头所有透镜中最小折射率。
本实现方式通过限制光学镜头的透镜的最大折射率和最小折射率，当光学镜头的透镜的最大折射率和最小折射率满足上述关系式时，为达到上述折射率范围，各个透镜材质可选择树脂材质或者玻璃材质。通过对透镜进行不同材质的合理配置，有利于实现光学镜头的小型化，实现电子设备的薄型化。
一些可能实现的方式中，光学镜头满足下列关系式：
0.8≤STL/TTL≤1.5；
其中，STL光学镜头的光阑的无穷远物体距离成像面于光轴上的距离。
本实现方式限定了光阑的无穷远物体距离成像面于光轴上的距离与光学总长的比值范围，从而光阑可以设于第一透镜的物侧，也可以设于任意相邻两个透镜之间。
第二方面，本申请还保护一种摄像模组。摄像模组包括感光元件及上述的光学镜头，感光元件位于光学镜头的像侧并位于光学镜头的成像面，光学镜头用于将环境光线投射至感光元件。具有上述光学镜头的摄像模组尺寸小，成像效果好。
第三方面，本申请还保护一种电子设备。电子设备包括图像处理器和上述的摄像模组，图像处理器与摄像模组通信连接，摄像模组用于获取图像数据并将图像数据输入到图像处理器中，图像处理器用于对输出其中的图像数据进行处理。具有上述摄像模组的电子设备拍照效果好，且能实现小型化。
附图说明
为了更清楚地说明本申请实施例或背景技术中的技术方案，下面将对本申请实施例或背景技术中所需要使用的附图进行说明。
图1是本申请一种实施方式的电子设备的背面示意图；
图2是本申请另一种实施方式的电子设备的背面示意图；
图3A是图1所示的电子设备的摄像模组的结构示意图；
图3B是图3A所示的摄像模组的成像面的结构示意图；
图4是图3A所示的摄像模组的部分结构示意图；
图5是图3A所示的摄像模组的光阑的位置示意图；
图6是图3A所示结构的光阑的俯视结构示意图；
图7是图3A所示的光学镜头的轴向色差示意图；
图8是图3A所示的光学镜头的场曲和光学畸变示意图；
图9是本申请第二实施方式的摄像模组的结构示意图；
图10是图9所示的光学镜头的轴向色差示意图；
图11是图9所示的光学镜头的场曲和光学畸变示意图；
图12是本申请第三实施方式的摄像模组的结构示意图；
图13是图12所示的光学镜头的轴向色差示意图；
图14是图12所示的光学镜头的场曲和光学畸变示意图；
图15是本申请第四实施方式的摄像模组的结构示意图；
图16是图15所示的光学镜头的轴向色差示意图；
图17是图15所示的光学镜头的场曲和光学畸变示意图；
图18是本申请第五实施方式的摄像模组的结构示意图；
图19是图18所示的光学镜头的轴向色差示意图；
图20是图18所示的光学镜头的场曲和光学畸变示意图；
图21是本申请第六实施方式的摄像模组的结构示意图；
图22是图21所示的光学镜头的轴向色差示意图；
图23是图21所示的光学镜头的场曲和光学畸变示意图；
图24是本申请第七实施方式的摄像模组的结构示意图；
图25是图24所示的光学镜头的轴向色差示意图；
图26是图24所示的光学镜头的场曲和光学畸变示意图；
图27是本申请第八实施方式的摄像模组的结构示意图；
图28是图27所示的光学镜头的轴向色差示意图；
图29是图27所示的光学镜头的场曲和光学畸变示意图。
具体实施方式
下面结合本申请实施例中的附图对本申请实施例进行描述。
为方便理解，下面先对本申请所涉及的技术术语进行解释和描述。
焦距(focal length)，也称为焦长，指物体通过透镜或透镜组在像方空间形成清晰像时，透镜或透镜组的像方主面到像方焦面在沿光轴方向的距离。
光轴，是一条垂直穿过理想镜片中心的光线。与光轴平行的光线射入凸透镜时，理想的凸镜应是所有的光线会聚在镜片后的一点，这个会聚所有光线的一点，即为焦点。
光阑(stop)，包括孔径光阑(aperture stop)和视场光阑(field stop)，其中孔径光阑能限制成像光束宽度，决定光学系统的入瞳直径大小和光束的立体角，影响光学系统的进光量；视场光阑限制物空间能被光学系统成像的视场。
光圈值，又称F数(Fno)，是镜头的焦距/镜头入瞳直径得出的相对值(相对孔径的倒数)。光圈值愈小，在同一单位时间内的进光量便愈多。光圈值越小，景深越小，拍照的背景内容将会虚化。
后焦(Back Focal Length，BFL)，光学镜头中最靠近像侧的透镜像侧面顶点到光学镜头的成像面的距离，在无限远对焦状态下后焦最短，一般的，物距越近，后焦越长。
正屈折力，也可以称为正屈折力，表示透镜有正的焦距、有会聚光线的效果。
负屈折力，也可以称为负屈折力，表示透镜有负的焦距、有发散光线的效果。
光学总长(Total Track Length，TTL)，指从光学镜头最靠近物侧的透镜的物侧面至成像面的总长度，是形成相机高度的主要因素。
色散系数，即阿贝数，用以表示透明介质色散能力的指数。一般来说，介质的折射率越大，阿贝数越小，色散越严重；反之，介质的折射率越小，阿贝数越大，色散越轻微。
物侧，以透镜为界，待成像景物所在的一侧为物侧。
像侧，以透镜为界，待成像景物的图像所在的一侧为像侧。
物侧面，透镜靠近物侧的表面称为物侧面。
像侧面，透镜靠近像侧的表面称为像侧面。
以透镜为界，被摄物体所在的一侧为物侧，透镜靠近物侧的表面可以称为物侧面；以透镜为界，被摄物体的图像所在的一侧为像侧，透镜靠近像侧的表面可以称为像侧面。
轴向色差(axial chromatic aberration)，由于光学材料的色散特性，不同波长光的放大倍数存在差异，沿着水平光轴聚焦在不同的点，轴向色差会导致焦点位置前后的颜色模糊。
场曲(Field curvature)，垂直于主光轴的物平面上发出的光经透镜成像后，无法将整个图像聚焦在垂直于光轴的单个平面上，即清晰的最佳实像面不是平面而是一个曲面。
畸变(Distortion)，也称为失真，光学系统对物体所成的像相对于物体本身而言的失真程度。不同视场的主光线通过光学系统后与高斯像面的交点高度不等于理想像高，两者之差就是光学畸变(Optical distortion)。光学畸变改变轴外物点在理想面上的成像位置，使像的形状产生失真，但不影响像的清晰度。
ImgH(Image Hight)，表示的是感光芯片上有效像素区域对角线长的一半，也即成像面的像高。
入瞳直径(Entrance Pupil Diameter，EPD)，指光学镜头的焦距与光圈F值的比值。
视场角(field of view，FOV)，在光学仪器中，以光学仪器的镜头为顶点，以被测目标的物像可通过镜头的最大范围的两条边缘构成的夹角，称为视场角。视场角的大小决定了光学仪器的视野范围，视场角越大，视野就越大，光学倍率就越小。
像差(aberration)是指光学系统中，由非近轴光线追迹所得的结果和近轴光线追迹所得的结果不一致，与高斯光学(一级近似理论或近轴光线)的理想状况的偏差。像差又分为两大类：色差(chromatic aberration，或称色像差)与单色像差(monochromatic aberration)。
色差是由于透镜材料的折射率是波长的函数，不同波长的光通过透镜时因折射率不同而产生的像差，色差又可分为位置色像差和倍率色像差两种。色差是一种色散现象，所谓色散现象是指介质中的光速或折射率随光波波长变化的现象，光的折射率随着波长的增加而减小的色散可称为正常色散，而折射率随波长的增加而增加的色散可称为负色散(或称负反常色 散)。
单色像差是指即使在高度单色光时也会产生的像差，按产生的效果，单色像差又分成“使成像模糊”和“使成像变形”两类；前一类有球面像差(spherical aberration，可简称球差)、像散(astigmatism)等，后一类有像场弯曲(field curvature，可简称场曲)、畸变(distortion)等。
像差还包括彗差，彗差是指由位于主轴外的某一轴外物点，向光学系统发出的单色圆锥形光束，经该光学系统折射后，在理想平面处不能结成清晰点，而是结成拖着明亮尾巴的彗星形光斑。
下文将结合相关附图具体介绍电子设备、摄像模组以及光学镜头的具体结构。
请参阅图1，图1是本申请一种实施方式的电子设备的背面示意图。电子设备100可以为手机、数字平板、手提电脑、摄像机、录像机、照相机、智能电视、网络监控设备、体感游戏机、行车记录仪、倒车显影装置、穿戴式电子设备、小型无人机、三维影像撷取设备或其他形态的具有拍照或摄像功能的设备。图1所示实施例的电子设备100以手机为例进行阐述。
为了便于描述，定义电子设备100的宽度方向为X轴。电子设备100的长度方向为Y轴。电子设备100的厚度方向为Z轴。可以理解的是，电子设备100的坐标系设置可以根据具体实际需要灵活设置。
电子设备100包括摄像模组1、图像处理器2及外壳3，摄像模组1和图像处理器2均收容在外壳3内部，外壳3上设有通光孔31，摄像模组1的入光侧与外壳3的通光孔31相对设置。图像处理器2与摄像模组1通信连接，摄像模组1用于获取图像数据并将图像数据输入到图像处理器2中，图像处理器2用于对输出其中的图像数据进行处理。需要说明的是，图1仅为本申请实施方式的结构示意图，其中所示的摄像模组1、图像处理器2及外壳3的结构等均仅为示意。
其中，摄像模组1与图像处理器2的通信连接可以包括通过走线等电连接方式进行数据传输，也可以通过耦合等方式实现数据传输。可以理解的是，摄像模组1与图像处理器2还可以通过其它能够实现数据传输的方式实现通信连接。
图像处理器2的功能是通过一系列复杂的数学算法运算，对数字图像信号进行优化处理，最后把处理后的信号传到显示器上。图像处理器2可以是单独的图像处理芯片或数字信号处理芯片(Digital Signal Processing，DSP)，它的作用是将摄像模组1的感光元件获得的数据及时快速地传递给中央处理器并刷新感光元件，因此DSP芯片的好坏，直接影响画面品质(比如色彩饱和度，清晰度等)。图像处理器2还可以集成于其他芯片(如中央处理芯片)中。
图1所示实施方式中，摄像模组1设于电子设备100的背面，为电子设备100的后置镜头。可以理解的是，一些实施方式中，摄像模组1还可设于电子设备100的正面，作为电子设备100的前置镜头。前置镜头及后置镜头均可以用于自拍，也可以用于拍摄者拍摄其他对象。
一些实施方式中，摄像模组1有多个。多个是指两个或者两个以上。不同的摄像模组1的作用可以不同，从而能够满足于不同的拍摄场景。例如，一些实施方式中，多个摄像模组1中包括变焦摄像模组或定焦摄像模组，以分别实现变焦拍摄及定焦拍摄的作用。图1所示实施方式中，电子设备100的背面有两个摄像模组1，分别为普通摄像模组以及变焦摄像模组。其中，普通摄像模组能够在日常的普通拍摄中进行应用，变焦摄像模组能够在需要进行变焦拍摄的场景下应用。一些实施方式中，电子设备100的背面有多个摄像模组1，多个不同的摄像模组1可以均与图像处理器2进行通信连接，以通过图像处理器2实现对各摄像模 组1拍摄得到的图像数据进行处理。
应理解，图1所示实施方式的电子设备100的摄像模组1的安装位置仅仅是示意性的。在一些其他的实施方式中，摄像模组1也可以安装于手机上的其他位置，例如摄像模组1可以安装于手机背面的上部中间或右上角。或者，摄像模组1还可以不设置在手机主体上，而设置在相对手机可移动或转动的部件上，例如该部件可以从手机主体上外伸、收回或旋转等，本申请对摄像模组1的安装位置不做任何限定。
请参阅图2，一些实施方式中，电子设备100还可以包括模数转换器4(也可称为A/D转换器)。模数转换器4连接于摄像模组1与图像处理器2之间。模数转换器4用于将摄像模组1产生的信号转换为数字图像信号并传输至图像处理器2，再通过图像处理器2对数字图像信号进行处理，最终通过显示屏或者显示器进行图像或者影像显示。
一些实施方式中，电子设备100还可以包括存储器5，存储器5与图像处理器2通信连接，图像处理器2对图像数字信号加工处理以后再将图像传输至存储器5中，以便于在后续需要查看图像时能够随时从存储中查找图像并在显示屏上进行显示。一些实施方式中，图像处理器2还会对处理后的图像数字信号进行压缩，再存储至存储器5中，以节约存储器5空间。需要说明的是，图2仅为本申请实施方式的结构示意图，其中所示的摄像模组1、图像处理器2、模数转换器4、存储器5的位置结构等均仅为示意。
请参阅图1和图3A，图3A是图1所示的电子设备100的摄像模组1的结构示意图。
摄像模组1包括光学镜头10、感光元件20、驱动件(图未示出)和壳体(图未示出)。壳体包括通孔和收容空间，通孔与收容空间连通，通孔与外壳3的通光孔31相对设置，驱动件、感光元件20和光学镜头10均收容于收容空间内。感光元件20位于光学镜头10的像侧并位于光学镜头10的成像面，驱动件用于驱动光学镜头10中的部件以实现对焦，光学镜头10的入光侧朝向通孔设置。
具体的，如图4所示，摄像模组1的工作原理为：被摄景物反射的光线L通过光学镜头10生成光学图像投射到感光元件20的表面，感光元件20将光学图像转为电信号即模拟图像信号S1并将转换得到的模拟图像信号S1传输至模数转换器4，以通过模数转换器4转换为数字图像信号S2给图像处理器2。当然，在其他实施例中，摄像模组1还可以不具有壳体，感光元件20固定在支架或其他结构上。
具体的，摄像模组1还可以包括线路板，感光元件20通过键合或者贴片等方式固定于线路板上，并将模数转换器4、图像处理器2、存储器5等也键合或者贴片等方式固定于线路板上，从而通过线路板实现感光元件20、模数转换器4、图像处理器2、存储器5等之间的通信连接。线路板可以是柔性电路板(flexible printed circuit，FPC)或印刷电路板(printed circuit board，PCB)，用于传输电信号，其中，FPC可以是单面柔性板、双面柔性板、多层柔性板、刚柔性板或混合结构的柔性电路板等。
感光元件20是一种半导体芯片，表面包含有几十万到几百万的光电二极管，受到光照射时，会产生电荷，通过模数转换器4芯片转换成数字信号。感光元件20可以是电荷耦合元件(charge coupled device，CCD)，也可以是互补金属氧化物导体器件(complementary metal-oxide semiconductor，CMOS)。CCD使用一种高感光度的半导体材料制成，能把光线转变成电荷，通过模数转换器4芯片转换成数字信号。CCD由许多感光单位组成，通常以百万像素为单位。当CCD表面受到光线照射时，每个感光单位会将电荷反映在组元上，所有的感光单位所产生的信号加在一起，就构成了一幅完整的画面。CMOS主要是利用硅和锗这两种元素所做成的半导体，使其在CMOS上共存着带N(带负电)和P(带正电)级的半导体， 这两个互补效应所产生的电流即可被处理芯片纪录和解读成影像。
本实施方式中，感光元件20的感光靶面为超大靶面，也就是说，本申请中的感光元件20可以理解为直接采用单反相机的感光元件20。感光元件20的感光靶面为超大靶面有利于提高摄像模组1的成像清晰度，全面提升电子设备100(如手机)的成像质量。
当然，在其他实施方式中，感光元件20的感光靶面也可以是尺寸较小的靶面，摄像模组1可以根据需要选择不同尺寸靶面的感光元件20。
驱动件用于驱动光学镜头10的相关元件，以实现光学镜头10(或摄像模组1)的对焦或防抖。驱动件可以包括一个或者多个驱动部，能够通过驱动部驱动光学镜头10的相关元件进行对焦和/或光学防抖。驱动件驱动光学镜头10的相关元件进行对焦时，驱动部驱动光学镜头10的相关元件之间进行相对移动从而实现对焦。驱动件驱动光学镜头10的相关元件进行防抖时，通过驱动部驱动光学镜头10的相关元件相对感光元件20移动或者转动，和/或驱动光学镜头10的相关元件相对移动或者转动，以实现光学防抖。其中，驱动部可以为马达、电机等驱动结构。
如图3A，摄像模组1还可以包括红外滤光片30，红外滤光片30可以固定于线路板上，并位于光学镜头10与感光元件20之间。经光学镜头10的光线照射至红外滤光片30上，并经红外滤光片30传输至感光元件20。红外滤光片30可以消除投射到感光元件20上的不必要的光线，防止感光元件20产生伪色或波纹，以提高其有效分辨率和彩色还原性。一些实施方式中，红外滤光片30也可以固定于光学镜头10朝向像侧的一端上。对于摄像模组1包括的其他元件在此不再一一详述。
当然，在其他实施方式中，光学镜头10靠近成像面一侧还可以设置一片成像修正元件，以达到修正影像的效果(像弯曲等)。
下文将结合附图具体介绍光学镜头10的结构以及相关光学参数的设置。
请参阅图3A，光学镜头10影响成像质量和成像效果，其主要利用透镜的折射原理进行成像，即景物光线通过光学镜头10在成像面上形成清晰的影像，并通过位于成像面上的感光元件20记录景物的影像。其中，成像面是指景物经过光学镜头10进行成像后的成像所在的平面。光学镜头10包括从物侧至像侧依次排列的多个透镜，通过各透镜配合形成具有较佳成像效果的影像。其中，物侧是指被摄景物所在侧，像侧是指成像平面所在侧。
本申请中，光学镜头10为定焦镜头。当然，在其他实施例中，光学镜头10还可以是变焦镜头。
请参阅图3A，可以理解的是，图3A仅示意性的示出了光学镜头10的一些部件，这些部件的实际形状、实际大小和实际构造不受图3A限定。
本申请一些实施方式中，本申请的光学镜头10包括镜筒(图未示)和从物侧至像侧依次排列的至少七片透镜。至少七片透镜依次安装于镜筒内，各透镜沿光轴A设置。每片透镜包括朝向物侧的物侧面以及朝向像侧的像侧面。
一些实施例中，至少七片透镜包括第一透镜L1、第二透镜L2、第三透镜L3、第四透镜L4、第五透镜L5、第六透镜L6和第七透镜L7。另一些实施例中，至少七片透镜包括第一透镜L1、第二透镜L2、第三透镜L3、第四透镜L4、第五透镜L5、第六透镜L6、第七透镜L7和第八透镜L8。当然，在其他实施例中，光学镜头10包括的透镜的数量还可以为除八个以外的其他数量，多个透镜还可以同轴或不同轴设置。或者，光学镜头10也可以不包括镜筒。第一透镜L1至第七透镜L7(或第八透镜L8)可以安装于摄像模组1的壳体内。
具体的，第一透镜L1远离第二透镜L2的一侧并朝向通孔设置，第二透镜L2的像侧朝 向感光元件20。
另外，本实施例的光学镜头10还包括光阑STO。本实施例中的光阑STO为可变光圈，可变光圈尺寸可通过固定镜片位置的镜筒实现变化，也可通过外置叶片或者其他部件来调节光圈尺寸的大小，实现光圈值能够在1.2至5.0的范围内(包括1.2和5.0)调节，实现大光圈、小光圈等多个位置特征。示例的，光圈值可以为1.2、1.8、2.5、3.0、4.8或5.0。通过调整可变光圈的结构尺寸可以控制光学镜头10的通光量，可以控制摄像模组1的景深，提升背景虚化效果，进而提高图像质量，实现“人像模式”拍照等。在其他实施方式中，光学镜头10也可以不包括光阑。
光阑STO位于第一透镜L1背向第二透镜L2一侧，也就是说，光阑STO设于第一透镜L1的物侧。由于光阑STO为可变光圈，且光圈值能够在1.2至5.0的范围内变化，将光阑STO设于第一透镜L1的物侧更便于光阑STO实现光圈值的调节。当然，在其他实施方式中，光阑STO还可以设于第二透镜L2至最后一片透镜(L7或L8)中任意相邻的两个透镜之间。
可以理解的是，光圈值变化时，光阑STO距离透镜的距离会发生变化。如图5，例如，当光圈值为1.2时，光阑STO设于第一透镜L1的物侧并与第一透镜L1之间的间隔为第一间隔，当光圈值为5.0时，光阑STO设于第一透镜L1的物侧并与第一透镜L1之间的间隔为第二间隔，其中，第二间隔大于第一间隔。也就是说，光圈值越大，光阑STO距离第一透镜L1的距离越远。
将光阑STO设于第一透镜L1的物侧，光阑STO在调节光圈值的过程中不会受到其他透镜的干涉，相比于设于第二透镜L2至最后一片透镜(L7或L8)中任意相邻的两个透镜之间，更便于光阑STO调节光圈值。且由于光阑STO在调节光圈值的过程中需要在一定范围内移动，若光阑STO设于第二透镜L2至最后一片透镜(L7或L8)中任意相邻的两个透镜之间，在两个透镜之间必须预留给光阑STO足够的活动间距，而活动间距较大，会影响光学镜头10整体的调光效果。
可以理解的是，超大靶面的感光元件20及较大的光圈值范围的可变光圈会导致光学镜头10的厚度增加，即光学镜头在Z轴方向的厚度增加，影响光学镜头10、摄像模组1及电子设备100的薄型化。鉴于此，本申请通过限制光学镜头10的各个透镜的相关参数，以减小光学镜头10的厚度，保证摄像模组1占用的电子设备100的内部空间足够小，实现电子设备100的薄型化。本实施方式实现光学镜头10小型化的方案如下。
本申请一些实施方式中，光学镜头10满足下列关系式：
0.10≤TTL/(ImgH×EPD)≤1.10；
其中，如图3A和图3B，TTL为光学镜头10的光学总长，ImgH为光学镜头10的成像面的有效像素区域的对角线半长度，EPD为光学镜头10的入射瞳直径。
上述关系式规定了光学总长与成像面有效像素区域对角线半长度和光学镜头10的入射瞳直径的乘积的比值范围。示例的，TTL/(ImgH×EPD)可以等于0.10、0.23、0.25、0.5、0.82、0.94、1.05或1.10。本实施方式中，光学总长与成像面有效像素区域对角线半长度和光学镜头10的入射瞳直径的乘积的比值范围满足上述关系式时，能够保证光学镜头10的光学总长最够小，成像面大，光圈值变化范围大，有利于光学镜头10小型化及提高成像品质。
当然，在其他实施方式中，光学总长与成像面有效像素区域对角线半长度和光学镜头10的入射瞳直径的乘积的比值范围还可以不限于上述限制。
本申请一些实施方式中，光学镜头10满足下列关系式：
CTmax/CTmin≤3.5；
其中，CTmax为至少七片透镜中各透镜于光轴A上厚度的最大值，CTmin为至少七片透镜中各透镜于光轴A上厚度的最小值。
上述关系式规定了至少七片透镜中各透镜于光轴A上厚度的最大值与至少七片透镜中各透镜于光轴A上厚度的最小值的比值范围。本实施方式中，至少七片透镜中各透镜于光轴A上厚度的最大值与至少七片透镜中各透镜于光轴A上厚度的最小值的比值范围满足上述关系式时，有利于光学镜头10的小型化。
当然，在其他实施方式中，至少七片透镜中各透镜于光轴A上厚度的最大值与至少七片透镜中各透镜于光轴A上厚度的最小值的比值范围还可以不限于上述限制。
本申请一些实施方式中，光学镜头10满足下列关系式：
Tmin/Tmax≤0.085；
其中，Tmax为至少七片透镜中任意相邻两个透镜间隔的最大值，Tmin为至少七片透镜中任意相邻两个透镜间隔的最小值。
上述关系式规定了至少七片透镜中任意相邻两个透镜间隔的最大值与至少七片透镜中任意相邻两个透镜间隔的最小值的比值范围。本实施方式中，至少七片透镜中任意相邻两个透镜间隔的最大值与至少七片透镜中任意相邻两个透镜间隔的最小值的比值范围满足上述关系式时，有利于光学镜头10的小型化。
当然，在其他实施方式中，至少七片透镜中任意相邻两个透镜间隔的最大值与至少七片透镜中任意相邻两个透镜间隔的最小值的比值范围还可以不限于上述限制。
本申请一些实施方式中，光学镜头10满足下列关系式：
0.2≤Dr5r10/TTL≤0.4；
其中，Dr5r10为第三透镜L3物侧表面至第五透镜L5像侧表面于光轴A上的距离。
可以理解的是，本实施方式中，第三透镜L3至第五透镜L5厚度最大。当第三透镜L3物侧表面至第五透镜L5的像侧表面于光轴A上的距离与光学镜头10的光学总长的比值范围满足上述关系式时，第三透镜L3至第五透镜L5在光学镜头10的光学总长占比最大，有利于光学镜头10的小型化，进而有利于实现摄像模组1及电子设备100的小型化。
同时，第五透镜具有较厚的中心厚度。可以理解的是，第五透镜位于八片透镜的中部，第五透镜具有较厚的中心厚度能够加强光学镜头的结构强度，提高光学镜头抗跌落等机械可靠性。
当然，在其他实施例中，第三透镜L3物侧表面至第五透镜L5的像侧表面于光轴A上的距离与光学镜头10的光学总长的比值范围还可以不限于上述限制。
本申请一些实施方式中，光学镜头10满足下列关系式：
Dmax/Dmin≥2.3；
其中，Dmax为至少七片透镜中各透镜的物侧表面或像侧表面的通光孔径的最大值，Dmin为至少七片透镜中各透镜的物侧表面或像侧表面的通光孔径的最小值。
上述关系式规定了所有透镜的物侧表面或像侧表面的通光孔最大值与所有透镜的物侧表面或像侧表面的通光孔最小值的比值范围。本实施方式中，所有透镜的物侧表面或像侧表面的通光孔最大值与所有透镜的物侧表面或像侧表面的通光孔最小值的比值范围满足上述关系式时，有利于光学镜头10的小型化。
当然，在其他实施中，所有透镜的物侧表面或像侧表面的通光孔最大值与所有透镜的物侧表面或像侧表面的通光孔最小值的比值范围还可以不限于上述限制。
本申请一些实施方式中，光学镜头10满足下列关系式：
0.25≤EPD/Dmax≤1.35。
上述关系式规定了光学镜头10的入射瞳直径与所有透镜的物侧表面或像侧表面的通光孔最大值的比值范围。示例的，EPD/Dmax可以等于0.25、0.27、0.30、0.31、0.77、0.79、1.11、1.15、1.26、1.31或1.35。本实施方式中，光学镜头10的入射瞳直径与所有透镜的物侧表面或像侧表面的通光孔最大值的比值范围满足上述关系式时，有利于光学镜头10的小型化，且可变光圈的光圈值变化范围大。
当然，在其他实施中，光学镜头10的入射瞳直径与所有透镜的物侧表面或像侧表面的通光孔最大值的比值范围还可以不限于上述限制。
本申请一些实施方式中，光学镜头10满足下列关系式：
Tmax/CTmax≤1.5；
上述关系式规定了至少七片透镜中任意相邻两个透镜间隔的最大值与至少七片透镜中各透镜于光轴A上厚度的最大值的比值范围。本实施方式中，至少七片透镜中任意相邻两个透镜间隔的最大值与至少七片透镜中各透镜于光轴A上厚度的最大值的比值范围满足上述关系式时，有利于光学镜头10的小型化。
当然，在其他实施中，至少七片透镜)中任意相邻两个透镜间隔的最大值与第一透镜L1至至少七片透镜中各透镜于光轴A上厚度的最大值的比值范围还可以不限于上述限制。
本申请一些实施方式中，光学镜头10满足下列关系式：
0.8≤CT1/MaxCT2L≤2.0；
其中，CT1为第一透镜L1于光轴A上的厚度，MaxCT2L为至少七片透镜中除所述第一透镜L1以外的其他透镜于光轴A上厚度的最大值。
上述关系式规定了第一透镜L1于光轴A上的厚度与至少七片透镜中除所述第一透镜L1以外的其他透镜于光轴A上厚度的最大值的比值范围。本实施方式，第一透镜L1于光轴A上的厚度与至少七片透镜中除所述第一透镜L1以外的其他透镜于光轴A上厚度的最大值的比值范围满足上述关系式时，光学镜头10可以通过不同材质透镜的合理配置，有利于光学镜头10的小型化和可制造性。
当然，在其他实施方式中，第一透镜L1于光轴A上的厚度与至少七片透镜中除所述第一透镜L1以外的其他透镜于光轴A上厚度的最大值的比值范围还可以不限于上述限制。
本申请一些实施方式中，光学镜头10满足下列关系式：
0.55≤EPD/Dr5r10≤3.15；
其中，Dr5r10为第三透镜L3的物侧表面至第五透镜L5的像侧表面于光轴A上的距离。
上述关系式规定了光学镜头10的入射瞳直径与第三透镜L3的物侧表面至第五透镜L5的像侧表面于光轴A上的距离的比值范围。示例的，EPD/Dr5r10可以等于0.55、0.57、0.68、2.36、2.44、3.05或3.15。本实施方式中，第三透镜L3至第五透镜L5厚度最大，在镜头总长中占比最大，光学镜头10的入射瞳直径与第三透镜L3的物侧表面至第五透镜L5的像侧表面于光轴A上的距离的比值范围满足上述关系式时，有利于光学镜头10的小型化，且光圈可变范围大。
当然，在其他实施方式中，光学镜头10的入射瞳直径与第三透镜L3的物侧表面至第五透镜L5的像侧表面于光轴A上的距离的比值范围还可以不限于上述限制。
本申请一些实施方式中，光学镜头10满足下列关系式：
Tmax/T12≥10.0；
Tmax/T23≥2.0；
Tmax/T34≥1.0；
Tmax/T45≥1.5；
Tmax/T56≥2.0；
Tmax/T67≥1.0；以及
Tmax/BL≥0.5；
其中，T12为第一透镜L1与第二透镜L2于光轴A上的间隔距离，T23为第二透镜L2与第三透镜L3于光轴A上的间隔距离，T34为第三透镜L3与第四透镜L4于光轴A上的间隔距离，T45为第四透镜L4与第五透镜L5于光轴A上的间隔距离，T56为第五透镜L5与第六透镜L6于光轴A上的间隔距离，T67为第六透镜L6与第七透镜L7于光轴A上的间隔距离，BL为最靠近成像面的透镜的像侧表面至成像面于光轴A上的距离，Tmax至少七片透镜中任意相邻两个透镜间隔的最大值。可以理解的是，当透镜的数量为七片时，最靠近成像面的透镜为第七透镜(L7)，当透镜的数量为八片时，最靠近成像面的透镜为第八透镜(L8)。
上述关系式规定了至少七片透镜中任意相邻两个透镜间隔的最大值与其他相邻两个透镜的间隔的比值范围，及至少七片透镜中任意相邻两个透镜间隔的最大值与最靠近成像面的透镜的像侧表面至成像面于光轴A上的距离的比值范围。本实施方式中，上述比值范围满足上述关系式时，有利于光学镜头10的小型化。当然，在其他实施方式中，上述比值范围还可以不限于上述限定。
可以理解的是，光阑STO的光圈值能够在1.2至5.0的范围内(包括1.2和5.0)调节，光圈值越小，光阑STO的孔径越大，进光量越大。当光圈值为1.2时，进入光学镜头10的光量很大，由于进光量大，光线更难汇聚，影响成像质量。鉴于此，本申请通过设计光学镜头10中的各个透镜的光学参数，使得各个透镜配合，在进光量大的情况下，也能达到很好的成像效果。
下文将具体介绍光学镜头10的各个透镜的相关光学参数的设置。
本申请一些实施方式中，光学镜头10满足下列关系式：
0.1≤1/f1+1/f2+1/f3+1/f4≤0.15；
其中，f1为第一透镜L1的焦距，f2为第二透镜L2的焦距，f3为第三透镜L3的焦距，f4为第四透镜L4的焦距。
可以理解的是，第一透镜L1至第四透镜L4的焦距倒数加和越小，光学镜头10的聚光效果越好，成像品质越好。通过将第一透镜L1至第四透镜L4的焦距的倒数之和限制在0.1至0.15之间(包括0.1和0.15)，当光圈值为1.2时，通过光阑STO进入透镜的大量光线可以在第一透镜L1至第四透镜L4配合调制下，达到更好的聚光效果，有效提高光学镜头10的成像质量。
当然，在其他实施方式中，第一透镜L1至第四透镜L4的焦距倒数加和不限于上述限制。
本申请一些实施方式中，第一透镜L1具有正屈折力，第二透镜L2具有负屈折力，第三透镜L3具有正屈折力，第四透镜L4具有正屈折力或负曲折力。通过限制第一透镜L1至第四透镜L4的屈折力，从而当光圈值为1.2时，通过光阑STO进入透镜的大量光线可以在第一透镜L1至第四透镜L4配合调制下，达到更好的聚光效果，有效提高光学镜头10的成像质量。
本申请一些实施方式中，光学镜头10满足下列关系式：
-0.1≤1/f1+1/f3+1/f5+1/f7≤0.5；
其中，f1为第一透镜L1的焦距，f3为第三透镜L3的焦距，f5为第五透镜L5的焦距， f7为第七透镜L7的焦距。
可以理解的是，第一透镜L1、第三透镜L3、第五透镜L5和第七透镜L7的焦距倒数加和越小，光学镜头10的聚光效果越好，成像品质越好。通过将第一透镜L1、第三透镜L3、第五透镜L5和第七透镜L7的焦距的倒数之和限制在0.3至0.5之间(包括0.3和0.5)有利于修正光学镜头10的像差，平衡第一透镜L1产生的球差和色差，提高光学镜头10的成像效果。
当然，在其他实施方式中，第一透镜L1、第三透镜L3、第五透镜L5和第七透镜L7的焦距倒数加和不限于上述限制。
本申请一些实施方式中，光学镜头10满足下列关系式：
|EFL/fi|≤1.5，其中i＝1、2、3、4、5、6、7，或i＝1、2、3、4、5、6、7、8；
|f1/fi|≤3.0，其中i＝2、3、4、5、6、7，或i＝2、3、4、5、6、7、8；
|f4/fi|≥0.05，其中i＝1、2、3、5、6、7，或i＝1、2、3、5、6、7、8；
其中，EFL为光学镜头10的焦距，f1为第一透镜L1的焦距，f4为第四透镜L4的焦距，fi为第i透镜的焦距。
上述关系式规定了光学镜头10的焦距与各个透镜的焦距的比值范围，第一透镜L1的焦距与其他各个透镜的焦距的比值范围，及第四透镜L4的焦距与其他各个透镜的焦距的比值范围。本实施方式中，光学镜头10的焦距与各个透镜的焦距的比值范围，第一透镜L1的焦距与其他各个透镜的焦距的比值范围，及第四透镜L4的焦距与其他各个透镜的焦距的比值范围满足上述关系式时，能够保证光学镜头10在大光圈的场景下具有很好的成像品质。
当然，在其他实施方式中，光学镜头10的焦距与各个透镜的焦距的比值范围，第一透镜L1的焦距与其他各个透镜的焦距的比值范围，及第四透镜L4的焦距与其他各个透镜的焦距的比值范围不限于上述限制。
本申请一些实施方式中，光学镜头10满足下列关系式：
0.3≤|R1/R2|≤1.0；
1.0≤|R3/R4|≤2.0；
0.3≤|R5/R6|≤1.5；
0.1≤|R7/R8|≤15；
1.0≤|R9/R10|≤3.5；
0.5≤|R11/R12|≤5.0；
0.0≤|R13/R14|≤3.5；
其中，R1为第一透镜L1物侧表面的曲率半径，R2为第一透镜L1像侧表面的曲率半径，R3为第二透镜L2物侧表面的曲率半径，R4为第二透镜L2像侧表面的曲率半径，R5为第三透镜L3物侧表面的曲率半径，R6为第三透镜L3像侧表面的曲率半径，R7为第四透镜L4物侧表面的曲率半径，R8为第四透镜L4像侧表面的曲率半径，R9为第五透镜L5物侧表面的曲率半径，R10为第五透镜L5像侧表面的曲率半径，R11为第六透镜L6物侧表面的曲率半径，R12为第六透镜L6像侧表面的曲率半径，R13为第七透镜L7物侧表面的曲率半径，R14为第七透镜L7像侧表面的曲率半径。
上述关系式规定了每个透镜的物侧表面和像侧表面的曲率半径的比值范围，本实施方式中，每个透镜的物侧表面和像侧表面的曲率半径的比值范围满足上述关系式时，光学镜头10能够得到更好的成像效果。
当然，在其他实施中，每个透镜的物侧表面和像侧表面的曲率半径的比值范围还可以不 限于上述限制。
本申请一些实施方式中，光学镜头10满足R1、R2、R3、R4、R5、R6均大于0；R7、R8中至少有一个大于0。通过限制R1、R2、R3、R4、R5、R6均大于0，且R7、R8中至少有一个大于0，以使光学镜头10能够得到更好的成像效果。
当然，在其他实施方式中，对R1、R2、R3、R4、R5、R6、R7和R8的限制还可以不限于上述限制。
本申请一些实施方式中，光学镜头10满足下列关系式：
Vmin≥15；
Vmax≤90；
其中，Vmax为光学镜头10所有透镜中最大色散系数，Vmin为光学镜头10所有透镜中最小色散系数。
本实施方式通过对光学镜头10的所有透镜的色散系数进行限定，当光学镜头10的所有透镜的色散系数满足上述关系式时，能够有效提高光学镜头10消除色差的能力，提升光学镜头10的成像品质。为达到上述色散范围，各个透镜的材质可选择树脂材料或者玻璃材料。
当光学镜头10的各个透镜中同时具有玻璃材质的透镜和树脂材质的透镜时，玻璃材质的透镜可以和树脂材质的透镜放在一个群组，这些透镜可以通过叠加方式机械限位一起组装在同一个镜筒内部。不同材质的透镜也可分成多个群组，即玻璃材质的透镜单独为一个群组，树脂材质的透镜为其他群组，各群组之间通过主动对准工艺调节各群组的相对位置确保画面中心及四周的解析效果，并采用胶水粘接或者机械限位等其他组装工艺组成完整的光学镜头。
当然，在其他实施中，Vmin和Vmax的范围还可以不限于上述限制。
本申请一些实施方式中，当透镜的数量为八片时，光学镜头10满足下列关系式：
30≤V1≤90；
52≤V3、V5、V7、V8≤60；
15≤V2、V4≤21；
35≤V6≤40；
其中，V1为第一透镜L1的色散系数，V2为第二透镜L2的色散系数，V3为第三透镜L3的色散系数，V4为第四透镜L4的色散系数，V5为第五透镜L5的色散系数，V6为第六透镜L6的色散系数，V7为第七透镜L7的色散系数，V8为第八透镜L8的色散系数。
上述关系式规定了第一透镜L1至第八透镜L8的色散系数范围。本实施方式中，第一透镜L1至第八透镜L8的色散系数范围满足上述关系式时，也就是说，第一透镜L1选择低色散系数或者中色散系数材料或较高高色散系数材料或非常高色散系数，第三透镜L3、第五透镜L5、第七透镜L7和第八透镜L8选择较高色散系数材料，第二透镜L2、第四透镜L4选择低色散系数材料，第六透镜L6选择中色散系数材料时，能保证光学镜头10在大范围光圈值的基础上，光学镜头10的成像效果好。
当然，在其他实施方式中，第一透镜L1至第八透镜L8的色散系数范围不限于上述限制。
本申请一些实施方式中，光学镜头10满足下列关系式：
1.65≤Nmax≤2.0；
1.40≤Nmin≤1.58；
其中，Nmax为光学镜头10所有透镜中最大折射率，Nmin为光学镜头10所有透镜中最小折射率。
本实施方式通过限制光学镜头10的透镜的最大折射率和最小折射率，当光学镜头10的 透镜的最大折射率和最小折射率满足上述关系式时，为达到上述折射率范围，各个透镜材质可选择树脂材质或者玻璃材质。通过对透镜进行不同材质的合理配置，有利于实现光学镜头10的小型化，实现电子设备100的薄型化。
当然，在其他实施中，Nmax和Nmin的范围还可以不限于上述限制。
本申请一些实施方式中，当透镜的数量为八片时，光学镜头10满足下列关系式：
1.30≤N1≤2.0
1.50≤N3、N5、N7、N8≤1.55；
1.65≤N2、N4≤1.70；
1.57≤N6≤1.58；
其中，N1为第一透镜L1的折射率，N2为第二透镜L2的折射率，N3为第三透镜L3的折射率，N4第四透镜L4的折射率，N5为第五透镜L5的折射率，N6为第六透镜L6的折射率，N7为第七透镜L7的折射率，N8为第八透镜L8的折射率。
上述关系式规定了第一透镜L1至第八透镜L8的折射率范围。本实施方式中，第一透镜L1至第八透镜L8的折射率范围满足上述关系式时，也就是说，第一透镜L1选择低折射材料、中折射率材料、较高折射材料或非常高折射材料，第三透镜L3、第五透镜L5、第七透镜L7和第八透镜L8选择低折射率材料，第二透镜L2、第四透镜L4选择较高折射率材料，第六透镜L6选择中折射率材料时，能保证光学镜头10在大范围光圈值的基础上，光学镜头10的成像效果好。
当然，在其他实施方式中，第一透镜L1至第八透镜L8的折射率范围不限于上述限制。
本申请一些实施方式中，光学镜头10满足下列关系式：
0.80≤STL/TTL≤1.5；
其中，STL光学镜头10的光阑STO的无穷远物体距离成像面于光轴A上的距离。
上述关系式规定了光阑STO的无穷远物体距离成像面于光轴A上的距离与光学总长的比值范围。示例的，STL/TTL可以等于0.80、0.86、0.88、0.92、1.08、1.12、1.14、1.30或1.50。本实施方式中，光阑STO的无穷远物体距离成像面于光轴A上的距离与光学总长的比值范围满足上述关系式时，光阑STO可以设于第一透镜L1的物侧，也可以设于任意相邻两个透镜之间。
当然，在其他实施方式中，光阑STO的无穷远物体距离成像面于光轴A上的距离与光学总长的比值范围不限于上述限制。
本申请一些实施方式中，光学镜头10满足下列关系式：
80.0°≤FOV≤90.0°；
其中，FOV为光学镜头10的视场角。
可以理解的是，当光学镜头10的视场角FOV满足上述关系式时，光学镜头10具有较大的成像区域，保证了光学镜头的成像质量。
本申请一些实施方式中，光学镜头10中所有透镜的物侧表面和像侧表面均为非球面，且各透镜像侧面及物侧面满足公式：
Figure PCTCN2022126430-appb-000001
其中，z：非球面上距离光轴A为r的点，其与相切于非球面光轴A上交点切面的相对距离；
r：非球面曲线上的点与光轴A的垂直距离；
c：曲率；
k：锥面系数；
ɑ i为第i阶非球面系数。
通过上述关系式，以得到不同的非球面的透镜，使得不同的透镜能够实现不同的光学效果，从而通过各不同的非球面透镜的配合实现良好的拍摄效果。非球面配置自由度更高，消除像差效果好，进而缩减光学镜头10总长度，有利于光学镜头10的小型化。
根据本申请一些实施方式中给定的关系式和范围，通过各透镜的配置方式和具有特定光学设计的透镜的组合，使得光学镜头10在光圈值在1.2至5.0的范围内，具有很好的成像效果，同时实现电子设备100的薄型化。
可以理解的是，上述对光学镜头的不同参数的不同限制可以彼此独立存在，也可以相互结合。当上述所有限定值彼此结合时，光学镜头更薄或能够获得更好的成像质量。
下面将结合图3A、图6至图26更加详细地描述本申请实施方式的一些具体的而非限制性的例子。
请参阅图3A和图6，图3A是本申请第一实施方式的摄像模组1的结构示意图。图6是图3A所示结构的光阑的结构示意图。
本实施方式中，光学镜头10包括光阑STO和八片透镜。具体的，光学镜头10包括从物侧至像侧依次排列的光阑STO、第一透镜L1、第二透镜L2、第三透镜L3、第四透镜L4、第五透镜L5、第六透镜L6、第七透镜L7和第八透镜L8。
本实施方式中，光阑STO为可变光圈，光阑STO的光圈值能够在1.2至5.0的范围内(包括1.2和5.0)调节，实现大光圈、小光圈等多个位置特征。通过调整可变光圈的结构尺寸可以控制光学镜头10的通光量，可以控制摄像模组1的景深，提升背景虚化效果，进而提高图像质量，实现“人像模式”拍照等。
一些实施方式中，光学镜头10的光学总长与光学镜头10的成像面有效像素区域对角线半长度和光学镜头10的入射瞳直径的乘积的比值(TTL/(ImgH×EPD))大于等于0.10，且小于等于1.10。上述限定值保证了光学镜头10的光学总长最够小，成像面大，光圈值变化范围大，有利于光学镜头10小型化及提高成像品质。
一些实施方式中，光阑STO的无穷远物体距离成像面于光轴A上的距离与光学总长的比值(STL/TTL)在0.8至1.5的范围内(包括0.8和1.5)。上述限定值保证了光阑STO可以设于第一透镜L1的物侧，也可以设于任意相邻两个透镜之间。
本实施方式中，第一透镜L1具有正屈折力，第一透镜L1的物侧表面近光轴A处为凸面，从而提供光学镜头10物侧端光线汇聚能力，缩短其总长度，以利于光学镜头10的小型化。第一透镜L1的像侧表面近光轴A处为凹面，能够修正像散。
第二透镜L2具有负屈折力，第二透镜L2的物侧表面近光轴A处为凸面，第二透镜L2的像侧表面近光轴A处为凹面。第二透镜L2有利于平衡第一透镜L1所产生的球差及色差，以降低色偏的产生并使成像更加锐利。
第三透镜L3具有正屈折力，第三透镜L3的物侧表面近光轴A处为凸面，第三透镜L3的像侧表面近光轴A处为凹面。第三透镜L3有利于修正光学镜头10的像差，进一步平衡第一透镜L1所产生的球差及色差。
第四透镜L4具有正屈折力，第四透镜L4的物侧表面近光轴A处为凸面，第四透镜L4的像侧表面近光轴A处为凹面。第四透镜L4有利于修正光学镜头10的像差，平衡第一透镜 L1所产生的球差及色差。
本实施方式中，第一透镜L1具有正屈折力，第二透镜L2具有负屈折力，第三透镜L3具有正屈折力，第四透镜L4具有正屈折力。通过限制第一透镜L1至第四透镜L4的屈折力，从而当光圈值为1.2时，通过光阑STO进入透镜的大量光线可以在第一透镜L1至第四透镜L4配合调制下，达到更好的聚光效果，有效提高光学镜头10的成像质量。
第五透镜L5具有正屈折力，第五透镜L5的物侧表面近光轴A处为凹面，第五透镜L5的像侧表面近光轴A处为凸面。第五透镜L5可利于光学镜头10聚光，有效缩短后焦距与光学总长。
第六透镜L6具有负屈折力，第六透镜L6的物侧表面近光轴A处为凸面，第六透镜L6的像侧表面近光轴A处为凹面。第六透镜L6有利于平衡光学镜头10负屈折力的分布，降低其敏感度，并可减少球差。
第七透镜L7具有正屈折力，第七透镜L7的物侧表面近光轴A处为凸面，第七透镜L7的像侧表面近光轴A处为凸面，且离轴处包含至少一个凹面，第七透镜L7有利于光学镜头10的聚光，能有效缩短后焦距与光学总长。
第八透镜L8具有负屈折力，第八透镜L8的物侧表面近光轴A处为凹面，第八透镜L8的像侧表面近光轴A处为凹面。第八透镜L8的物侧表面S15离轴处包含至少一个凹面，第八透镜L8的像侧表面离轴处包含至少一凸面。第八透镜L8有利于将光学镜头10的主点往被摄物端移动，而可有效缩短后焦距与光学总长，并有助于修正离轴视场的像差。
第八透镜L8的物侧表面及像侧表面都至少包含一反曲点，以修正离轴视场的像差。其中，反曲点为由透镜近光轴A处至离轴处的透镜表面的曲线，该曲线的曲率中心由物侧移至像侧(或由像侧移至物侧)的转换点。第八透镜L8像侧表面至少包含两个临界点，以修正离轴像差。其中，临界点的定义为透镜表面上，除与光轴的交点外，与一垂直于光轴的切面相切的切点。
本实施方式中，第六透镜L6具有负屈折力，其像侧表面近光轴处为凹面，第七透镜L7具有正屈折力，其物侧表面近光轴处为凸面，第八透镜L8具有负屈折力，其像侧表面近光轴处为凹面。第六透镜L6、第七透镜L7、第八透镜L8配置适当面形，以修正影像周边像差而提升成像品质，并缩短后焦距，有助于摄像模组的小型化。
本实施方式通过不同透镜之间的配合，使得光学镜头10在大光圈值变化范围的情况下，具有较好的成像效果，及实现摄像模组的小型化。
本实施方式中，光学镜头10的透镜的所有表面均为非球面，即第一透镜L1、第二透镜L2、第三透镜L3、第四透镜L4、第五透镜L5、第六透镜L6、第七透镜L7和第八透镜L8的像侧表面和物侧表面均为非球面，非球面配置自由度更高，消除像差效果好，进而缩减光学镜头10总长度，有利于光学镜头10的小型化。
本实施方式中，光学镜头10的所有透镜中折射率最大的透镜的折射率(Nmax)为1.68，所有透镜中折射率最小的透镜的折射率(Nmin)为1.54。上述限定值保证了透镜可以采用的材质均为树脂材质，树脂材质与玻璃材质相比成型性高，可制造性强，且可以有效降低生产成本。通过对透镜进行不同材质的合理配置，有利于实现光学镜头10的小型化，及提高光学镜头10的成像效果。
一些实施方式中，第一透镜L1(N1)大于等于1.40，且小于等于2.0；第三透镜L3、第五透镜L5、第七透镜L7和第八透镜L8的折射率(N3、N5、N7、N8)大于等于1.50，且小于等于1.55；第二透镜L2和第四透镜L4的折射率(N2、N4)大于等于1.65，且小于等于1.70；第六透镜L6的折射率(N6)大于等于1.57，且小于等于1.58。也就是说，第一透镜 L1选择低折射材料、中折射率材料、较高折射材料或非常高折射材料，第三透镜L3、第五透镜L5、第七透镜L7和第八透镜L8选择低折射率材料，第二透镜L2、第四透镜L4选择较高折射率材料，第六透镜L6选择中折射率材料。上述限定值能保证光学镜头10在大范围光圈值的基础上，光学镜头10的成像效果好。
所有透镜中色散系数最大的透镜的色散系数(Vmax)为56；所有透镜中色散系数最小的透镜的色散系数(Vmin)为19.5。上述限定值保证了光学镜头10消除色差的能力，提升光学镜头10的成像品质。
一些实施方式中，第一透镜L1的色散系数(V1)大于等于30，且小于等于90；第三透镜L3、第五透镜L5、第七透镜L7和第八透镜L8的色散系数(V3、V5、V7、V8)大于等于52，且小于等于60；第二透镜L2和第四透镜L4的色散系数(V2、V4)大于等于15，且小于等于21；第六透镜L6的色散系数(V6)大于等于35，且小于等于40。也就是说，第一透镜L1选择低色散系数或者中色散系数材料或较高高色散系数材料或非常高色散系数，第三透镜L3、第五透镜L5、第七透镜L7和第八透镜L8选择较高色散系数材料，第二透镜L2、第四透镜L4选择低色散系数材料，第六透镜L6选择中色散系数材料。上述限定值能保证光学镜头10在大范围光圈值的基础上，光学镜头10的成像效果好。
第一透镜L1至第四透镜L4的焦距倒数加和(1/f1+1/f2+1/f3+1/f4)为0.126；上述限定值保证了，当光圈值为1.2时，通过光阑STO进入透镜的大量光线可以在第一透镜L1至第四透镜L4配合调制下，达到更好的聚光效果，有效提高光学镜头10的成像质量。
第一透镜L1、第三透镜L3、第五透镜L5和第七透镜L7的焦距倒数加和(1/f1+1/f3+1/f5+1/f7)为0.339，上述限定值有利于修正光学镜头10的像差，平衡第一透镜L1产生的球差和色差，提高光学镜头10的成像效果。
光学镜头10的焦距与各个透镜的焦距的比值(|EFL/fi|)为1.4；第一透镜L1的焦距与其他各个透镜的焦距的比值(|f1/fi|)为1.9；第四透镜L4的焦距与其他各个透镜的焦距的比值(|f4/fi|)为2.0；上述限定值保证了光学镜头10在大光圈的场景下具有很好的成像品质。
第一透镜L1物侧表面的曲率半径为R1，第一透镜L1像侧表面的曲率半径为R2，第二透镜L2物侧表面的曲率半径为R3，第二透镜L2像侧表面的曲率半径为R4，第三透镜L3物侧表面的曲率半径为R5，第三透镜L3像侧表面的曲率半径为R6，第四透镜L4物侧表面的曲率半径为R7，第四透镜L4像侧表面的曲率半径为R8,第五透镜L5物侧表面的曲率半径为R9，第五透镜L5像侧表面的曲率半径为R10，第六透镜L6物侧表面的曲率半径为R11，第六透镜L6像侧表面的曲率半径为R12，第七透镜L7物侧表面的曲率半径为R13，第七透镜L7像侧表面的曲率半径为R14，第八透镜L8物侧表面的曲率半径为R15，第八透镜L8像侧表面的曲率半径为R16。其中，|R1/R2|＝0.48，|R3/R4|＝1.30，|R5/R6|＝0.50，|R7/R8|＝0.69，|R9/R10|＝1.17，|R11/R12|＝3.24，|R13/R14|＝0.18，|R15/R16|＝8.38。上述限定值保证了光学镜头10能够得到更好的成像效果。
光学镜头10满足R1，R2，R3，R4，R5，R6均大于0；R7，R8中至少有一个大于0。通过限制R1、R2、R3、R4、R5、R6均大于0，且R7、R8中至少有一个大于0，以使光学镜头10能够得到更好的成像效果。
第一透镜L1至第八透镜L8中各透镜于光轴A上厚度的最大值与第一透镜L1至第八透镜L8中各透镜于光轴A上厚度的最小值的比值(CTmax/CTmin)为3.20；第一透镜L1至第八透镜L8中任意相邻两个透镜间隔的最大值与第一透镜L1至第八透镜L8中任意相邻两个透镜间隔的最小值的比值(Tmin/Tmax)为0.080；第三透镜L3物侧表面至第五透镜L5的像 侧表面于光轴A上的距离与光学总长的比值(Dr5r10/TTL)为0.24；所有透镜的物侧表面或像侧表面的通光孔最大值与所有透镜的物侧表面或像侧表面的通光孔最小值的比值(Dmax/Dmin)为6.0；第一透镜L1至第八透镜L8中任意相邻两个透镜间隔的最大值与第一透镜L1至第八透镜L8中各透镜于光轴A上厚度的最大值的比值(Tmax/CTmax)为1.036；上述限定值保证了光学镜头10的小型化。
入射瞳直径与所有透镜的物侧表面或像侧表面的通光孔最大值的比值(EPD/Dmax)在0.25至1.35的范围内(包括0.25和1.35)；入射瞳直径与第三透镜L3的物侧表面至第五透镜L5的像侧表面于光轴A上的距离的比值(EPD/Dr5r10)在0.55至3.15的范围内(包括0.55和3.15)；上述限定值保证了光学镜头10的小型化，且可变光圈的光圈值变化范围大。
第一透镜L1于光轴A上的厚度与第二透镜L2至第八透镜L8中各透镜于光轴A上厚度的最大值的比值(MaxCT1/MaxCT2L)为1.53；上述限定值保证了光学镜头10可以通过不同材质透镜的合理配置，有利于光学镜头10的小型化和可制造性。
第一透镜L1与第二透镜L2于光轴A上的间隔距离为T12，第二透镜L2与第三透镜L3于光轴A上的间隔距离为T23，第三透镜L3与第四透镜L4于光轴A上的间隔距离为T34，第四透镜L4与第五透镜L5于光轴A上的间隔距离为T45，第五透镜L5与第六透镜L6于光轴A上的间隔距离为T56，第六透镜L6与第七透镜L7于光轴A上的间隔距离为T67，第七透镜L7与第八透镜L8于光轴A上的间隔距离为T78，第八透镜L8像侧表面至成像面于光轴A上的距离为BL。Tmax第一透镜L1至第八透镜L8中任意相邻两个透镜间隔的最大值。其中，Tmax/T12＝12.4，Tmax/T23＝6.4，Tmax/T34＝2.0，Tmax/T45＝12.1，Tmax/T56＝2.5，Tmax/T67＝3.3，Tmax/BL＝0.74。上述限定值保证了光学镜头10的小型化。
本实施方式通过不同透镜之间的配合，大范围光圈值的基础上，使得光学镜头10具有较好的成像效果，同时实现电子设备100的薄型化。
可以理解的是，上述对光学镜头的不同参数的不同限制可以彼此独立存在，也可以相互结合。当上述所有限定值彼此结合时，光学镜头更薄或能够获得更好的成像质量。
依据上文的关系式，本申请第一实施方式的摄像模组1的基本参数如下表1。
表1第一实施方式的光学镜头10工作状态时的基本参数
Figure PCTCN2022126430-appb-000002
本申请第一实施方式的摄像模组1各个组成的详细结构数据如下表2。
表2摄像模组1各个组成的详细结构数据
Figure PCTCN2022126430-appb-000003
Figure PCTCN2022126430-appb-000004
上表中，表格中各个符号的含义如下。
OBJ：物体距离；
STO：光阑；
L1：第一透镜L1；
L2：第二透镜L2；
L3：第三透镜L3；
L4：第四透镜L4；
L5：第五透镜L5；
L6：第六透镜L6；
L7：第七透镜L7；
L8：第八透镜L8；
S1：第一透镜L1的物侧表面；
S2：第一透镜L1的像侧表面；
S3：第二透镜L2的物侧表面；
S4：第二透镜L2的像侧表面；
S5：第三透镜L3的物侧表面；
S6：第三透镜L3的像侧表面；
S7：第四透镜L4的物侧表面；
S8：第四透镜L4的像侧表面；
S9：第五透镜L5的物侧表面；
S10：第五透镜L5的像侧表面；
S11：第六透镜L6的物侧表面；
S12：第六透镜L6的像侧表面；
S13：第七透镜L7的物侧表面；
S14：第七透镜L7的像侧表面；
S15：第八透镜L8的物侧表面；
S16：第八透镜L8的像侧表面；
S17：红外滤光片30的物侧表面；
S18：红外滤光片30的像侧表面；
S19：成像面。
需要说明的是，本申请中上述各符号表示的意义除另有说明外，在后续再次出现时表示意思相同，将不再进行赘述。
表3示出了本实施方式的光学镜头10的各个透镜的物侧表面和像侧表面的通光孔径，具体如表3所示。
表3第一实施方式的光学镜头10的各个透镜的通光孔径
面号 S1 S2 S3 S4 S5 S6 S7 S8 S9 S10 S11 S12 S13 S14 S15 S16
孔径 4.22 4.12 3.96 3.60 3.54 3.33 3.40 3.84 4.10 4.46 5.36 6.14 6.77 7.49 8.84 9.64
表4示出了本实施方式的光学镜头10的非球面系数，本实施例光学镜头10中非球面的数量为16个，具体如表4所示。
表4第一实施方式的光学镜头10的非球面系数
面号 K A4 A6 A8 A10
S1 9.71E-02 -5.29E-03 1.21E-02 -1.83E-02 1.66E-02
S2 -7.80E+00 -4.65E-02 6.92E-02 -7.29E-02 5.30E-02
S3 -4.53E+00 -6.15E-02 8.50E-02 -8.80E-02 6.37E-02
S4 -5.44E-01 -3.07E-02 4.46E-02 -4.17E-02 2.31E-02
S5 1.63E+00 -4.47E-03 1.11E-02 -3.04E-03 -9.62E-03
S6 8.09E+00 -1.29E-03 1.25E-03 -6.83E-03 1.41E-02
S7 0.00E+00 -2.20E-03 -5.85E-02 7.48E-02 -6.26E-02
S8 0.00E+00 6.82E-02 -1.80E-01 2.06E-01 -1.56E-01
S9 7.59E+00 9.01E-02 -1.74E-01 1.71E-01 -1.10E-01
S10 -6.11E+00 2.07E-02 -4.22E-02 2.26E-02 -6.58E-03
S11 -4.82E+00 1.19E-02 -2.41E-02 1.25E-02 -4.86E-03
S12 -2.07E+00 -4.03E-02 7.67E-04 3.84E-03 -2.24E-03
S13 8.13E-03 -2.58E-02 2.25E-03 -3.77E-03 1.84E-03
S14 0.00E+00 2.40E-02 -8.78E-03 4.61E-04 3.45E-04
S15 1.41E+00 -7.91E-02 2.61E-02 -5.77E-03 8.60E-04
S16 -1.14E+01 -3.65E-02 9.68E-03 -1.62E-03 1.67E-04
面号 A12 A14 A16 A18 A20
S1 -9.31E-03 3.29E-03 -7.09E-04 8.57E-05 -4.46E-06
S2 -2.56E-02 7.97E-03 -1.52E-03 1.61E-04 -7.14E-06
S3 -3.09E-02 9.75E-03 -1.90E-03 2.05E-04 -9.18E-06
S4 -5.45E-03 -1.21E-03 1.19E-03 -3.05E-04 2.77E-05
S5 1.35E-02 -8.29E-03 2.80E-03 -4.99E-04 3.66E-05
S6 -1.54E-02 9.82E-03 -3.58E-03 6.99E-04 -5.59E-05
S7 3.16E-02 -9.63E-03 1.71E-03 -1.60E-04 6.32E-06
S8 7.81E-02 -2.54E-02 5.14E-03 -5.87E-04 2.91E-05
S9 4.79E-02 -1.38E-02 2.48E-03 -2.47E-04 1.05E-05
S10 7.83E-04 1.34E-04 -6.51E-05 8.85E-06 -3.85E-07
S11 1.30E-03 -2.08E-04 1.59E-05 -1.54E-07 -2.88E-08
S12 7.17E-04 -1.33E-04 1.42E-05 -8.08E-07 1.90E-08
S13 -4.52E-04 6.23E-05 -4.84E-06 1.98E-07 -3.34E-09
S14 -1.09E-04 1.54E-05 -1.19E-06 4.74E-08 -7.74E-10
S15 -8.26E-05 5.02E-06 -1.86E-07 3.85E-09 -3.40E-11
S16 -1.07E-05 4.09E-07 -8.68E-09 8.17E-11 -1.19E-13
其中，K表示非球面曲线方程式中的锥面系数，A4、A6、A8、A10、A12、A14、A16、A19、A20则表示各表面第4、6、8、10、12、14、16、18、20阶非球面系数。需要说明的是，表格中的各参数为科学计数法表示。例如，-1.07E-01是指-1.07×10 -1；-4.11E-02是指-4.11×10 -2。需要说明的是，本申请中K、A4、A6、A8、A10、A12、A14、A16、A19、A20等符号在后续再次出现时，除非有另外的解释，否则表示的意思与此处相同，后续不再赘述。
通过将上述参数代入至公式：
Figure PCTCN2022126430-appb-000005
即能够设计得到本实施方式的光学镜头10的各个透镜，其中，z为非球面上距离光轴A为r的点，其与相切于非球面光轴A上交点切面的相对距离，r为非球面曲线上的点与光轴A的垂直距离，c为曲率，k为锥面系数，ɑ i为第i阶非球面系数。
本实施方式中，通过上述参数设计得到的光学镜头10的各不同的透镜能够分别起到不同的作用，从而通过各透镜的配合，在大光圈值范围的基础上，得到具有良好背景虚化效果和成像质量及薄型化的光学镜头10。
图7和图8为第一实施方式的光学镜头10的光学性能的表征图。
具体的，图8示出了光学镜头10波长分别为650nm、610nm、555nm、510nm、470nm的光经过第一实施方式的光学镜头10后的轴向色差。图8的纵坐标表示的是归一化光瞳坐标，横坐标表示轴向色差，单位为毫米。从图8中可以看出，本实施方式中，光学镜头10在各个状态下的轴向色差控制在一个很小的范围内。
图8中左图为光学镜头10的场曲示意图，右图为光学镜头10的光学畸变示意图。其中，左图中实线为650nm的光经过光学镜头10后的子午方向的场曲示意图，虚线为650nm的光经过光学镜头10后的弧矢方向的场曲示意图。右图为650nm的光经过第一实施方式的光学镜头10后的光学畸变示意图。两图的纵坐标都是物体角度，左图横坐标表示子午方向(虚线)和弧矢方向(实线)的像散值，单位为毫米。右图表示不同视场对应的光学畸变值，单位为百分比。由图8可见，本实施方式中，光学系统将畸变控制在肉眼不可明显辨识范围内。
本实施方式中提供的光学镜头10，通过各透镜组中各透镜的配置方式和具有特定光学设计的透镜的组合，可以使光学镜头10在大光圈值范围的基础上，具有较好的背景虚化效果和成像效果，同时实现电子设备100的薄型化。
请参阅图9，图9是本申请第二实施方式的摄像模组1的结构示意图。
本实施方式中，光学镜头10包括光阑STO和八片透镜。具体的，光学镜头10包括从物侧至像侧依次排列的光阑STO、第一透镜L1、第二透镜L2、第三透镜L3、第四透镜L4、第五透镜L5、第六透镜L6、第七透镜L7和第八透镜L8。
本实施方式中，光阑STO为可变光圈，光阑STO的光圈值能够在1.2至5.0的范围内(包括1.2和5.0)调节，实现大光圈、小光圈等多个位置特征。通过调整可变光圈的结构尺寸可以控制光学镜头10的通光量，可以控制摄像模组1的景深，提升背景虚化效果，进而提高图 像质量，实现“人像模式”拍照等。
一些实施方式中，光学镜头10的光学总长与光学镜头10的成像面有效像素区域对角线半长度和光学镜头10的入射瞳直径的乘积的比值(TTL/(ImgH×EPD))大于等于0.10，且小于等于1.10。上述限定值保证了光学镜头10的光学总长最够小，成像面大，光圈值变化范围大，有利于光学镜头10小型化及提高成像品质。
一些实施方式中，光阑STO的无穷远物体距离成像面于光轴A上的距离与光学总长的比值(STL/TTL)在0.8至1.5的范围内(包括0.8和1.5)。上述限定值保证了光阑STO可以设于第一透镜L1的物侧，也可以设于任意相邻两个透镜之间。
本实施方式中，第一透镜L1具有正屈折力，第一透镜L1的物侧表面近光轴A处为凸面，从而提供光学镜头10物侧端光线汇聚能力，缩短其总长度，以利于光学镜头10的小型化。第一透镜L1的像侧表面近光轴A处为凹面，能够修正像散。
第二透镜L2具有负屈折力，第二透镜L2的物侧表面近光轴A处为凸面，第二透镜L2的像侧表面近光轴A处为凹面。第二透镜L2有利于平衡第一透镜L1所产生的球差及色差，以降低色偏的产生并使成像更加锐利。
第三透镜L3具有正屈折力，第三透镜L3的物侧表面近光轴A处为凸面，第三透镜L3的像侧表面近光轴A处为凹面。第三透镜L3有利于修正光学镜头10的像差，进一步平衡第一透镜L1所产生的球差及色差。
第四透镜L4具有负屈折力，第四透镜L4的物侧表面近光轴A处为凸面，第四透镜L4的像侧表面近光轴A处为凹面。第四透镜L4有利于修正光学镜头10的像差，平衡第一透镜L1所产生的球差及色差。
本实施方式中，第一透镜L1具有正屈折力，第二透镜L2具有负屈折力，第三透镜L3具有正屈折力，第四透镜L4具有负屈折力。通过限制第一透镜L1至第四透镜L4的屈折力，从而当光圈值为1.2时，通过光阑STO进入透镜的大量光线可以在第一透镜L1至第四透镜L4配合调制下，达到更好的聚光效果，有效提高光学镜头10的成像质量。
第五透镜L5具有正屈折力，第五透镜L5的物侧表面近光轴A处为凹面，第五透镜L5的像侧表面近光轴A处为凸面。第五透镜L5可利于光学镜头10聚光，有效缩短后焦距与光学总长。
第六透镜L6具有负屈折力，第六透镜L6的物侧表面近光轴A处为凸面，第六透镜L6的像侧表面近光轴A处为凹面。第六透镜L6有利于平衡光学镜头10负屈折力的分布，降低其敏感度，并可减少球差。
第七透镜L7具有正屈折力，第七透镜L7的物侧表面近光轴A处为凸面，第七透镜L7的像侧表面近光轴A处为凸面，且离轴处包含至少一个凹面，第七透镜L7有利于光学镜头10的聚光，能有效缩短后焦距与光学总长。
第八透镜L8具有负屈折力，第八透镜L8的物侧表面近光轴A处为凹面，第八透镜L8的像侧表面S16近光轴A处为凹面。第八透镜L8的物侧表面S15离轴处包含至少一个凹面，第八透镜L8的像侧表面S16离轴处包含至少一凸面。第八透镜L8有利于将光学镜头10的主点往被摄物端移动，而可有效缩短后焦距与光学总长，并有助于修正离轴视场的像差。
第八透镜L8的物侧表面及像侧表面都至少包含一反曲点，以修正离轴视场的像差。其中，反曲点为由透镜近光轴A处至离轴处的透镜表面的曲线，该曲线的曲率中心由物侧移至像侧(或由像侧移至物侧)的转换点。第八透镜L8像侧表面至少包含两个临界点，以修正离轴像差。其中，临界点的定义为透镜表面上，除与光轴的交点外，与一垂直于光轴的切面相切的切点。
本实施方式中，第六透镜L6具有负屈折力，其像侧表面近光轴处为凹面，第七透镜L7具有正屈折力，其物侧表面近光轴处为凸面，第八透镜L8具有负屈折力，其像侧表面近光轴处为凹面。第六透镜L6、第七透镜L7、第八透镜L8配置适当面形，以修正影像周边像差而提升成像品质，并缩短后焦距，有助于摄像模组的小型化。
本实施方式通过不同透镜之间的配合，使得光学镜头10在大光圈值变化范围的情况下，具有较好的成像效果，及实现摄像模组的小型化。
本实施方式中，光学镜头10的透镜的所有表面均为非球面，即第一透镜L1、第二透镜L2、第三透镜L3、第四透镜L4、第五透镜L5、第六透镜L6、第七透镜L7和第八透镜L8的像侧表面和物侧表面均为非球面，非球面配置自由度更高，消除像差效果好，进而缩减光学镜头10总长度，有利于光学镜头10的小型化。
本实施方式中，光学镜头10的所有透镜中折射率最大的透镜的折射率(Nmax)为1.67，所有透镜中折射率最小的透镜的折射率(Nmin)为1.54。上述限定值保证了透镜可以采用的材质均为树脂材质，树脂材质与玻璃材质相比成型性高，可制造性强，且可以有效降低生产成本。通过对透镜进行不同材质的合理配置，有利于实现光学镜头10的小型化，及提高光学镜头10的成像效果。
一些实施方式中，第一透镜L1(N1)大于等于1.40，且小于等于2.0；第三透镜L3、第五透镜L5、第七透镜L7和第八透镜L8的折射率(N3、N5、N7、N8)大于等于1.50，且小于等于1.55；第二透镜L2和第四透镜L4的折射率(N2、N4)大于等于1.65，且小于等于1.70；第六透镜L6的折射率(N6)大于等于1.57，且小于等于1.58。也就是说，第一透镜L1选择低折射材料、中折射率材料、较高折射材料或非常高折射材料，第三透镜L3、第五透镜L5、第七透镜L7和第八透镜L8选择低折射率材料，第二透镜L2、第四透镜L4选择较高折射率材料，第六透镜L6选择中折射率材料。上述限定值能保证光学镜头10在大范围光圈值的基础上，光学镜头10的成像效果好。
所有透镜中色散系数最大的透镜的色散系数(Vmax)为56；所有透镜中色散系数最小的透镜的色散系数(Vmin)为19.5。上述限定值保证了光学镜头10消除色差的能力，提升光学镜头10的成像品质。
一些实施方式中，第一透镜L1的色散系数(V1)大于等于30，且小于等于90；第三透镜L3、第五透镜L5、第七透镜L7和第八透镜L8的色散系数(V3、V5、V7、V8)大于等于52，且小于等于60；第二透镜L2和第四透镜L4的色散系数(V2、V4)大于等于15，且小于等于21；第六透镜L6的色散系数(V6)大于等于35，且小于等于40。也就是说，第一透镜L1选择低色散系数或者中色散系数材料或较高高色散系数材料或非常高色散系数，第三透镜L3、第五透镜L5、第七透镜L7和第八透镜L8选择较高色散系数材料，第二透镜L2、第四透镜L4选择低色散系数材料，第六透镜L6选择中色散系数材料。上述限定值能保证光学镜头10在大范围光圈值的基础上，光学镜头10的成像效果好。
第一透镜L1至第四透镜L4的焦距倒数加和(1/f1+1/f2+1/f3+1/f4)为0.121；上述限定值保证了，当光圈值为1.2时，通过光阑STO进入透镜的大量光线可以在第一透镜L1至第四透镜L4配合调制下，达到更好的聚光效果，有效提高光学镜头10的成像质量。
第一透镜L1、第三透镜L3、第五透镜L5和第七透镜L7的焦距倒数加和(1/f1+1/f3+1/f5+1/f7)为0.321，上述限定值有利于修正光学镜头10的像差，平衡第一透镜L1产生的球差和色差，提高光学镜头10的成像效果。
光学镜头10的焦距与各个透镜的焦距的比值(|EFL/fi|)为1.4；第一透镜L1的焦距与 其他各个透镜的焦距的比值(|f1/fi|)为1.7；第四透镜L4的焦距与其他各个透镜的焦距的比值(|f4/fi|)为2.0；上述限定值保证了光学镜头10在大光圈的场景下具有很好的成像品质。
第一透镜L1物侧表面的曲率半径为R1，第一透镜L1像侧表面的曲率半径为R2，第二透镜L2物侧表面的曲率半径为R3，第二透镜L2像侧表面的曲率半径为R4，第三透镜L3物侧表面的曲率半径为R5，第三透镜L3像侧表面的曲率半径为R6，第四透镜L4物侧表面的曲率半径为R7，第四透镜L4像侧表面的曲率半径为R8,第五透镜L5物侧表面的曲率半径为R9，第五透镜L5像侧表面的曲率半径为R10，第六透镜L6物侧表面的曲率半径为R11，第六透镜L6像侧表面的曲率半径为R12，第七透镜L7物侧表面的曲率半径为R13，第七透镜L7像侧表面的曲率半径为R14，第八透镜L8物侧表面的曲率半径为R15，第八透镜L8像侧表面的曲率半径为R16。其中，|R1/R2|＝0.45，|R3/R4|＝1.35，|R5/R6|＝0.51，|R7/R8|＝4.14，|R9/R10|＝1.07，|R11/R12|＝2.08，|R13/R14|＝0.01，|R15/R16|＝7.67。上述限定值保证了光学镜头10能够得到更好的成像效果。
光学镜头10满足R1，R2，R3，R4，R5，R6均大于0；R7，R8中至少有一个大于0。通过限制R1、R2、R3、R4、R5、R6均大于0，且R7、R8中至少有一个大于0，以使光学镜头10能够得到更好的成像效果。
第一透镜L1至第八透镜L8中各透镜于光轴A上厚度的最大值与第一透镜L1至第八透镜L8中各透镜于光轴A上厚度的最小值的比值(CTmax/CTmin)为3.09；第一透镜L1至第八透镜L8中任意相邻两个透镜间隔的最大值与第一透镜L1至第八透镜L8中任意相邻两个透镜间隔的最小值的比值(Tmin/Tmax)为0.064；第三透镜L3物侧表面至第五透镜L5的像侧表面于光轴A上的距离与光学总长的比值(Dr5r10/TTL)为0.24；所有透镜的物侧表面或像侧表面的通光孔最大值与所有透镜的物侧表面或像侧表面的通光孔最小值的比值(Dmax/Dmin)为2.95；第一透镜L1至第八透镜L8中任意相邻两个透镜间隔的最大值与第一透镜L1至第八透镜L8中各透镜于光轴A上厚度的最大值的比值(Tmax/CTmax)为1.356；上述限定值保证了光学镜头10的小型化。
入射瞳直径与所有透镜的物侧表面或像侧表面的通光孔最大值的比值(EPD/Dmax)在0.25至1.35的范围内(包括0.25和1.35)；入射瞳直径与第三透镜L3的物侧表面至第五透镜L5的像侧表面于光轴A上的距离的比值(EPD/Dr5r10)在0.55至3.15的范围内(包括0.55和3.15)；上述限定值保证了光学镜头10的小型化，且可变光圈的光圈值变化范围大。
第一透镜L1于光轴A上的厚度与第二透镜L2至第八透镜L8中各透镜于光轴A上厚度的最大值的比值(MaxCT1/MaxCT2L)为1.52；上述限定值保证了光学镜头10可以通过不同材质透镜的合理配置，有利于光学镜头10的小型化和可制造性。
第一透镜L1与第二透镜L2于光轴A上的间隔距离为T12，第二透镜L2与第三透镜L3于光轴A上的间隔距离为T23，第三透镜L3与第四透镜L4于光轴A上的间隔距离为T34，第四透镜L4与第五透镜L5于光轴A上的间隔距离为T45，第五透镜L5与第六透镜L6于光轴A上的间隔距离为T56，第六透镜L6与第七透镜L7于光轴A上的间隔距离为T67，第七透镜L7与第八透镜L8于光轴A上的间隔距离为T78，第八透镜L8像侧表面至成像面于光轴A上的距离为BL，Tmax第一透镜L1至第八透镜L8中任意相邻两个透镜间隔的最大值。其中，Tmax/T12＝15.7，Tmax/T23＝8.7，Tmax/T34＝2.4，Tmax/T45＝14.3，Tmax/T56＝2.6，Tmax/T67＝4.9，Tmax/BL＝1.1。上述限定值保证了光学镜头10的小型化。
本实施方式通过不同透镜之间的配合，大范围光圈值的基础上，使得光学镜头10具有较好的成像效果，同时实现电子设备100的薄型化。
可以理解的是，上述对光学镜头的不同参数的不同限制可以彼此独立存在，也可以相互结合。当上述所有限定值彼此结合时，光学镜头更薄或能够获得更好的成像质量。
依据上文的关系式，本申请第二实施方式的摄像模组1的基本参数如下表5。
表5第二实施方式的光学镜头10工作状态时的基本参数
Figure PCTCN2022126430-appb-000006
本申请第二实施方式的摄像模组1各个组成的详细结构数据如下表6。
表6摄像模组1各个组成的详细结构数据
Figure PCTCN2022126430-appb-000007
表7示出了本实施方式的光学镜头10的各个透镜的物侧表面和像侧表面的通光孔径，具体如表7所示。
表7第二实施方式的光学镜头10的各个透镜的通光孔径
面号 S1 S2 S3 S4 S5 S6 S7 S8 S9 S10 S11 S12 S13 S14 S15 S16
孔径 4.13 4.36 3.91 3.58 3.53 3.36 3.30 3.73 4.10 4.33 5.12 5.95 6.61 7.31 9.04 9.74
表8示出了本实施方式的光学镜头10的非球面系数，本实施例光学镜头10中非球面的数量为16个，具体如表8所示。
表8第二实施方式的光学镜头10的非球面系数
面号 K A4 A6 A8 A10
S1 1.24E-01 -4.59E-03 1.05E-02 -1.61E-02 1.51E-02
S2 -4.62E+00 -5.22E-02 8.12E-02 -8.41E-02 5.97E-02
S3 -3.10E+00 -7.40E-02 1.10E-01 -1.14E-01 8.17E-02
S4 -5.76E-01 -4.37E-02 7.13E-02 -7.45E-02 5.06E-02
S5 1.44E+00 -1.17E-02 2.27E-02 -1.51E-02 -2.25E-03
S6 1.07E+01 -1.20E-03 1.43E-03 -6.73E-03 1.42E-02
S7 0.00E+00 4.88E-03 -8.35E-02 1.07E-01 -8.61E-02
S8 0.00E+00 7.66E-02 -1.99E-01 2.17E-01 -1.53E-01
S9 1.27E+01 9.74E-02 -1.90E-01 1.82E-01 -1.10E-01
S10 1.12E+00 1.46E-02 -4.13E-02 2.68E-02 -1.11E-02
S11 0.00E+00 1.46E-02 -2.81E-02 1.47E-02 -5.79E-03
S12 -1.40E+01 -2.89E-02 -6.36E-03 6.40E-03 -3.04E-03
S13 -4.31E-02 -2.44E-02 -3.73E-03 7.60E-04 -8.73E-05
S14 0.00E+00 2.18E-02 -1.08E-02 1.52E-03 1.55E-05
S15 1.05E+01 -6.83E-02 1.92E-02 -3.69E-03 4.99E-04
S16 -1.13E+01 -3.21E-02 8.05E-03 -1.41E-03 1.67E-04
面号 A12 A14 A16 A18 A20
S1 -8.84E-03 3.27E-03 -7.39E-04 9.38E-05 -5.14E-06
S2 -2.85E-02 8.88E-03 -1.72E-03 1.84E-04 -8.31E-06
S3 -3.96E-02 1.27E-02 -2.54E-03 2.84E-04 -1.34E-05
S4 -2.12E-02 4.75E-03 -1.93E-04 -1.34E-04 1.95E-05
S5 1.15E-02 -8.56E-03 3.18E-03 -6.08E-04 4.74E-05
S6 -1.54E-02 9.82E-03 -3.58E-03 6.99E-04 -5.59E-05
S7 4.05E-02 -1.02E-02 8.62E-04 1.38E-04 -2.53E-05
S8 7.03E-02 -2.06E-02 3.67E-03 -3.50E-04 1.31E-05
S9 4.32E-02 -1.09E-02 1.63E-03 -1.21E-04 2.87E-06
S10 3.38E-03 -7.98E-04 1.37E-04 -1.54E-05 8.57E-07
S11 1.54E-03 -2.37E-04 1.68E-05 -4.86E-08 -3.61E-08
S12 8.86E-04 -1.52E-04 1.50E-05 -7.94E-07 1.74E-08
S13 3.37E-05 -9.64E-06 1.28E-06 -7.90E-08 1.85E-09
S14 -3.74E-05 5.79E-06 -4.26E-07 1.57E-08 -2.32E-10
S15 -4.47E-05 2.56E-06 -9.08E-08 1.81E-09 -1.56E-11
S16 -1.34E-05 7.25E-07 -2.50E-08 4.99E-10 -4.36E-12
其中，K表示非球面曲线方程式中的锥面系数，A4、A6、A8、A10、A12、A14、A16、A19、A20则表示各表面第4、6、8、10、12、14、16、18、20阶非球面系数。需要说明的是，表格中的各参数为科学计数法表示。例如，-1.07E-01是指-1.07×10 -1；-4.11E-02是指-4.11×10 -2。需要说明的是，本申请中K、A4、A6、A8、A10、A12、A14、A16、A19、A20等符号在后续再次出现时，除非有另外的解释，否则表示的意思与此处相同，后续不再赘述。
通过将上述参数代入至公式：
Figure PCTCN2022126430-appb-000008
即能够设计得到本实施方式的光学镜头10的各个透镜，其中，z为非球面上距离光轴A为r的点，其与相切于非球面光轴A上交点切面的相对距离，r为非球面曲线上的点与光轴A的垂直距离，c为曲率，k为锥面系数，ɑ i为第i阶非球面系数。
本实施方式中，通过上述参数设计得到的光学镜头10的各不同的透镜能够分别起到不同的作用，从而通过各透镜的配合，在大光圈值范围的基础上，得到具有良好背景虚化效果和成像质量及薄型化的光学镜头10。
图10和图11为第二实施方式的光学镜头10的光学性能的表征图。
具体的，图10示出了光学镜头10波长分别为650nm、610nm、555nm、510nm、470nm的光经过第二实施方式的光学镜头10后的轴向色差。图10的纵坐标表示的是归一化光瞳坐标，横坐标表示轴向色差，单位为毫米。从图10中可以看出，本实施方式中，光学镜头10在各个状态下的轴向色差控制在一个很小的范围内。
图11中左图为光学镜头10的场曲示意图，右图为光学镜头10的光学畸变示意图。其中，左图中实线为650nm的光经过光学镜头10后的子午方向的场曲示意图，虚线为650nm的光经过光学镜头10后的弧矢方向的场曲示意图。右图为650nm的光经过第二实施方式的光学镜头10后的光学畸变示意图。两图的纵坐标都是物体角度，左图横坐标表示子午方向(虚线)和弧矢方向(实线)的像散值，单位为毫米。右图表示不同视场对应的光学畸变值，单位为百分比。由图11可见，本实施方式中，光学系统将畸变控制在肉眼不可明显辨识范围内。
本实施方式中提供的光学镜头10，通过各透镜组中各透镜的配置方式和具有特定光学设计的透镜的组合，可以使光学镜头10在大光圈值范围的基础上，具有较好的背景虚化效果和成像效果，同时实现电子设备100的薄型化。
请参阅图12，图12是本申请第三实施方式的摄像模组1的结构示意图。
本实施方式中，光学镜头10包括光阑STO和八片透镜。具体的，光学镜头10包括从物侧至像侧依次排列的光阑STO、第一透镜L1、第二透镜L2、第三透镜L3、第四透镜L4、第五透镜L5、第六透镜L6、第七透镜L7和第八透镜L8。
本实施方式中，光阑STO为可变光圈，光阑STO的光圈值能够在1.2至5.0的范围内(包括1.2和5.0)调节，实现大光圈、小光圈等多个位置特征。通过调整可变光圈的结构尺寸可以控制光学镜头10的通光量，可以控制摄像模组1的景深，提升背景虚化效果，进而提高图像质量，实现“人像模式”拍照等。
一些实施方式中，光学镜头10的光学总长与光学镜头10的成像面有效像素区域对角线半长度和光学镜头10的入射瞳直径的乘积的比值(TTL/(ImgH×EPD))大于等于0.10，且小于等于1.10。上述限定值保证了光学镜头10的光学总长最够小，成像面大，光圈值变化范围大，有利于光学镜头10小型化及提高成像品质。
一些实施方式中，光阑STO的无穷远物体距离成像面于光轴A上的距离与光学总长的比值(STL/TTL)在0.8至1.5的范围内(包括0.8和1.5)。上述限定值保证了光阑STO可以设于第一透镜L1的物侧，也可以设于任意相邻两个透镜之间。
本实施方式中，第一透镜L1具有正屈折力，第一透镜L1的物侧表面近光轴A处为凸面，从而提供光学镜头10物侧端光线汇聚能力，缩短其总长度，以利于光学镜头10的小型化。第一透镜L1的像侧表面近光轴A处为凹面，能够修正像散。
第二透镜L2具有负屈折力，第二透镜L2的物侧表面近光轴A处为凸面，第二透镜L2的像侧表面近光轴A处为凹面。第二透镜L2有利于平衡第一透镜L1所产生的球差及色差，以降低色偏的产生并使成像更加锐利。
第三透镜L3具有正屈折力，第三透镜L3的物侧表面近光轴A处为凸面，第三透镜L3的像侧表面近光轴A处为凹面。第三透镜L3有利于修正光学镜头10的像差，进一步平衡第一透镜L1所产生的球差及色差。
第四透镜L4具有负屈折力，第四透镜L4的物侧表面近光轴A处为凹面，第四透镜L4的像侧表面近光轴A处为凹面。第四透镜L4有利于修正光学镜头10的像差，平衡第一透镜L1所产生的球差及色差。
本实施方式中，第一透镜L1具有正屈折力，第二透镜L2具有负屈折力，第三透镜L3具有正屈折力，第四透镜L4具有负屈折力。通过限制第一透镜L1至第四透镜L4的屈折力，从而当光圈值为1.2时，通过光阑STO进入透镜的大量光线可以在第一透镜L1至第四透镜L4配合调制下，达到更好的聚光效果，有效提高光学镜头10的成像质量。
第五透镜L5具有正屈折力，第五透镜L5的物侧表面近光轴A处为凹面，第五透镜L5的像侧表面近光轴A处为凸面。第五透镜L5可利于光学镜头10聚光，有效缩短后焦距与光学总长。
第六透镜L6具有负屈折力，第六透镜L6的物侧表面近光轴A处为凸面，第六透镜L6的像侧表面近光轴A处为凹面。第六透镜L6有利于平衡光学镜头10负屈折力的分布，降低其敏感度，并可减少球差。
第七透镜L7具有正屈折力，第七透镜L7的物侧表面近光轴A处为凸面，第七透镜L7的像侧表面近光轴A处为凹面，且离轴处包含至少一个凹面，第七透镜L7有利于光学镜头10的聚光，能有效缩短后焦距与光学总长。
第八透镜L8具有负屈折力，第八透镜L8的物侧表面近光轴A处为凹面，第八透镜L8的像侧表面S16近光轴A处为凹面。第八透镜L8的物侧表面S15离轴处包含至少一个凹面，第八透镜L8的像侧表面S16离轴处包含至少一凸面。第八透镜L8有利于将光学镜头10的主点往被摄物端移动，而可有效缩短后焦距与光学总长，并有助于修正离轴视场的像差。
第八透镜L8的物侧表面及像侧表面都至少包含一反曲点，以修正离轴视场的像差。其中，反曲点为由透镜近光轴A处至离轴处的透镜表面的曲线，该曲线的曲率中心由物侧移至像侧(或由像侧移至物侧)的转换点。第八透镜L8像侧表面至少包含两个临界点，以修正离轴像差。其中，临界点的定义为透镜表面上，除与光轴的交点外，与一垂直于光轴的切面相切的切点。
本实施方式中，第六透镜L6具有负屈折力，其像侧表面近光轴处为凹面，第七透镜L7具有正屈折力，其物侧表面近光轴处为凹面，第八透镜L8具有负屈折力，其像侧表面近光轴处为凹面。第六透镜L6、第七透镜L7、第八透镜L8配置适当面形，以修正影像周边像差而提升成像品质，并缩短后焦距，有助于摄像模组的小型化。
本实施方式通过不同透镜之间的配合，使得光学镜头10在大光圈值变化范围的情况下，具有较好的成像效果，及实现摄像模组的小型化。
本实施方式中，光学镜头10的透镜的所有表面均为非球面，即第一透镜L1、第二透镜L2、第三透镜L3、第四透镜L4、第五透镜L5、第六透镜L6、第七透镜L7和第八透镜L8的像侧表面和物侧表面均为非球面，非球面配置自由度更高，消除像差效果好，进而缩减光学镜头10总长度，有利于光学镜头10的小型化。
本实施方式中，光学镜头10的所有透镜中折射率最大的透镜的折射率(Nmax)为1.67，所有透镜中折射率最小的透镜的折射率(Nmin)为1.54。上述限定值保证了透镜可以采用的材质均为树脂材质，树脂材质与玻璃材质相比成型性高，可制造性强，且可以有效降低生产成本。通过对透镜进行不同材质的合理配置，有利于实现光学镜头10的小型化，及提高光学 镜头10的成像效果。
一些实施方式中，第一透镜L1(N1)大于等于1.40，且小于等于2.0；第三透镜L3、第五透镜L5、第七透镜L7和第八透镜L8的折射率(N3、N5、N7、N8)大于等于1.50，且小于等于1.55；第二透镜L2和第四透镜L4的折射率(N2、N4)大于等于1.65，且小于等于1.70；第六透镜L6的折射率(N6)大于等于1.57，且小于等于1.58。也就是说，第一透镜L1选择低折射材料、中折射率材料、较高折射材料或非常高折射材料，第三透镜L3、第五透镜L5、第七透镜L7和第八透镜L8选择低折射率材料，第二透镜L2、第四透镜L4选择较高折射率材料，第六透镜L6选择中折射率材料。上述限定值能保证光学镜头10在大范围光圈值的基础上，光学镜头10的成像效果好。
所有透镜中色散系数最大的透镜的色散系数(Vmax)为56；所有透镜中色散系数最小的透镜的色散系数(Vmin)为19.5。上述限定值保证了光学镜头10消除色差的能力，提升光学镜头10的成像品质。
一些实施方式中，第一透镜L1的色散系数(V1)大于等于30，且小于等于90；第三透镜L3、第五透镜L5、第七透镜L7和第八透镜L8的色散系数(V3、V5、V7、V8)大于等于52，且小于等于60；第二透镜L2和第四透镜L4的色散系数(V2、V4)大于等于15，且小于等于21；第六透镜L6的色散系数(V6)大于等于35，且小于等于40。也就是说，第一透镜L1选择低色散系数或者中色散系数材料或较高高色散系数材料或非常高色散系数，第三透镜L3、第五透镜L5、第七透镜L7和第八透镜L8选择较高色散系数材料，第二透镜L2、第四透镜L4选择低色散系数材料，第六透镜L6选择中色散系数材料。上述限定值能保证光学镜头10在大范围光圈值的基础上，光学镜头10的成像效果好。
第一透镜L1至第四透镜L4的焦距倒数加和(1/f1+1/f2+1/f3+1/f4)为0.118；上述限定值保证了，当光圈值为1.2时，通过光阑STO进入透镜的大量光线可以在第一透镜L1至第四透镜L4配合调制下，达到更好的聚光效果，有效提高光学镜头10的成像质量。
第一透镜L1、第三透镜L3、第五透镜L5和第七透镜L7的焦距倒数加和(1/f1+1/f3+1/f5+1/f7)为0.317，上述限定值有利于修正光学镜头10的像差，平衡第一透镜L1产生的球差和色差，提高光学镜头10的成像效果。
光学镜头10的焦距与各个透镜的焦距的比值(|EFL/fi|)为1.4；第一透镜L1的焦距与其他各个透镜的焦距的比值(|f1/fi|)为1.7；第四透镜L4的焦距与其他各个透镜的焦距的比值(|f4/fi|)为1.5；上述限定值保证了光学镜头10在大光圈的场景下具有很好的成像品质。
第一透镜L1物侧表面的曲率半径为R1，第一透镜L1像侧表面的曲率半径为R2，第二透镜L2物侧表面的曲率半径为R3，第二透镜L2像侧表面的曲率半径为R4，第三透镜L3物侧表面的曲率半径为R5，第三透镜L3像侧表面的曲率半径为R6，第四透镜L4物侧表面的曲率半径为R7，第四透镜L4像侧表面的曲率半径为R8,第五透镜L5物侧表面的曲率半径为R9，第五透镜L5像侧表面的曲率半径为R10，第六透镜L6物侧表面的曲率半径为R11，第六透镜L6像侧表面的曲率半径为R12，第七透镜L7物侧表面的曲率半径为R13，第七透镜L7像侧表面的曲率半径为R14，第八透镜L8物侧表面的曲率半径为R15，第八透镜L8像侧表面的曲率半径为R16。其中，|R1/R2|＝0.44，|R3/R4|＝1.35，|R5/R6|＝0.52，|R7/R8|＝0.12，|R9/R10|＝1.09，|R11/R12|＝2.02，|R13/R14|＝0.0001，|R15/R16|＝6.86。上述限定值保证了光学镜头10能够得到更好的成像效果。
光学镜头10满足R1，R2，R3，R4，R5，R6均大于0；R7，R8中至少有一个大于0。通过限制R1、R2、R3、R4、R5、R6均大于0，且R7、R8中至少有一个大于0，以使光学 镜头10能够得到更好的成像效果。
第一透镜L1至第八透镜L8中各透镜于光轴A上厚度的最大值与第一透镜L1至第八透镜L8中各透镜于光轴A上厚度的最小值的比值(CTmax/CTmin)为3.11；第一透镜L1至第八透镜L8中任意相邻两个透镜间隔的最大值与第一透镜L1至第八透镜L8中任意相邻两个透镜间隔的最小值的比值(Tmin/Tmax)为0.061；第三透镜L3物侧表面至第五透镜L5的像侧表面于光轴A上的距离与光学总长的比值(Dr5r10/TTL)为0.24；所有透镜的物侧表面或像侧表面的通光孔最大值与所有透镜的物侧表面或像侧表面的通光孔最小值的比值(Dmax/Dmin)为2.96；第一透镜L1至第八透镜L8中任意相邻两个透镜间隔的最大值与第一透镜L1至第八透镜L8中各透镜于光轴A上厚度的最大值的比值(Tmax/CTmax)为1.406；上述限定值保证了光学镜头10的小型化。
入射瞳直径与所有透镜的物侧表面或像侧表面的通光孔最大值的比值(EPD/Dmax)在0.25至1.35的范围内(包括0.25和1.35)；入射瞳直径与第三透镜L3的物侧表面至第五透镜L5的像侧表面于光轴A上的距离的比值(EPD/Dr5r10)在0.55至3.15的范围内(包括0.55和3.15)；上述限定值保证了光学镜头10的小型化，且可变光圈的光圈值变化范围大。
第一透镜L1于光轴A上的厚度与第二透镜L2至第八透镜L8中各透镜于光轴A上厚度的最大值的比值(MaxCT1/MaxCT2L)为1.51；上述限定值保证了光学镜头10可以通过不同材质透镜的合理配置，有利于光学镜头10的小型化和可制造性。
第一透镜L1与第二透镜L2于光轴A上的间隔距离为T12，第二透镜L2与第三透镜L3于光轴A上的间隔距离为T23，第三透镜L3与第四透镜L4于光轴A上的间隔距离为T34，第四透镜L4与第五透镜L5于光轴A上的间隔距离为T45，第五透镜L5与第六透镜L6于光轴A上的间隔距离为T56，第六透镜L6与第七透镜L7于光轴A上的间隔距离为T67，第七透镜L7与第八透镜L8于光轴A上的间隔距离为T78，第八透镜L8像侧表面至成像面于光轴A上的距离为BL。Tmax第一透镜L1至第八透镜L8中任意相邻两个透镜间隔的最大值。其中，Tmax/T12＝16.4，Tmax/T23＝9.0，Tmax/T34＝2.5，Tmax/T45＝14.0，Tmax/T56＝2.7，Tmax/T67＝5.1，Tmax/BL＝1.2。上述限定值保证了光学镜头10的小型化。
本实施方式通过不同透镜之间的配合，大范围光圈值的基础上，使得光学镜头10具有较好的成像效果，同时实现电子设备100的薄型化。
可以理解的是，上述对光学镜头的不同参数的不同限制可以彼此独立存在，也可以相互结合。当上述所有限定值彼此结合时，光学镜头更薄或能够获得更好的成像质量。
依据上文的关系式，本申请第三实施方式的摄像模组1的基本参数如下表9。
表9第三实施方式的光学镜头10工作状态时的基本参数
Figure PCTCN2022126430-appb-000009
本申请第三实施方式的摄像模组1各个组成的详细结构数据如下表10。
表10摄像模组1各个组成的详细结构数据
Figure PCTCN2022126430-appb-000010
Figure PCTCN2022126430-appb-000011
表11示出了本实施方式的光学镜头10的各个透镜的物侧表面和像侧表面的通光孔径，具体如表11所示。
表11第三实施方式的光学镜头10的各个透镜的通光孔径
面号 S1 S2 S3 S4 S5 S6 S7 S8 S9 S10 S11 S12 S13 S14 S15 S16
孔径 4.17 4.40 3.94 3.61 3.56 3.39 3.33 3.76 4.14 4.38 5.17 6.02 6.71 7.38 9.20 9.87
表12示出了本实施方式的光学镜头10的非球面系数，本实施例光学镜头10中非球面的数量为16个，具体如表12所示。
表12第三实施方式的光学镜头10的非球面系数
面号 K A4 A6 A8 A10
S1 1.26E-01 -4.89E-03 1.11E-02 -1.64E-02 1.48E-02
S2 -4.57E+00 -5.09E-02 7.84E-02 -8.00E-02 5.56E-02
S3 -3.01E+00 -7.26E-02 1.08E-01 -1.10E-01 7.79E-02
S4 -5.91E-01 -4.28E-02 6.88E-02 -7.05E-02 4.62E-02
S5 1.38E+00 -1.18E-02 2.28E-02 -1.59E-02 -6.18E-04
S6 1.10E+01 -1.13E-03 1.38E-03 -6.27E-03 1.29E-02
S7 0.00E+00 5.55E-03 -7.94E-02 9.45E-02 -6.96E-02
S8 0.00E+00 7.27E-02 -1.81E-01 1.87E-01 -1.23E-01
S9 1.27E+01 8.98E-02 -1.64E-01 1.45E-01 -7.77E-02
S10 1.42E+00 1.39E-02 -3.91E-02 2.56E-02 -1.14E-02
S11 0.00E+00 1.19E-02 -2.28E-02 1.04E-02 -3.71E-03
S12 -1.49E+01 -3.02E-02 -2.22E-03 3.26E-03 -1.72E-03
S13 -4.28E-02 -2.54E-02 -1.98E-03 -5.52E-05 1.55E-04
S14 0.00E+00 2.03E-02 -1.01E-02 1.39E-03 1.77E-05
S15 9.26E+00 -6.44E-02 1.73E-02 -3.23E-03 4.27E-04
S16 -1.14E+01 -3.06E-02 7.35E-03 -1.25E-03 1.42E-04
面号 A12 A14 A16 A18 A20
S1 -8.44E-03 3.03E-03 -6.69E-04 8.30E-05 -4.44E-06
S2 -2.59E-02 7.90E-03 -1.49E-03 1.56E-04 -6.90E-06
S3 -3.71E-02 1.16E-02 -2.28E-03 2.49E-04 -1.15E-05
S4 -1.83E-02 3.58E-03 4.83E-05 -1.52E-04 1.90E-05
S5 9.58E-03 -7.30E-03 2.70E-03 -5.08E-04 3.89E-05
S6 -1.38E-02 8.63E-03 -3.09E-03 5.90E-04 -4.63E-05
S7 2.84E-02 -5.01E-03 -4.29E-04 3.10E-04 -3.46E-05
S8 5.29E-02 -1.43E-02 2.30E-03 -1.86E-04 4.79E-06
S9 2.63E-02 -5.34E-03 5.27E-04 -2.31E-06 -2.53E-06
S10 4.00E-03 -1.11E-03 2.13E-04 -2.48E-05 1.32E-06
S11 9.06E-04 -1.20E-04 4.19E-06 6.25E-07 -4.85E-08
S12 5.44E-04 -9.69E-05 9.68E-06 -5.10E-07 1.11E-08
S13 -1.54E-05 -2.92E-06 6.92E-07 -4.97E-08 1.23E-09
S14 -3.39E-05 5.11E-06 -3.67E-07 1.33E-08 -1.91E-10
S15 -3.75E-05 2.12E-06 -7.36E-08 1.44E-09 -1.22E-11
S16 -1.11E-05 5.79E-07 -1.93E-08 3.72E-10 -3.15E-12
其中，K表示非球面曲线方程式中的锥面系数，A4、A6、A8、A10、A12、A14、A16、A19、A20则表示各表面第4、6、8、10、12、14、16、18、20阶非球面系数。需要说明的是，表格中的各参数为科学计数法表示。例如，-1.07E-01是指-1.07×10 -1；-4.11E-02是指-4.11×10 -2。需要说明的是，本申请中K、A4、A6、A8、A10、A12、A14、A16、A19、A20等符号在后续再次出现时，除非有另外的解释，否则表示的意思与此处相同，后续不再赘述。
通过将上述参数代入至公式：
Figure PCTCN2022126430-appb-000012
即能够设计得到本实施方式的光学镜头10的各个透镜，其中，z为非球面上距离光轴A为r的点，其与相切于非球面光轴A上交点切面的相对距离，r为非球面曲线上的点与光轴A的垂直距离，c为曲率，k为锥面系数，ɑ i为第i阶非球面系数。
本实施方式中，通过上述参数设计得到的光学镜头10的各不同的透镜能够分别起到不同的作用，从而通过各透镜的配合，在大光圈值范围的基础上，得到具有良好背景虚化效果和成像质量及薄型化的光学镜头10。
图13和图14为第三实施方式的光学镜头10的光学性能的表征图。
具体的，图13示出了光学镜头10波长分别为650nm、610nm、555nm、510nm、470nm的光经过第三实施方式的光学镜头10后的轴向色差。图13的纵坐标表示的是归一化光瞳坐标，横坐标表示轴向色差，单位为毫米。从图13中可以看出，本实施方式中，光学镜头10在各个状态下的轴向色差控制在一个很小的范围内。
图14中左图为光学镜头10的场曲示意图，右图为光学镜头10的光学畸变示意图。其中，左图中实线为650nm的光经过光学镜头10后的子午方向的场曲示意图，虚线为650nm的光 经过光学镜头10后的弧矢方向的场曲示意图。右图为650nm的光经过第三实施方式的光学镜头10后的光学畸变示意图。两图的纵坐标都是物体角度，左图横坐标表示子午方向(虚线)和弧矢方向(实线)的像散值，单位为毫米。右图表示不同视场对应的光学畸变值，单位为百分比。由图14可见，本实施方式中，光学系统将畸变控制在肉眼不可明显辨识范围内。
本实施方式中提供的光学镜头10，通过各透镜组中各透镜的配置方式和具有特定光学设计的透镜的组合，可以使光学镜头10在大光圈值范围的基础上，具有较好的背景虚化效果和成像效果，同时实现电子设备100的薄型化。
请参阅图15，图15是本申请第四实施方式的摄像模组1的结构示意图。
本实施方式中，光学镜头10包括光阑STO和八片透镜。具体的，光学镜头10包括从物侧至像侧依次排列的光阑STO、第一透镜L1、第二透镜L2、第三透镜L3、第四透镜L4、第五透镜L5、第六透镜L6、第七透镜L7和第八透镜L8。
本实施方式中，光阑STO为可变光圈，光阑STO的光圈值能够在1.2至5.0的范围内(包括1.2和5.0)调节，实现大光圈、小光圈等多个位置特征。通过调整可变光圈的结构尺寸可以控制光学镜头10的通光量，可以控制摄像模组1的景深，提升背景虚化效果，进而提高图像质量，实现“人像模式”拍照等。
一些实施方式中，光学镜头10的光学总长与光学镜头10的成像面有效像素区域对角线半长度和光学镜头10的入射瞳直径的乘积的比值(TTL/(ImgH×EPD))大于等于0.10，且小于等于1.10。上述限定值保证了光学镜头10的光学总长最够小，成像面大，光圈值变化范围大，有利于光学镜头10小型化及提高成像品质。
一些实施方式中，光阑STO的无穷远物体距离成像面于光轴A上的距离与光学总长的比值(STL/TTL)在0.8至1.5的范围内(包括0.8和1.5)。上述限定值保证了光阑STO可以设于第一透镜L1的物侧，也可以设于任意相邻两个透镜之间。
本实施方式中，第一透镜L1具有正屈折力，第一透镜L1的物侧表面近光轴A处为凸面，从而提供光学镜头10物侧端光线汇聚能力，缩短其总长度，以利于光学镜头10的小型化。第一透镜L1的像侧表面近光轴A处为凹面，能够修正像散。
第二透镜L2具有负屈折力，第二透镜L2的物侧表面近光轴A处为凸面，第二透镜L2的像侧表面近光轴A处为凹面。第二透镜L2有利于平衡第一透镜L1所产生的球差及色差，以降低色偏的产生并使成像更加锐利。
第三透镜L3具有正屈折力，第三透镜L3的物侧表面近光轴A处为凸面，第三透镜L3的像侧表面近光轴A处为凹面。第三透镜L3有利于修正光学镜头10的像差，进一步平衡第一透镜L1所产生的球差及色差。
第四透镜L4具有负屈折力，第四透镜L4的物侧表面近光轴A处为凸面，第四透镜L4的像侧表面近光轴A处为凹面。第四透镜L4有利于修正光学镜头10的像差，平衡第一透镜L1所产生的球差及色差。
本实施方式中，第一透镜L1具有正屈折力，第二透镜L2具有负屈折力，第三透镜L3具有正屈折力，第四透镜L4具有负屈折力。通过限制第一透镜L1至第四透镜L4的屈折力，从而当光圈值为1.2时，通过光阑STO进入透镜的大量光线可以在第一透镜L1至第四透镜L4配合调制下，达到更好的聚光效果，有效提高光学镜头10的成像质量。
第五透镜L5具有正屈折力，第五透镜L5的物侧表面近光轴A处为凹面，第五透镜L5的像侧表面近光轴A处为凸面。第五透镜L5可利于光学镜头10聚光，有效缩短后焦距与光学总长。
第六透镜L6具有负屈折力，第六透镜L6的物侧表面近光轴A处为凸面，第六透镜L6的像侧表面近光轴A处为凹面。第六透镜L6有利于平衡光学镜头10负屈折力的分布，降低其敏感度，并可减少球差。
第七透镜L7具有正屈折力，第七透镜L7的物侧表面近光轴A处为凸面，第七透镜L7的像侧表面近光轴A处为凸面，且离轴处包含至少一个凹面，第七透镜L7有利于光学镜头10的聚光，能有效缩短后焦距与光学总长。
第八透镜L8具有负屈折力，第八透镜L8的物侧表面近光轴A处为凹面，第八透镜L8的像侧表面S16近光轴A处为凹面。第八透镜L8的物侧表面S15离轴处包含至少一个凹面，第八透镜L8的像侧表面S16离轴处包含至少一凸面。第八透镜L8有利于将光学镜头10的主点往被摄物端移动，而可有效缩短后焦距与光学总长，并有助于修正离轴视场的像差。
第八透镜L8的物侧表面及像侧表面都至少包含一反曲点，以修正离轴视场的像差。其中，反曲点为由透镜近光轴A处至离轴处的透镜表面的曲线，该曲线的曲率中心由物侧移至像侧(或由像侧移至物侧)的转换点。第八透镜L8像侧表面至少包含两个临界点，以修正离轴像差。其中，临界点的定义为透镜表面上，除与光轴的交点外，与一垂直于光轴的切面相切的切点。
本实施方式中，第六透镜L6具有负屈折力，其像侧表面近光轴处为凹面，第七透镜L7具有正屈折力，其物侧表面近光轴处为凸面，第八透镜L8具有负屈折力，其像侧表面近光轴处为凹面。第六透镜L6、第七透镜L7、第八透镜L8配置适当面形，以修正影像周边像差而提升成像品质，并缩短后焦距，有助于摄像模组的小型化。
本实施方式通过不同透镜之间的配合，使得光学镜头10在大光圈值变化范围的情况下，具有较好的成像效果，及实现摄像模组的小型化。
本实施方式中，光学镜头10的透镜的所有表面均为非球面，即第一透镜L1、第二透镜L2、第三透镜L3、第四透镜L4、第五透镜L5、第六透镜L6、第七透镜L7和第八透镜L8的像侧表面和物侧表面均为非球面，非球面配置自由度更高，消除像差效果好，进而缩减光学镜头10总长度，有利于光学镜头10的小型化。
本实施方式中，光学镜头10的所有透镜中折射率最大的透镜的折射率(Nmax)为1.67，所有透镜中折射率最小的透镜的折射率(Nmin)为1.54。上述限定值保证了透镜可以采用的材质均为树脂材质，树脂材质与玻璃材质相比成型性高，可制造性强，且可以有效降低生产成本。通过对透镜进行不同材质的合理配置，有利于实现光学镜头10的小型化，及提高光学镜头10的成像效果。
一些实施方式中，第一透镜L1(N1)大于等于1.40，且小于等于2.0；第三透镜L3、第五透镜L5、第七透镜L7和第八透镜L8的折射率(N3、N5、N7、N8)大于等于1.50，且小于等于1.55；第二透镜L2和第四透镜L4的折射率(N2、N4)大于等于1.65，且小于等于1.70；第六透镜L6的折射率(N6)大于等于1.57，且小于等于1.58。也就是说，第一透镜L1选择低折射材料、中折射率材料、较高折射材料或非常高折射材料，第三透镜L3、第五透镜L5、第七透镜L7和第八透镜L8选择低折射率材料，第二透镜L2、第四透镜L4选择较高折射率材料，第六透镜L6选择中折射率材料。上述限定值能保证光学镜头10在大范围光圈值的基础上，光学镜头10的成像效果好。
所有透镜中色散系数最大的透镜的色散系数(Vmax)为56；所有透镜中色散系数最小的透镜的色散系数(Vmin)为19.5。上述限定值保证了光学镜头10消除色差的能力，提升光学镜头10的成像品质。
一些实施方式中，第一透镜L1的色散系数(V1)大于等于30，且小于等于90；第三透 镜L3、第五透镜L5、第七透镜L7和第八透镜L8的色散系数(V3、V5、V7、V8)大于等于52，且小于等于60；第二透镜L2和第四透镜L4的色散系数(V2、V4)大于等于15，且小于等于21；第六透镜L6的色散系数(V6)大于等于35，且小于等于40。也就是说，第一透镜L1选择低色散系数或者中色散系数材料或较高高色散系数材料或非常高色散系数，第三透镜L3、第五透镜L5、第七透镜L7和第八透镜L8选择较高色散系数材料，第二透镜L2、第四透镜L4选择低色散系数材料，第六透镜L6选择中色散系数材料。上述限定值能保证光学镜头10在大范围光圈值的基础上，光学镜头10的成像效果好。
第一透镜L1至第四透镜L4的焦距倒数加和(1/f1+1/f2+1/f3+1/f4)为0.117；上述限定值保证了，当光圈值为1.2时，通过光阑STO进入透镜的大量光线可以在第一透镜L1至第四透镜L4配合调制下，达到更好的聚光效果，有效提高光学镜头10的成像质量。
第一透镜L1、第三透镜L3、第五透镜L5和第七透镜L7的焦距倒数加和(1/f1+1/f3+1/f5+1/f7)为0.328，上述限定值有利于修正光学镜头10的像差，平衡第一透镜L1产生的球差和色差，提高光学镜头10的成像效果。
光学镜头10的焦距与各个透镜的焦距的比值(|EFL/fi|)为1.4；第一透镜L1的焦距与其他各个透镜的焦距的比值(|f1/fi|)为1.7；第四透镜L4的焦距与其他各个透镜的焦距的比值(|f4/fi|)为2.0；上述限定值保证了光学镜头10在大光圈的场景下具有很好的成像品质。
第一透镜L1物侧表面的曲率半径为R1，第一透镜L1像侧表面的曲率半径为R2，第二透镜L2物侧表面的曲率半径为R3，第二透镜L2像侧表面的曲率半径为R4，第三透镜L3物侧表面的曲率半径为R5，第三透镜L3像侧表面的曲率半径为R6，第四透镜L4物侧表面的曲率半径为R7，第四透镜L4像侧表面的曲率半径为R8,第五透镜L5物侧表面的曲率半径为R9，第五透镜L5像侧表面的曲率半径为R10，第六透镜L6物侧表面的曲率半径为R11，第六透镜L6像侧表面的曲率半径为R12，第七透镜L7物侧表面的曲率半径为R13，第七透镜L7像侧表面的曲率半径为R14，第八透镜L8物侧表面的曲率半径为R15，第八透镜L8像侧表面的曲率半径为R16。其中，|R1/R2|＝0.41，|R3/R4|＝1.35，|R5/R6|＝0.49，|R7/R8|＝3.68，|R9/R10|＝1.19，|R11/R12|＝2.34，|R13/R14|＝0.06，|R15/R16|＝4.46。上述限定值保证了光学镜头10能够得到更好的成像效果。
光学镜头10满足R1，R2，R3，R4，R5，R6均大于0；R7，R8中至少有一个大于0。通过限制R1、R2、R3、R4、R5、R6均大于0，且R7、R8中至少有一个大于0，以使光学镜头10能够得到更好的成像效果。
第一透镜L1至第八透镜L8中各透镜于光轴A上厚度的最大值与第一透镜L1至第八透镜L8中各透镜于光轴A上厚度的最小值的比值(CTmax/CTmin)为3.32；第一透镜L1至第八透镜L8中任意相邻两个透镜间隔的最大值与第一透镜L1至第八透镜L8中任意相邻两个透镜间隔的最小值的比值(Tmin/Tmax)为0.067；第三透镜L3物侧表面至第五透镜L5的像侧表面于光轴A上的距离与光学总长的比值(Dr5r10/TTL)为0.24；所有透镜的物侧表面或像侧表面的通光孔最大值与所有透镜的物侧表面或像侧表面的通光孔最小值的比值(Dmax/Dmin)为2.98；第一透镜L1至第八透镜L8中任意相邻两个透镜间隔的最大值与第一透镜L1至第八透镜L8中各透镜于光轴A上厚度的最大值的比值(Tmax/CTmax)为1.205；上述限定值保证了光学镜头10的小型化。
入射瞳直径与所有透镜的物侧表面或像侧表面的通光孔最大值的比值(EPD/Dmax)在0.25至1.35的范围内(包括0.25和1.35)；入射瞳直径与第三透镜L3的物侧表面至第五透镜L5的像侧表面于光轴A上的距离的比值(EPD/Dr5r10)在0.55至3.15的范围内(包括0.55 和3.15)；上述限定值保证了光学镜头10的小型化，且可变光圈的光圈值变化范围大。
第一透镜L1于光轴A上的厚度与第二透镜L2至第八透镜L8中各透镜于光轴A上厚度的最大值的比值(MaxCT1/MaxCT2L)为1.46；上述限定值保证了光学镜头10可以通过不同材质透镜的合理配置，有利于光学镜头10的小型化和可制造性。
第一透镜L1与第二透镜L2于光轴A上的间隔距离为T12，第二透镜L2与第三透镜L3于光轴A上的间隔距离为T23，第三透镜L3与第四透镜L4于光轴A上的间隔距离为T34，第四透镜L4与第五透镜L5于光轴A上的间隔距离为T45，第五透镜L5与第六透镜L6于光轴A上的间隔距离为T56，第六透镜L6与第七透镜L7于光轴A上的间隔距离为T67，第七透镜L7与第八透镜L8于光轴A上的间隔距离为T78，第八透镜L8像侧表面至成像面于光轴A上的距离为BL，Tmax第一透镜L1至第八透镜L8中任意相邻两个透镜间隔的最大值。其中，Tmax/T12＝15.0，Tmax/T23＝7.3，Tmax/T34＝2.5，Tmax/T45＝14.0，Tmax/T56＝2.4，Tmax/T67＝4.5，Tmax/BL＝1.1。上述限定值保证了光学镜头10的小型化。
本实施方式通过不同透镜之间的配合，大范围光圈值的基础上，使得光学镜头10具有较好的成像效果，同时实现电子设备100的薄型化。
可以理解的是，上述对光学镜头的不同参数的不同限制可以彼此独立存在，也可以相互结合。当上述所有限定值彼此结合时，光学镜头更薄或能够获得更好的成像质量。
依据上文的关系式，本申请第四实施方式的摄像模组1的基本参数如下表13。
表13第四实施方式的光学镜头10工作状态时的基本参数
Figure PCTCN2022126430-appb-000013
本申请第四实施方式的摄像模组1各个组成的详细结构数据如下表14。
表14摄像模组1各个组成的详细结构数据
Figure PCTCN2022126430-appb-000014
Figure PCTCN2022126430-appb-000015
表15示出了本实施方式的光学镜头10的各个透镜的物侧表面和像侧表面的通光孔径，具体如表15所示。
表15第四实施方式的光学镜头10的各个透镜的通光孔径
面号 S1 S2 S3 S4 S5 S6 S7 S8 S9 S10 S11 S12 S13 S14 S15 S16
孔径 4.33 4.40 4.07 3.70 3.62 3.44 3.36 3.80 4.14 4.41 5.30 5.94 6.69 7.37 9.40 10.01
表16示出了本实施方式的光学镜头10的非球面系数，本实施例光学镜头10中非球面的数量为16个，具体如表16所示。
表16第四实施方式的光学镜头10的非球面系数
面号 K A4 A6 A8 A10
S1 1.42E-01 -4.92E-03 1.06E-02 -1.50E-02 1.27E-02
S2 -3.74E+00 -4.85E-02 7.08E-02 -6.90E-02 4.67E-02
S3 -3.19E+00 -6.70E-02 8.96E-02 -8.42E-02 5.61E-02
S4 -8.24E-01 -3.94E-02 6.01E-02 -6.41E-02 4.82E-02
S5 1.08E+00 -1.03E-02 2.45E-02 -2.79E-02 2.04E-02
S6 6.57E+00 -1.35E-03 1.41E-03 -6.35E-03 1.29E-02
S7 0.00E+00 5.28E-04 -6.72E-02 7.46E-02 -4.94E-02
S8 0.00E+00 6.39E-02 -1.56E-01 1.57E-01 -1.04E-01
S9 1.07E+01 7.84E-02 -1.29E-01 1.04E-01 -5.24E-02
S10 -1.11E+01 8.27E-03 -2.81E-02 1.95E-02 -1.07E-02
S11 0.00E+00 1.33E-03 -1.05E-02 3.82E-03 -1.27E-03
S12 -1.69E+01 -3.57E-02 2.89E-03 1.87E-03 -1.52E-03
S13 -5.85E-02 -2.30E-02 -5.33E-03 2.69E-03 -8.96E-04
S14 0.00E+00 2.15E-02 -1.25E-02 2.84E-03 -4.08E-04
S15 -2.39E+00 -5.85E-02 1.46E-02 -2.60E-03 3.48E-04
S16 -1.19E+01 -2.78E-02 6.23E-03 -9.63E-04 9.96E-05
面号 A12 A14 A16 A18 A20
S1 -6.77E-03 2.28E-03 -4.70E-04 5.48E-05 -2.76E-06
S2 -2.14E-02 6.41E-03 -1.20E-03 1.25E-04 -5.54E-06
S3 -2.58E-02 7.95E-03 -1.56E-03 1.72E-04 -8.14E-06
S4 -2.49E-02 8.40E-03 -1.69E-03 1.73E-04 -5.86E-06
S5 -9.53E-03 2.71E-03 -3.72E-04 6.88E-06 2.33E-06
S6 -1.38E-02 8.63E-03 -3.09E-03 5.90E-04 -4.63E-05
S7 1.64E-02 -7.18E-04 -1.33E-03 4.14E-04 -3.99E-05
S8 4.57E-02 -1.30E-02 2.24E-03 -2.00E-04 6.31E-06
S9 1.71E-02 -3.32E-03 2.70E-04 1.48E-05 -3.02E-06
S10 4.67E-03 -1.45E-03 2.86E-04 -3.25E-05 1.62E-06
S11 1.93E-04 2.82E-05 -1.49E-05 1.97E-06 -8.84E-08
S12 4.74E-04 -7.55E-05 6.49E-06 -2.85E-07 4.92E-09
S13 2.03E-04 -2.92E-05 2.55E-06 -1.21E-07 2.37E-09
S14 3.59E-05 -1.58E-06 4.51E-09 2.18E-09 -5.62E-11
S15 -3.16E-05 1.85E-06 -6.68E-08 1.36E-09 -1.19E-11
S16 -6.94E-06 3.21E-07 -9.52E-09 1.66E-10 -1.29E-12
其中，K表示非球面曲线方程式中的锥面系数，A4、A6、A8、A10、A12、A14、A16、A19、A20则表示各表面第4、6、8、10、12、14、16、18、20阶非球面系数。需要说明的是，表格中的各参数为科学计数法表示。例如，-1.07E-01是指-1.07×10 -1；-4.11E-02是指-4.11×10 -2。需要说明的是，本申请中K、A4、A6、A8、A10、A12、A14、A16、A19、A20等符号在后续再次出现时，除非有另外的解释，否则表示的意思与此处相同，后续不再赘述。
通过将上述参数代入至公式：
Figure PCTCN2022126430-appb-000016
即能够设计得到本实施方式的光学镜头10的各个透镜，其中，z为非球面上距离光轴A为r的点，其与相切于非球面光轴A上交点切面的相对距离，r为非球面曲线上的点与光轴A的垂直距离，c为曲率，k为锥面系数，ɑ i为第i阶非球面系数。
本实施方式中，通过上述参数设计得到的光学镜头10的各不同的透镜能够分别起到不同的作用，从而通过各透镜的配合，在大光圈值范围的基础上，得到具有良好背景虚化效果和成像质量及薄型化的光学镜头10。
图16和图17为第四实施方式的光学镜头10的光学性能的表征图。
具体的，图16示出了光学镜头10波长分别为650nm、610nm、555nm、510nm、470nm的光经过第四实施方式的光学镜头10后的轴向色差。图16的纵坐标表示的是归一化光瞳坐标，横坐标表示轴向色差，单位为毫米。从图16中可以看出，本实施方式中，光学镜头10在各个状态下的轴向色差控制在一个很小的范围内。
图17中左图为光学镜头10的场曲示意图，右图为光学镜头10的光学畸变示意图。其中，左图中实线为650nm的光经过光学镜头10后的子午方向的场曲示意图，虚线为650nm的光经过光学镜头10后的弧矢方向的场曲示意图。右图为650nm的光经过第四实施方式的光学镜头10后的光学畸变示意图。两图的纵坐标都是物体角度，左图横坐标表示子午方向(虚线)和弧矢方向(实线)的像散值，单位为毫米。右图表示不同视场对应的光学畸变值，单位为百分比。由图17可见，本实施方式中，光学系统将畸变控制在肉眼不可明显辨识范围内。
本实施方式中提供的光学镜头10，通过各透镜组中各透镜的配置方式和具有特定光学设计的透镜的组合，可以使光学镜头10在大光圈值范围的基础上，具有较好的背景虚化效果和成像效果，同时实现电子设备100的薄型化。
请参阅图18，图18是本申请第五实施方式的摄像模组1的结构示意图。
本实施方式中，光学镜头10包括光阑STO和八片透镜。具体的，光学镜头10包括从物侧至像侧依次排列的光阑STO、第一透镜L1、第二透镜L2、第三透镜L3、第四透镜L4、第五透镜L5、第六透镜L6、第七透镜L7和第八透镜L8。
本实施方式中，光阑STO为可变光圈，光阑STO的光圈值能够在1.2至5.0的范围内(包括1.2和5.0)调节，实现大光圈、小光圈等多个位置特征。通过调整可变光圈的结构尺寸可 以控制光学镜头10的通光量，可以控制摄像模组1的景深，提升背景虚化效果，进而提高图像质量，实现“人像模式”拍照等。
一些实施方式中，光学镜头10的光学总长与光学镜头10的成像面有效像素区域对角线半长度和光学镜头10的入射瞳直径的乘积的比值(TTL/(ImgH×EPD))大于等于0.10，且小于等于1.10。上述限定值保证了光学镜头10的光学总长最够小，成像面大，光圈值变化范围大，有利于光学镜头10小型化及提高成像品质。
一些实施方式中，光阑STO的无穷远物体距离成像面于光轴A上的距离与光学总长的比值(STL/TTL)在0.8至1.5的范围内(包括0.8和1.5)。上述限定值保证了光阑STO可以设于第一透镜L1的物侧，也可以设于任意相邻两个透镜之间。
本实施方式中，第一透镜L1具有正屈折力，第一透镜L1的物侧表面近光轴A处为凸面，从而提供光学镜头10物侧端光线汇聚能力，缩短其总长度，以利于光学镜头10的小型化。第一透镜L1的像侧表面近光轴A处为凹面，能够修正像散。
第二透镜L2具有负屈折力，第二透镜L2的物侧表面近光轴A处为凸面，第二透镜L2的像侧表面近光轴A处为凹面。第二透镜L2有利于平衡第一透镜L1所产生的球差及色差，以降低色偏的产生并使成像更加锐利。
第三透镜L3具有正屈折力，第三透镜L3的物侧表面近光轴A处为凸面，第三透镜L3的像侧表面近光轴A处为凹面。第三透镜L3有利于修正光学镜头10的像差，进一步平衡第一透镜L1所产生的球差及色差。
第四透镜L4具有负屈折力，第四透镜L4的物侧表面近光轴A处为凸面，第四透镜L4的像侧表面近光轴A处为凹面。第四透镜L4有利于修正光学镜头10的像差，平衡第一透镜L1所产生的球差及色差。
本实施方式中，第一透镜L1具有正屈折力，第二透镜L2具有负屈折力，第三透镜L3具有正屈折力，第四透镜L4具有负屈折力。通过限制第一透镜L1至第四透镜L4的屈折力，从而当光圈值为1.2时，通过光阑STO进入透镜的大量光线可以在第一透镜L1至第四透镜L4配合调制下，达到更好的聚光效果，有效提高光学镜头10的成像质量。
第五透镜L5具有正屈折力，第五透镜L5的物侧表面近光轴A处为凹面，第五透镜L5的像侧表面近光轴A处为凸面。第五透镜L5可利于光学镜头10聚光，有效缩短后焦距与光学总长。
第六透镜L6具有负屈折力，第六透镜L6的物侧表面近光轴A处为凸面，第六透镜L6的像侧表面近光轴A处为凹面。第六透镜L6有利于平衡光学镜头10负屈折力的分布，降低其敏感度，并可减少球差。
第七透镜L7具有正屈折力，第七透镜L7的物侧表面近光轴A处为凸面，第七透镜L7的像侧表面近光轴A处为凸面，且离轴处包含至少一个凹面，第七透镜L7有利于光学镜头10的聚光，能有效缩短后焦距与光学总长。
第八透镜L8具有负屈折力，第八透镜L8的物侧表面近光轴A处为凹面，第八透镜L8的像侧表面S16近光轴A处为凹面。第八透镜L8的物侧表面S15离轴处包含至少一个凹面，第八透镜L8的像侧表面S16离轴处包含至少一凸面。第八透镜L8有利于将光学镜头10的主点往被摄物端移动，而可有效缩短后焦距与光学总长，并有助于修正离轴视场的像差。
第八透镜L8的物侧表面及像侧表面都至少包含一反曲点，以修正离轴视场的像差。其中，反曲点为由透镜近光轴A处至离轴处的透镜表面的曲线，该曲线的曲率中心由物侧移至像侧(或由像侧移至物侧)的转换点。第八透镜L8像侧表面至少包含两个临界点，以修正离轴像差。 其中，临界点的定义为透镜表面上，除与光轴的交点外，与一垂直于光轴的切面相切的切点。
本实施方式中，第六透镜L6具有负屈折力，其像侧表面近光轴处为凹面，第七透镜L7具有正屈折力，其物侧表面近光轴处为凸面，第八透镜L8具有负屈折力，其像侧表面近光轴处为凹面。第六透镜L6、第七透镜L7、第八透镜L8配置适当面形，以修正影像周边像差而提升成像品质，并缩短后焦距，有助于摄像模组的小型化。
本实施方式通过不同透镜之间的配合，使得光学镜头10在大光圈值变化范围的情况下，具有较好的成像效果，及实现摄像模组的小型化。
本实施方式中，光学镜头10的透镜的所有表面均为非球面，即第一透镜L1、第二透镜L2、第三透镜L3、第四透镜L4、第五透镜L5、第六透镜L6、第七透镜L7和第八透镜L8的像侧表面和物侧表面均为非球面，非球面配置自由度更高，消除像差效果好，进而缩减光学镜头10总长度，有利于光学镜头10的小型化。
本实施方式中，光学镜头10的所有透镜中折射率最大的透镜的折射率(Nmax)为1.67，所有透镜中折射率最小的透镜的折射率(Nmin)为1.54。上述限定值保证了透镜可以采用的材质均为树脂材质，树脂材质与玻璃材质相比成型性高，可制造性强，且可以有效降低生产成本。通过对透镜进行不同材质的合理配置，有利于实现光学镜头10的小型化，及提高光学镜头10的成像效果。
一些实施方式中，第一透镜L1(N1)大于等于1.40，且小于等于2.0；第三透镜L3、第五透镜L5、第七透镜L7和第八透镜L8的折射率(N3、N5、N7、N8)大于等于1.50，且小于等于1.55；第二透镜L2和第四透镜L4的折射率(N2、N4)大于等于1.65，且小于等于1.70；第六透镜L6的折射率(N6)大于等于1.57，且小于等于1.58。也就是说，第一透镜L1选择低折射材料、中折射率材料、较高折射材料或非常高折射材料，第三透镜L3、第五透镜L5、第七透镜L7和第八透镜L8选择低折射率材料，第二透镜L2、第四透镜L4选择较高折射率材料，第六透镜L6选择中折射率材料。上述限定值能保证光学镜头10在大范围光圈值的基础上，光学镜头10的成像效果好。
所有透镜中色散系数最大的透镜的色散系数(Vmax)为56；所有透镜中色散系数最小的透镜的色散系数(Vmin)为19.5。上述限定值保证了光学镜头10消除色差的能力，提升光学镜头10的成像品质。
一些实施方式中，第一透镜L1的色散系数(V1)大于等于30，且小于等于90；第三透镜L3、第五透镜L5、第七透镜L7和第八透镜L8的色散系数(V3、V5、V7、V8)大于等于52，且小于等于60；第二透镜L2和第四透镜L4的色散系数(V2、V4)大于等于15，且小于等于21；第六透镜L6的色散系数(V6)大于等于35，且小于等于40。也就是说，第一透镜L1选择低色散系数或者中色散系数材料或较高高色散系数材料或非常高色散系数，第三透镜L3、第五透镜L5、第七透镜L7和第八透镜L8选择较高色散系数材料，第二透镜L2、第四透镜L4选择低色散系数材料，第六透镜L6选择中色散系数材料。上述限定值能保证光学镜头10在大范围光圈值的基础上，光学镜头10的成像效果好。
第一透镜L1至第四透镜L4的焦距倒数加和(1/f1+1/f2+1/f3+1/f4)为0.123；上述限定值保证了，当光圈值为1.2时，通过光阑STO进入透镜的大量光线可以在第一透镜L1至第四透镜L4配合调制下，达到更好的聚光效果，有效提高光学镜头10的成像质量。
第一透镜L1、第三透镜L3、第五透镜L5和第七透镜L7的焦距倒数加和(1/f1+1/f3+1/f5+1/f7)为0.321，上述限定值有利于修正光学镜头10的像差，平衡第一透镜L1产生的球差和色差，提高光学镜头10的成像效果。
光学镜头10的焦距与各个透镜的焦距的比值(|EFL/fi|)为1.4；第一透镜L1的焦距与其他各个透镜的焦距的比值(|f1/fi|)为1.7；第四透镜L4的焦距与其他各个透镜的焦距的比值(|f4/fi|)为5.5；上述限定值保证了光学镜头10在大光圈的场景下具有很好的成像品质。
第一透镜L1物侧表面的曲率半径为R1，第一透镜L1像侧表面的曲率半径为R2，第二透镜L2物侧表面的曲率半径为R3，第二透镜L2像侧表面的曲率半径为R4，第三透镜L3物侧表面的曲率半径为R5，第三透镜L3像侧表面的曲率半径为R6，第四透镜L4物侧表面的曲率半径为R7，第四透镜L4像侧表面的曲率半径为R8,第五透镜L5物侧表面的曲率半径为R9，第五透镜L5像侧表面的曲率半径为R10，第六透镜L6物侧表面的曲率半径为R11，第六透镜L6像侧表面的曲率半径为R12，第七透镜L7物侧表面的曲率半径为R13，第七透镜L7像侧表面的曲率半径为R14，第八透镜L8物侧表面的曲率半径为R15，第八透镜L8像侧表面的曲率半径为R16。其中，|R1/R2|＝0.44，|R3/R4|＝1.36，|R5/R6|＝0.50，|R7/R8|＝1.24，|R9/R10|＝1.06，|R11/R12|＝2.16，|R13/R14|＝0.01，|R15/R16|＝7.51。上述限定值保证了光学镜头10能够得到更好的成像效果。
光学镜头10满足R1，R2，R3，R4，R5，R6均大于0；R7，R8中至少有一个大于0。通过限制R1、R2、R3、R4、R5、R6均大于0，且R7、R8中至少有一个大于0，以使光学镜头10能够得到更好的成像效果。
第一透镜L1至第八透镜L8中各透镜于光轴A上厚度的最大值与第一透镜L1至第八透镜L8中各透镜于光轴A上厚度的最小值的比值(CTmax/CTmin)为3.16；第一透镜L1至第八透镜L8中任意相邻两个透镜间隔的最大值与第一透镜L1至第八透镜L8中任意相邻两个透镜间隔的最小值的比值(Tmin/Tmax)为0.064；第三透镜L3物侧表面至第五透镜L5的像侧表面于光轴A上的距离与光学总长的比值(Dr5r10/TTL)为0.24；所有透镜的物侧表面或像侧表面的通光孔最大值与所有透镜的物侧表面或像侧表面的通光孔最小值的比值(Dmax/Dmin)为2.93；第一透镜L1至第八透镜L8中任意相邻两个透镜间隔的最大值与第一透镜L1至第八透镜L8中各透镜于光轴A上厚度的最大值的比值(Tmax/CTmax)为1.319；上述限定值保证了光学镜头10的小型化。
入射瞳直径与所有透镜的物侧表面或像侧表面的通光孔最大值的比值(EPD/Dmax)在0.25至1.35的范围内(包括0.25和1.35)；入射瞳直径与第三透镜L3的物侧表面至第五透镜L5的像侧表面于光轴A上的距离的比值(EPD/Dr5r10)在0.55至3.15的范围内(包括0.55和3.15)；上述限定值保证了光学镜头10的小型化，且可变光圈的光圈值变化范围大。
第一透镜L1于光轴A上的厚度与第二透镜L2至第八透镜L8中各透镜于光轴A上厚度的最大值的比值(MaxCT1/MaxCT2L)为1.55；上述限定值保证了光学镜头10可以通过不同材质透镜的合理配置，有利于光学镜头10的小型化和可制造性。
第一透镜L1与第二透镜L2于光轴A上的间隔距离为T12，第二透镜L2与第三透镜L3于光轴A上的间隔距离为T23，第三透镜L3与第四透镜L4于光轴A上的间隔距离为T34，第四透镜L4与第五透镜L5于光轴A上的间隔距离为T45，第五透镜L5与第六透镜L6于光轴A上的间隔距离为T56，第六透镜L6与第七透镜L7于光轴A上的间隔距离为T67，第七透镜L7与第八透镜L8于光轴A上的间隔距离为T78，第八透镜L8像侧表面至成像面于光轴A上的距离为BL，Tmax第一透镜L1至第八透镜L8中任意相邻两个透镜间隔的最大值。其中，Tmax/T12＝15.6，Tmax/T23＝8.9，Tmax/T34＝2.5，Tmax/T45＝14.4，Tmax/T56＝2.6，Tmax/T67＝5.0，Tmax/BL＝1.1。上述限定值保证了光学镜头10的小型化。
本实施方式通过不同透镜之间的配合，大范围光圈值的基础上，使得光学镜头10具有较 好的成像效果，同时实现电子设备100的薄型化。
可以理解的是，上述对光学镜头的不同参数的不同限制可以彼此独立存在，也可以相互结合。当上述所有限定值彼此结合时，光学镜头更薄或能够获得更好的成像质量。
依据上文的关系式，本申请第五实施方式的摄像模组1的基本参数如下表17。
表17第五实施方式的光学镜头10工作状态时的基本参数
Figure PCTCN2022126430-appb-000017
本申请第五实施方式的摄像模组1各个组成的详细结构数据如下表18。
表18摄像模组1各个组成的详细结构数据
Figure PCTCN2022126430-appb-000018
表19示出了本实施方式的光学镜头10的各个透镜的物侧表面和像侧表面的通光孔径，具体如表19所示。
表19第五实施方式的光学镜头10的各个透镜的通光孔径
面号 S1 S2 S3 S4 S5 S6 S7 S8 S9 S10 S11 S12 S13 S14 S15 S16
孔径 4.20 4.36 3.98 3.62 3.55 3.36 3.30 3.73 4.10 4.31 5.12 5.89 6.50 7.25 8.89 9.68
表20示出了本实施方式的光学镜头10的非球面系数，本实施例光学镜头10中非球面的数量为16个，具体如表20所示。
表20第五实施方式的光学镜头10的非球面系数
面号 K A4 A6 A8 A10
S1 1.19E-01 -4.33E-03 9.62E-03 -1.46E-02 1.34E-02
S2 -4.62E+00 -5.12E-02 8.00E-02 -8.37E-02 6.00E-02
S3 -3.14E+00 -7.34E-02 1.10E-01 -1.14E-01 8.16E-02
S4 -5.79E-01 -4.37E-02 7.21E-02 -7.69E-02 5.39E-02
S5 1.42E+00 -1.21E-02 2.43E-02 -1.81E-02 1.50E-03
S6 1.08E+01 -1.18E-03 1.43E-03 -6.74E-03 1.41E-02
S7 0.00E+00 4.10E-03 -7.88E-02 9.51E-02 -7.04E-02
S8 0.00E+00 7.56E-02 -1.93E-01 2.08E-01 -1.45E-01
S9 1.31E+01 9.50E-02 -1.81E-01 1.71E-01 -1.01E-01
S10 1.24E+00 1.16E-02 -3.47E-02 1.96E-02 -6.27E-03
S11 0.00E+00 1.30E-02 -2.53E-02 1.27E-02 -4.93E-03
S12 -1.38E+01 -3.00E-02 -4.96E-03 5.79E-03 -2.94E-03
S13 -4.18E-02 -2.50E-02 -3.62E-03 9.37E-04 -1.94E-04
S14 0.00E+00 2.16E-02 -1.09E-02 1.73E-03 -6.83E-05
S15 9.90E+00 -6.90E-02 1.97E-02 -3.87E-03 5.29E-04
S16 -1.16E+01 -3.20E-02 8.04E-03 -1.40E-03 1.64E-04
面号 A12 A14 A16 A18 A20
S1 -7.76E-03 2.83E-03 -6.29E-04 7.86E-05 -4.23E-06
S2 -2.89E-02 9.10E-03 -1.78E-03 1.94E-04 -8.94E-06
S3 -3.94E-02 1.26E-02 -2.51E-03 2.81E-04 -1.33E-05
S4 -2.42E-02 6.49E-03 -8.14E-04 -1.20E-05 9.54E-06
S5 8.23E-03 -6.74E-03 2.56E-03 -4.93E-04 3.84E-05
S6 -1.54E-02 9.82E-03 -3.58E-03 6.99E-04 -5.59E-05
S7 2.81E-02 -4.19E-03 -8.96E-04 4.24E-04 -4.54E-05
S8 6.65E-02 -1.95E-02 3.48E-03 -3.34E-04 1.27E-05
S9 3.91E-02 -9.69E-03 1.41E-03 -9.91E-05 1.86E-06
S10 1.28E-03 -2.01E-04 3.04E-05 -4.58E-06 3.79E-07
S11 1.28E-03 -1.86E-04 1.02E-05 4.31E-07 -5.11E-08
S12 8.87E-04 -1.55E-04 1.54E-05 -8.19E-07 1.80E-08
S13 6.05E-05 -1.33E-05 1.56E-06 -9.07E-08 2.05E-09
S14 -2.10E-05 3.99E-06 -3.13E-07 1.19E-08 -1.79E-10
S15 -4.78E-05 2.76E-06 -9.85E-08 1.98E-09 -1.72E-11
S16 -1.31E-05 7.00E-07 -2.41E-08 4.81E-10 -4.24E-12
其中，K表示非球面曲线方程式中的锥面系数，A4、A6、A8、A10、A12、A14、A16、A19、A20则表示各表面第4、6、8、10、12、14、16、18、20阶非球面系数。需要说明的是，表格中的各参数为科学计数法表示。例如，-1.07E-01是指-1.07×10 -1；-4.11E-02是指-4.11×10 -2。需要说明的是，本申请中K、A4、A6、A8、A10、A12、A14、A16、A19、A20等符号在后续再次出现时，除非有另外的解释，否则表示的意思与此处相同，后续不再赘述。
通过将上述参数代入至公式：
Figure PCTCN2022126430-appb-000019
即能够设计得到本实施方式的光学镜头10的各个透镜，其中，z为非球面上距离光轴A为r的点，其与相切于非球面光轴A上交点切面的相对距离，r为非球面曲线上的点与光轴A的垂直距离，c为曲率，k为锥面系数，ɑ i为第i阶非球面系数。
本实施方式中，通过上述参数设计得到的光学镜头10的各不同的透镜能够分别起到不同的作用，从而通过各透镜的配合，在大光圈值范围的基础上，得到具有良好背景虚化效果和成像质量及薄型化的光学镜头10。
图19和图20为第五实施方式的光学镜头10的光学性能的表征图。
具体的，图19示出了光学镜头10波长分别为650nm、610nm、555nm、510nm、470nm的光经过第五实施方式的光学镜头10后的轴向色差。图19的纵坐标表示的是归一化光瞳坐标，横坐标表示轴向色差，单位为毫米。从图19中可以看出，本实施方式中，光学镜头10在各个状态下的轴向色差控制在一个很小的范围内。
图20中左图为光学镜头10的场曲示意图，右图为光学镜头10的光学畸变示意图。其中，左图中实线为650nm的光经过光学镜头10后的子午方向的场曲示意图，虚线为650nm的光经过光学镜头10后的弧矢方向的场曲示意图。右图为650nm的光经过第五实施方式的光学镜头10后的光学畸变示意图。两图的纵坐标都是物体角度，左图横坐标表示子午方向(虚线)和弧矢方向(实线)的像散值，单位为毫米。右图表示不同视场对应的光学畸变值，单位为百分比。由图20可见，本实施方式中，光学系统将畸变控制在肉眼不可明显辨识范围内。
本实施方式中提供的光学镜头10，通过各透镜组中各透镜的配置方式和具有特定光学设计的透镜的组合，可以使光学镜头10在大光圈值范围的基础上，具有较好的背景虚化效果和成像效果，同时实现电子设备100的薄型化。
请参阅图21，图21是本申请第六实施方式的摄像模组1的结构示意图。
本实施方式中，光学镜头10包括光阑STO和八片透镜。具体的，光学镜头10包括从物侧至像侧依次排列的光阑STO、第一透镜L1、第二透镜L2、第三透镜L3、第四透镜L4、第五透镜L5、第六透镜L6、第七透镜L7和第八透镜L8。
本实施方式中，光阑STO为可变光圈，光阑STO的光圈值能够在1.2至5.0的范围内(包括1.2和5.0)调节，实现大光圈、小光圈等多个位置特征。通过调整可变光圈的结构尺寸可以控制光学镜头10的通光量，可以控制摄像模组1的景深，提升背景虚化效果，进而提高图像质量，实现“人像模式”拍照等。
一些实施方式中，光学镜头10的光学总长与光学镜头10的成像面有效像素区域对角线半长度和光学镜头10的入射瞳直径的乘积的比值(TTL/(ImgH×EPD))大于等于0.10，且小于等于1.10。上述限定值保证了光学镜头10的光学总长最够小，成像面大，光圈值变化范围大，有利于光学镜头10小型化及提高成像品质。
一些实施方式中，光阑STO的无穷远物体距离成像面于光轴A上的距离与光学总长的比值(STL/TTL)在0.8至1.5的范围内(包括0.8和1.5)。上述限定值保证了光阑STO可以设于第一透镜L1的物侧，也可以设于任意相邻两个透镜之间。
本实施方式中，第一透镜L1具有正屈折力，第一透镜L1的物侧表面近光轴A处为凸面，从而提供光学镜头10物侧端光线汇聚能力，缩短其总长度，以利于光学镜头10的小型化。第一透镜L1的像侧表面近光轴A处为凹面，能够修正像散。
第二透镜L2具有正屈折力，第二透镜L2的物侧表面近光轴A处为凸面，第二透镜L2的像侧表面近光轴A处为凹面。第二透镜L2有利于平衡第一透镜L1所产生的球差及色差，以降低色偏的产生并使成像更加锐利。
第三透镜L3具有正屈折力，第三透镜L3的物侧表面近光轴A处为凸面，第三透镜L3的像侧表面近光轴A处为凹面。第三透镜L3有利于修正光学镜头10的像差，进一步平衡第一透镜L1所产生的球差及色差。
第四透镜L4具有负屈折力，第四透镜L4的物侧表面近光轴A处为凸面，第四透镜L4的像侧表面近光轴A处为凹面。第四透镜L4有利于修正光学镜头10的像差，平衡第一透镜L1所产生的球差及色差。
本实施方式中，第一透镜L1具有正屈折力，第二透镜L2具有正屈折力，第三透镜L3具有正屈折力，第四透镜L4具有负屈折力。通过限制第一透镜L1至第四透镜L4的屈折力，从而当光圈值为1.2时，通过光阑STO进入透镜的大量光线可以在第一透镜L1至第四透镜L4配合调制下，达到更好的聚光效果，有效提高光学镜头10的成像质量。
第五透镜L5具有正屈折力，第五透镜L5的物侧表面近光轴A处为凹面，第五透镜L5的像侧表面近光轴A处为凸面。第五透镜L5可利于光学镜头10聚光，有效缩短后焦距与光学总长。
第六透镜L6具有负屈折力，第六透镜L6的物侧表面近光轴A处为凸面，第六透镜L6的像侧表面近光轴A处为凹面。第六透镜L6有利于平衡光学镜头10负屈折力的分布，降低其敏感度，并可减少球差。
第七透镜L7具有正屈折力，第七透镜L7的物侧表面近光轴A处为凸面，第七透镜L7的像侧表面近光轴A处为凸面，且离轴处包含至少一个凹面，第七透镜L7有利于光学镜头10的聚光，能有效缩短后焦距与光学总长。
第八透镜L8具有负屈折力，第八透镜L8的物侧表面近光轴A处为凹面，第八透镜L8的像侧表面S16近光轴A处为凹面。第八透镜L8的物侧表面S15离轴处包含至少一个凹面，第八透镜L8的像侧表面S16离轴处包含至少一凸面。第八透镜L8有利于将光学镜头10的主点往被摄物端移动，而可有效缩短后焦距与光学总长，并有助于修正离轴视场的像差。
第八透镜L8的物侧表面及像侧表面都至少包含一反曲点，以修正离轴视场的像差。其中，反曲点为由透镜近光轴A处至离轴处的透镜表面的曲线，该曲线的曲率中心由物侧移至像侧(或由像侧移至物侧)的转换点。第八透镜L8像侧表面至少包含两个临界点，以修正离轴像差。其中，临界点的定义为透镜表面上，除与光轴的交点外，与一垂直于光轴的切面相切的切点。
本实施方式中，第六透镜L6具有负屈折力，其像侧表面近光轴处为凹面，第七透镜L7具有正屈折力，其物侧表面近光轴处为凸面，第八透镜L8具有负屈折力，其像侧表面近光轴处为凹面。第六透镜L6、第七透镜L7、第八透镜L8配置适当面形，以修正影像周边像差而提升成像品质，并缩短后焦距，有助于摄像模组的小型化。
本实施方式通过不同透镜之间的配合，使得光学镜头10在大光圈值变化范围的情况下，具有较好的成像效果，及实现摄像模组的小型化。
本实施方式中，光学镜头10的透镜的所有表面均为非球面，即第一透镜L1、第二透镜L2、第三透镜L3、第四透镜L4、第五透镜L5、第六透镜L6、第七透镜L7和第八透镜L8的像侧表面和物侧表面均为非球面，非球面配置自由度更高，消除像差效果好，进而缩减光学镜头10总长度，有利于光学镜头10的小型化。
本实施方式中，光学镜头10的所有透镜中折射率最大的透镜的折射率(Nmax)为1.68， 所有透镜中折射率最小的透镜的折射率(Nmin)为1.50。上述限定值保证了透镜可以采用的材质为树脂材质或玻璃材质。通过对透镜进行不同材质的合理配置，有利于实现光学镜头10的小型化，及提高光学镜头10的成像效果。
一些实施方式中，第一透镜L1(N1)大于等于1.40，且小于等于2.0；第三透镜L3、第五透镜L5、第七透镜L7和第八透镜L8的折射率(N3、N5、N7、N8)大于等于1.50，且小于等于1.55；第二透镜L2和第四透镜L4的折射率(N2、N4)大于等于1.65，且小于等于1.70；第六透镜L6的折射率(N6)大于等于1.57，且小于等于1.58。也就是说，第一透镜L1选择低折射材料、中折射率材料、较高折射材料或非常高折射材料，第三透镜L3、第五透镜L5、第七透镜L7和第八透镜L8选择低折射率材料，第二透镜L2、第四透镜L4选择较高折射率材料，第六透镜L6选择中折射率材料。上述限定值能保证光学镜头10在大范围光圈值的基础上，光学镜头10的成像效果好。
所有透镜中色散系数最大的透镜的色散系数(Vmax)为81.00；所有透镜中色散系数最小的透镜的色散系数(Vmin)为19.5。上述限定值保证了光学镜头10消除色差的能力，提升光学镜头10的成像品质。
一些实施方式中，第一透镜L1的色散系数(V1)大于等于30，且小于等于90；第三透镜L3、第五透镜L5、第七透镜L7和第八透镜L8的色散系数(V3、V5、V7、V8)大于等于52，且小于等于60；第二透镜L2和第四透镜L4的色散系数(V2、V4)大于等于15，且小于等于21；第六透镜L6的色散系数(V6)大于等于35，且小于等于40。也就是说，第一透镜L1选择低色散系数或者中色散系数材料或较高高色散系数材料或非常高色散系数，第三透镜L3、第五透镜L5、第七透镜L7和第八透镜L8选择较高色散系数材料，第二透镜L2、第四透镜L4选择低色散系数材料，第六透镜L6选择中色散系数材料。上述限定值能保证光学镜头10在大范围光圈值的基础上，光学镜头10的成像效果好。
第一透镜L1至第四透镜L4的焦距倒数加和(1/f1+1/f2+1/f3+1/f4)为0.11；上述限定值保证了，当光圈值为1.2时，通过光阑STO进入透镜的大量光线可以在第一透镜L1至第四透镜L4配合调制下，达到更好的聚光效果，有效提高光学镜头10的成像质量。
第一透镜L1、第三透镜L3、第五透镜L5和第七透镜L7的焦距倒数加和(1/f1+1/f3+1/f5+1/f7)为0.32，上述限定值有利于修正光学镜头10的像差，平衡第一透镜L1产生的球差和色差，提高光学镜头10的成像效果。
光学镜头10的焦距与各个透镜的焦距的比值(|EFL/fi|)为1.34；第一透镜L1的焦距与其他各个透镜的焦距的比值(|f1/fi|)为2.61；第四透镜L4的焦距与其他各个透镜的焦距的比值(|f4/fi|)为0.05；上述限定值保证了光学镜头10在大光圈的场景下具有很好的成像品质。
第一透镜L1物侧表面的曲率半径为R1，第一透镜L1像侧表面的曲率半径为R2，第二透镜L2物侧表面的曲率半径为R3，第二透镜L2像侧表面的曲率半径为R4，第三透镜L3物侧表面的曲率半径为R5，第三透镜L3像侧表面的曲率半径为R6，第四透镜L4物侧表面的曲率半径为R7，第四透镜L4像侧表面的曲率半径为R8,第五透镜L5物侧表面的曲率半径为R9，第五透镜L5像侧表面的曲率半径为R10，第六透镜L6物侧表面的曲率半径为R11，第六透镜L6像侧表面的曲率半径为R12，第七透镜L7物侧表面的曲率半径为R13，第七透镜L7像侧表面的曲率半径为R14，第八透镜L8物侧表面的曲率半径为R15，第八透镜L8像侧表面的曲率半径为R16。其中，|R1/R2|＝0.60，|R3/R4|＝1.03，|R5/R6|＝0.56，|R7/R8|＝11.11，|R9/R10|＝1.64，|R11/R12|＝2.88，|R13/R14|＝0.31，|R15/R16|＝7.76。上述限定值保证了光学镜头10能够得到更好的成像效果。
光学镜头10满足R1，R2，R3，R4，R5，R6均大于0；R7，R8中至少有一个大于0。通过限制R1、R2、R3、R4、R5、R6均大于0，且R7、R8中至少有一个大于0，以使光学镜头10能够得到更好的成像效果。
第一透镜L1至第八透镜L8中各透镜于光轴A上厚度的最大值与第一透镜L1至第八透镜L8中各透镜于光轴A上厚度的最小值的比值(CTmax/CTmin)为3.30；第一透镜L1至第八透镜L8中任意相邻两个透镜间隔的最大值与第一透镜L1至第八透镜L8中任意相邻两个透镜间隔的最小值的比值(Tmin/Tmax)为0.080；第三透镜L3物侧表面至第五透镜L5的像侧表面于光轴A上的距离与光学总长的比值(Dr5r10/TTL)为0.27；所有透镜的物侧表面或像侧表面的通光孔最大值与所有透镜的物侧表面或像侧表面的通光孔最小值的比值(Dmax/Dmin)为2.82；第一透镜L1至第八透镜L8中任意相邻两个透镜间隔的最大值与第一透镜L1至第八透镜L8中各透镜于光轴A上厚度的最大值的比值(Tmax/CTmax)为1.00；上述限定值保证了光学镜头10的小型化。
入射瞳直径与所有透镜的物侧表面或像侧表面的通光孔最大值的比值(EPD/Dmax)在0.25至1.35的范围内(包括0.25和1.35)；入射瞳直径与第三透镜L3的物侧表面至第五透镜L5的像侧表面于光轴A上的距离的比值(EPD/Dr5r10)在0.55至3.15的范围内(包括0.55和3.15)；上述限定值保证了光学镜头10的小型化，且可变光圈的光圈值变化范围大。
第一透镜L1于光轴A上的厚度与第二透镜L2至第八透镜L8中各透镜于光轴A上厚度的最大值的比值(MaxCT1/MaxCT2L)为1.58；上述限定值保证了光学镜头10可以通过不同材质透镜的合理配置，有利于光学镜头10的小型化和可制造性。
第一透镜L1与第二透镜L2于光轴A上的间隔距离为T12，第二透镜L2与第三透镜L3于光轴A上的间隔距离为T23，第三透镜L3与第四透镜L4于光轴A上的间隔距离为T34，第四透镜L4与第五透镜L5于光轴A上的间隔距离为T45，第五透镜L5与第六透镜L6于光轴A上的间隔距离为T56，第六透镜L6与第七透镜L7于光轴A上的间隔距离为T67，第七透镜L7与第八透镜L8于光轴A上的间隔距离为T78，第八透镜L8像侧表面至成像面于光轴A上的距离为BL，Tmax第一透镜L1至第八透镜L8中任意相邻两个透镜间隔的最大值。其中，Tmax/T12＝41.63，Tmax/T23＝6.24，Tmax/T34＝1.64，Tmax/T45＝13.92，Tmax/T56＝2.74，Tmax/T67＝3.37，Tmax/BL＝0.75。上述限定值保证了光学镜头10的小型化。
本实施方式通过不同透镜之间的配合，大范围光圈值的基础上，使得光学镜头10具有较好的成像效果，同时实现电子设备100的薄型化。
可以理解的是，上述对光学镜头的不同参数的不同限制可以彼此独立存在，也可以相互结合。当上述所有限定值彼此结合时，光学镜头更薄或能够获得更好的成像质量。
依据上文的关系式，本申请第六实施方式的摄像模组1的基本参数如下表21。
表21第六实施方式的光学镜头10工作状态时的基本参数
Figure PCTCN2022126430-appb-000020
本申请第六实施方式的摄像模组1各个组成的详细结构数据如下表22。
表22摄像模组1各个组成的详细结构数据
Figure PCTCN2022126430-appb-000021
Figure PCTCN2022126430-appb-000022
表23示出了本实施方式的光学镜头10的各个透镜的物侧表面和像侧表面的通光孔径，具体如表23所示。
表23第六实施方式的光学镜头10的各个透镜的通光孔径
面号 S1 S2 S3 S4 S5 S6 S7 S8 S9 S10 S11 S12 S13 S14 S15 S16
孔径 4.38 4.27 4.12 3.75 3.69 3.40 3.53 4.05 4.40 4.70 5.58 6.35 6.99 7.70 8.88 9.58
表24示出了本实施方式的光学镜头10的非球面系数，本实施例光学镜头10中非球面的数量为16个，具体如表24所示。
表24第六实施方式的光学镜头10的非球面系数
面号 K A4 A6 A8 A10
S1 1.26E-01 -3.65E-03 9.78E-03 -1.41E-02 1.21E-02
S2 -7.97E+00 -6.34E-02 8.86E-02 -7.44E-02 3.99E-02
S3 -3.63E+00 -5.81E-02 7.55E-02 -6.41E-02 3.48E-02
S4 -7.65E-01 -1.07E-02 6.72E-04 1.28E-02 -2.22E-02
S5 -5.94E-01 -4.74E-04 -1.59E-03 9.72E-03 -1.65E-02
S6 7.40E+00 -1.26E-03 1.03E-03 -5.19E-03 9.88E-03
S7 0.00E+00 -1.05E-02 -2.89E-02 3.04E-02 -2.34E-02
S8 0.00E+00 4.08E-02 -9.55E-02 9.17E-02 -5.93E-02
S9 -5.73E+01 5.72E-02 -9.34E-02 7.84E-02 -4.28E-02
S10 2.58E-01 1.34E-02 -3.00E-02 1.88E-02 -9.14E-03
S11 6.07E+01 3.13E-03 -1.07E-02 5.27E-03 -2.35E-03
S12 -2.51E+00 -4.48E-02 7.84E-03 1.09E-03 -1.57E-03
S13 5.92E-03 -2.15E-02 -4.09E-03 2.45E-03 -9.35E-04
S14 0.00E+00 2.77E-02 -1.20E-02 2.47E-03 -3.29E-04
S15 6.19E+00 -6.32E-02 1.64E-02 -3.42E-03 7.30E-04
S16 -9.16E+00 -3.27E-02 8.41E-03 -1.53E-03 1.87E-04
面号 A12 A14 A16 A18 A20
S1 -6.51E-03 2.21E-03 -4.65E-04 5.50E-05 -2.82E-06
S2 -1.32E-02 2.46E-03 -1.76E-04 -1.22E-05 1.98E-06
S3 -1.16E-02 2.09E-03 -1.14E-04 -2.07E-05 2.65E-06
S4 1.91E-02 -9.59E-03 2.86E-03 -4.70E-04 3.28E-05
S5 1.47E-02 -7.58E-03 2.31E-03 -3.86E-04 2.70E-05
S6 -9.96E-03 5.85E-03 -1.97E-03 3.55E-04 -2.62E-05
S7 1.09E-02 -3.06E-03 4.66E-04 -2.79E-05 -1.57E-07
S8 2.56E-02 -7.23E-03 1.27E-03 -1.25E-04 5.21E-06
S9 1.57E-02 -3.85E-03 5.96E-04 -5.22E-05 1.96E-06
S10 3.39E-03 -8.69E-04 1.41E-04 -1.33E-05 5.59E-07
S11 6.65E-04 -1.03E-04 7.51E-06 -1.26E-07 -6.88E-09
S12 5.44E-04 -9.45E-05 9.05E-06 -4.57E-07 9.56E-09
S13 2.37E-04 -4.00E-05 4.40E-06 -2.97E-07 1.11E-08
S14 2.35E-05 -8.06E-08 -1.12E-07 7.07E-09 -1.41E-10
S15 -1.49E-04 2.48E-05 -2.98E-06 2.51E-07 -1.45E-08
S16 -1.28E-05 -8.85E-08 1.26E-07 -1.47E-08 9.51E-10
面号 A22 A24 A26 A28  
S1 0 0 0 0  
S2 0.00E+00 0.00E+00 0.00E+00 0.00E+00  
S3 0.00E+00 0.00E+00 0.00E+00 0.00E+00  
S4 0.00E+00 0.00E+00 0.00E+00 0.00E+00  
S5 0.00E+00 0.00E+00 0.00E+00 0.00E+00  
S6 0.00E+00 0.00E+00 0.00E+00 0.00E+00  
S7 0.00E+00 0.00E+00 0.00E+00 0.00E+00  
S8 0.00E+00 0.00E+00 0.00E+00 0.00E+00  
S9 0.00E+00 0.00E+00 0.00E+00 0.00E+00  
S10 0.00E+00 0.00E+00 0.00E+00 0.00E+00  
S11 0.00E+00 0.00E+00 0.00E+00 0.00E+00  
S12 0.00E+00 0.00E+00 0.00E+00 0.00E+00  
S13 -1.75E-10 0.00E+00 0.00E+00 0.00E+00  
S14 0.00E+00 0.00E+00 0.00E+00 0.00E+00  
S15 5.66E-10 -1.42E-11 2.07E-13 -1.33E-15  
S16 -3.88E-11 9.91E-13 -1.45E-14 9.31E-17  
其中，K表示非球面曲线方程式中的锥面系数，A4、A6、A8、A10、A12、A14、A16、A19、A20、A22、A24、A26、A28则表示各表面第4、6、8、10、12、14、16、18、20、22、 24、26、28阶非球面系数。需要说明的是，表格中的各参数为科学计数法表示。例如，-1.07E-01是指-1.07×10 -1；-4.11E-02是指-4.11×10 -2。需要说明的是，本申请中K、A4、A6、A8、A10、A12、A14、A16、A19、A20、A22、A24、A26、A28等符号在后续再次出现时，除非有另外的解释，否则表示的意思与此处相同，后续不再赘述。
通过将上述参数代入至公式：
Figure PCTCN2022126430-appb-000023
即能够设计得到本实施方式的光学镜头10的各个透镜，其中，z为非球面上距离光轴A为r的点，其与相切于非球面光轴A上交点切面的相对距离，r为非球面曲线上的点与光轴A的垂直距离，c为曲率，k为锥面系数，ɑ i为第i阶非球面系数。
本实施方式中，通过上述参数设计得到的光学镜头10的各不同的透镜能够分别起到不同的作用，从而通过各透镜的配合，在大光圈值范围的基础上，得到具有良好背景虚化效果和成像质量及薄型化的光学镜头10。
图22和图23为第六实施方式的光学镜头10的光学性能的表征图。
具体的，图22示出了光学镜头10波长分别为650nm、610nm、555nm、510nm、470nm的光经过第六实施方式的光学镜头10后的轴向色差。图22的纵坐标表示的是归一化光瞳坐标，横坐标表示轴向色差，单位为毫米。从图22中可以看出，本实施方式中，光学镜头10在各个状态下的轴向色差控制在一个很小的范围内。
图23中左图为光学镜头10的场曲示意图，右图为光学镜头10的光学畸变示意图。其中，左图中实线为650nm的光经过光学镜头10后的子午方向的场曲示意图，虚线为650nm的光经过光学镜头10后的弧矢方向的场曲示意图。右图为650nm的光经过第六实施方式的光学镜头10后的光学畸变示意图。两图的纵坐标都是物体角度，左图横坐标表示子午方向(虚线)和弧矢方向(实线)的像散值，单位为毫米。右图表示不同视场对应的光学畸变值，单位为百分比。由图23可见，本实施方式中，光学系统将畸变控制在肉眼不可明显辨识范围内。
本实施方式中提供的光学镜头10，通过各透镜组中各透镜的配置方式和具有特定光学设计的透镜的组合，可以使光学镜头10在大光圈值范围的基础上，具有较好的背景虚化效果和成像效果，同时实现电子设备100的薄型化。
请参阅图24，图24是本申请第七实施方式的摄像模组1的结构示意图。
本实施方式中，光学镜头10包括光阑STO和八片透镜。具体的，光学镜头10包括从物侧至像侧依次排列的光阑STO、第一透镜L1、第二透镜L2、第三透镜L3、第四透镜L4、第五透镜L5、第六透镜L6、第七透镜L7和第八透镜L8。
本实施方式中，光阑STO为可变光圈，光阑STO的光圈值能够在1.2至5.0的范围内(包括1.2和5.0)调节，实现大光圈、小光圈等多个位置特征。通过调整可变光圈的结构尺寸可以控制光学镜头10的通光量，可以控制摄像模组1的景深，提升背景虚化效果，进而提高图像质量，实现“人像模式”拍照等。
一些实施方式中，光学镜头10的光学总长与光学镜头10的成像面有效像素区域对角线半长度和光学镜头10的入射瞳直径的乘积的比值(TTL/(ImgH×EPD))大于等于0.10，且小于等于1.10。上述限定值保证了光学镜头10的光学总长最够小，成像面大，光圈值变化范围大，有利于光学镜头10小型化及提高成像品质。
一些实施方式中，光阑STO的无穷远物体距离成像面于光轴A上的距离与光学总长的比 值(STL/TTL)在0.8至1.5的范围内(包括0.8和1.5)。上述限定值保证了光阑STO可以设于第一透镜L1的物侧，也可以设于任意相邻两个透镜之间。
本实施方式中，第一透镜L1具有正屈折力，第一透镜L1的物侧表面近光轴A处为凸面，从而提供光学镜头10物侧端光线汇聚能力，缩短其总长度，以利于光学镜头10的小型化。第一透镜L1的像侧表面近光轴A处为凹面，能够修正像散。
第二透镜L2具有负屈折力，第二透镜L2的物侧表面近光轴A处为凸面，第二透镜L2的像侧表面近光轴A处为凹面。第二透镜L2有利于平衡第一透镜L1所产生的球差及色差，以降低色偏的产生并使成像更加锐利。
第三透镜L3具有正屈折力，第三透镜L3的物侧表面近光轴A处为凸面，第三透镜L3的像侧表面近光轴A处为凹面。第三透镜L3有利于修正光学镜头10的像差，进一步平衡第一透镜L1所产生的球差及色差。
第四透镜L4具有负屈折力，第四透镜L4的物侧表面近光轴A处为凸面，第四透镜L4的像侧表面近光轴A处为凹面。第四透镜L4有利于修正光学镜头10的像差，平衡第一透镜L1所产生的球差及色差。
本实施方式中，第一透镜L1具有正屈折力，第二透镜L2具有负屈折力，第三透镜L3具有正屈折力，第四透镜L4具有负屈折力。通过限制第一透镜L1至第四透镜L4的屈折力，从而当光圈值为1.2时，通过光阑STO进入透镜的大量光线可以在第一透镜L1至第四透镜L4配合调制下，达到更好的聚光效果，有效提高光学镜头10的成像质量。
第五透镜L5具有正屈折力，第五透镜L5的物侧表面近光轴A处为凹面，第五透镜L5的像侧表面近光轴A处为凸面。第五透镜L5可利于光学镜头10聚光，有效缩短后焦距与光学总长。
第六透镜L6具有负屈折力，第六透镜L6的物侧表面近光轴A处为凸面，第六透镜L6的像侧表面近光轴A处为凹面。第六透镜L6有利于平衡光学镜头10负屈折力的分布，降低其敏感度，并可减少球差。
第七透镜L7具有正屈折力，第七透镜L7的物侧表面近光轴A处为凸面，第七透镜L7的像侧表面近光轴A处为凸面，且离轴处包含至少一个凹面，第七透镜L7有利于光学镜头10的聚光，能有效缩短后焦距与光学总长。
第八透镜L8具有负屈折力，第八透镜L8的物侧表面近光轴A处为凹面，第八透镜L8的像侧表面S16近光轴A处为凹面。第八透镜L8的物侧表面S15离轴处包含至少一个凹面，第八透镜L8的像侧表面S16离轴处包含至少一凸面。第八透镜L8有利于将光学镜头10的主点往被摄物端移动，而可有效缩短后焦距与光学总长，并有助于修正离轴视场的像差。
第八透镜L8的物侧表面及像侧表面都至少包含一反曲点，以修正离轴视场的像差。其中，反曲点为由透镜近光轴A处至离轴处的透镜表面的曲线，该曲线的曲率中心由物侧移至像侧(或由像侧移至物侧)的转换点。第八透镜L8像侧表面至少包含两个临界点，以修正离轴像差。其中，临界点的定义为透镜表面上，除与光轴的交点外，与一垂直于光轴的切面相切的切点。
本实施方式中，第六透镜L6具有负屈折力，其像侧表面近光轴处为凹面，第七透镜L7具有正屈折力，其物侧表面近光轴处为凸面，第八透镜L8具有负屈折力，其像侧表面近光轴处为凹面。第六透镜L6、第七透镜L7、第八透镜L8配置适当面形，以修正影像周边像差而提升成像品质，并缩短后焦距，有助于摄像模组的小型化。
本实施方式通过不同透镜之间的配合，使得光学镜头10在大光圈值变化范围的情况下，具有较好的成像效果，及实现摄像模组的小型化。
本实施方式中，光学镜头10的透镜的所有表面均为非球面，即第一透镜L1、第二透镜L2、第三透镜L3、第四透镜L4、第五透镜L5、第六透镜L6、第七透镜L7和第八透镜L8的像侧表面和物侧表面均为非球面，非球面配置自由度更高，消除像差效果好，进而缩减光学镜头10总长度，有利于光学镜头10的小型化。
本实施方式中，光学镜头10的所有透镜中折射率最大的透镜的折射率(Nmax)为1.80，所有透镜中折射率最小的透镜的折射率(Nmin)为1.54。上述限定值保证了透镜可以采用的材质为树脂材质或玻璃材质。通过对透镜进行不同材质的合理配置，有利于实现光学镜头10的小型化，及提高光学镜头10的成像效果。
一些实施方式中，第一透镜L1(N1)大于等于1.40，且小于等于2.0；第三透镜L3、第五透镜L5、第七透镜L7和第八透镜L8的折射率(N3、N5、N7、N8)大于等于1.50，且小于等于1.55；第二透镜L2和第四透镜L4的折射率(N2、N4)大于等于1.65，且小于等于1.70；第六透镜L6的折射率(N6)大于等于1.57，且小于等于1.58。也就是说，第一透镜L1选择低折射材料、中折射率材料、较高折射材料或非常高折射材料，第三透镜L3、第五透镜L5、第七透镜L7和第八透镜L8选择低折射率材料，第二透镜L2、第四透镜L4选择较高折射率材料，第六透镜L6选择中折射率材料。上述限定值能保证光学镜头10在大范围光圈值的基础上，光学镜头10的成像效果好。
所有透镜中色散系数最大的透镜的色散系数(Vmax)为55.8；所有透镜中色散系数最小的透镜的色散系数(Vmin)为19.5。上述限定值保证了光学镜头10消除色差的能力，提升光学镜头10的成像品质。
一些实施方式中，第一透镜L1的色散系数(V1)大于等于30，且小于等于90；第三透镜L3、第五透镜L5、第七透镜L7和第八透镜L8的色散系数(V3、V5、V7、V8)大于等于52，且小于等于60；第二透镜L2和第四透镜L4的色散系数(V2、V4)大于等于15，且小于等于21；第六透镜L6的色散系数(V6)大于等于35，且小于等于40。也就是说，第一透镜L1选择低色散系数或者中色散系数材料或较高高色散系数材料或非常高色散系数，第三透镜L3、第五透镜L5、第七透镜L7和第八透镜L8选择较高色散系数材料，第二透镜L2、第四透镜L4选择低色散系数材料，第六透镜L6选择中色散系数材料。上述限定值能保证光学镜头10在大范围光圈值的基础上，光学镜头10的成像效果好。
第一透镜L1至第四透镜L4的焦距倒数加和(1/f1+1/f2+1/f3+1/f4)为0.10；上述限定值保证了，当光圈值为1.2时，通过光阑STO进入透镜的大量光线可以在第一透镜L1至第四透镜L4配合调制下，达到更好的聚光效果，有效提高光学镜头10的成像质量。
第一透镜L1、第三透镜L3、第五透镜L5和第七透镜L7的焦距倒数加和(1/f1+1/f3+1/f5+1/f7)为0.37，上述限定值有利于修正光学镜头10的像差，平衡第一透镜L1产生的球差和色差，提高光学镜头10的成像效果。
光学镜头10的焦距与各个透镜的焦距的比值(|EFL/fi|)为1.35；第一透镜L1的焦距与其他各个透镜的焦距的比值(|f1/fi|)为2.61；第四透镜L4的焦距与其他各个透镜的焦距的比值(|f4/fi|)为0.05；上述限定值保证了光学镜头10在大光圈的场景下具有很好的成像品质。
第一透镜L1物侧表面的曲率半径为R1，第一透镜L1像侧表面的曲率半径为R2，第二透镜L2物侧表面的曲率半径为R3，第二透镜L2像侧表面的曲率半径为R4，第三透镜L3物侧表面的曲率半径为R5，第三透镜L3像侧表面的曲率半径为R6，第四透镜L4物侧表面的曲率半径为R7，第四透镜L4像侧表面的曲率半径为R8,第五透镜L5物侧表面的曲率半径为R9，第五透镜L5像侧表面的曲率半径为R10，第六透镜L6物侧表面的曲率半径为R11， 第六透镜L6像侧表面的曲率半径为R12，第七透镜L7物侧表面的曲率半径为R13，第七透镜L7像侧表面的曲率半径为R14，第八透镜L8物侧表面的曲率半径为R15，第八透镜L8像侧表面的曲率半径为R16。其中，|R1/R2|＝0.61，|R3/R4|＝1.34，|R5/R6|＝0.45，|R7/R8|＝2.29，|R9/R10|＝2.54，|R11/R12|＝1.37，|R13/R14|＝0.25，|R15/R16|＝8.70。上述限定值保证了光学镜头10能够得到更好的成像效果。
光学镜头10满足R1，R2，R3，R4，R5，R6均大于0；R7，R8中至少有一个大于0。通过限制R1、R2、R3、R4、R5、R6均大于0，且R7、R8中至少有一个大于0，以使光学镜头10能够得到更好的成像效果。
第一透镜L1至第八透镜L8中各透镜于光轴A上厚度的最大值与第一透镜L1至第八透镜L8中各透镜于光轴A上厚度的最小值的比值(CTmax/CTmin)为2.29；第一透镜L1至第八透镜L8中任意相邻两个透镜间隔的最大值与第一透镜L1至第八透镜L8中任意相邻两个透镜间隔的最小值的比值(Tmin/Tmax)为0.08；第三透镜L3物侧表面至第五透镜L5的像侧表面于光轴A上的距离与光学总长的比值(Dr5r10/TTL)为0.29；所有透镜的物侧表面或像侧表面的通光孔最大值与所有透镜的物侧表面或像侧表面的通光孔最小值的比值(Dmax/Dmin)为2.89；第一透镜L1至第八透镜L8中任意相邻两个透镜间隔的最大值与第一透镜L1至第八透镜L8中各透镜于光轴A上厚度的最大值的比值(Tmax/CTmax)为1.447；上述限定值保证了光学镜头10的小型化。
入射瞳直径与所有透镜的物侧表面或像侧表面的通光孔最大值的比值(EPD/Dmax)在0.25至1.35的范围内(包括0.25和1.35)；入射瞳直径与第三透镜L3的物侧表面至第五透镜L5的像侧表面于光轴A上的距离的比值(EPD/Dr5r10)在0.55至3.15的范围内(包括0.55和3.15)；上述限定值保证了光学镜头10的小型化，且可变光圈的光圈值变化范围大。
第一透镜L1于光轴A上的厚度与第二透镜L2至第八透镜L8中各透镜于光轴A上厚度的最大值的比值(MaxCT1/MaxCT2L)为1.10；上述限定值保证了光学镜头10可以通过不同材质透镜的合理配置，有利于光学镜头10的小型化和可制造性。
第一透镜L1与第二透镜L2于光轴A上的间隔距离为T12，第二透镜L2与第三透镜L3于光轴A上的间隔距离为T23，第三透镜L3与第四透镜L4于光轴A上的间隔距离为T34，第四透镜L4与第五透镜L5于光轴A上的间隔距离为T45，第五透镜L5与第六透镜L6于光轴A上的间隔距离为T56，第六透镜L6与第七透镜L7于光轴A上的间隔距离为T67，第七透镜L7与第八透镜L8于光轴A上的间隔距离为T78，第八透镜L8像侧表面至成像面于光轴A上的距离为BL，Tmax第一透镜L1至第八透镜L8中任意相邻两个透镜间隔的最大值。其中，Tmax/T12＝18.04，Tmax/T23＝2.37，Tmax/T34＝1.2，Tmax/T45＝8.91，Tmax/T56＝2.05，Tmax/T67＝1.72，Tmax/BL＝0.53。上述限定值保证了光学镜头10的小型化。
本实施方式通过不同透镜之间的配合，大范围光圈值的基础上，使得光学镜头10具有较好的成像效果，同时实现电子设备100的薄型化。
可以理解的是，上述对光学镜头的不同参数的不同限制可以彼此独立存在，也可以相互结合。当上述所有限定值彼此结合时，光学镜头更薄或能够获得更好的成像质量。
依据上文的关系式，本申请第七实施方式的摄像模组1的基本参数如下表25。
表25第七实施方式的光学镜头10工作状态时的基本参数
Figure PCTCN2022126430-appb-000024
本申请第七实施方式的摄像模组1各个组成的详细结构数据如下表26。
表26摄像模组1各个组成的详细结构数据
Figure PCTCN2022126430-appb-000025
表27示出了本实施方式的光学镜头10的各个透镜的物侧表面和像侧表面的通光孔径，具体如表27所示。
表27第七实施方式的光学镜头10的各个透镜的通光孔径
面号 S1 S2 S3 S4 S5 S6 S7 S8 S9 S10 S11 S12 S13 S14 S15 S16
孔径 4.41 4.29 4.14 3.77 3.71 3.30 3.46 3.94 4.12 4.56 5.25 6.04 6.75 7.45 8.85 9.52
表28示出了本实施方式的光学镜头10的非球面系数，本实施例光学镜头10中非球面的数量为16个，具体如表28所示。
表28第七实施方式的光学镜头10的非球面系数
面号 K A4 A6 A8 A10
S1 8.95E-02 -2.48E-03 4.71E-03 -5.34E-03 3.89E-03
S2 -5.15E+00 -3.68E-02 4.19E-02 -2.39E-02 3.87E-03
S3 -4.80E+00 -6.62E-02 1.08E-01 -1.83E-01 2.96E-01
S4 -4.20E-01 -6.94E-03 -6.84E-02 3.24E-01 -8.15E-01
S5 1.69E+00 -5.69E-03 1.52E-02 -2.21E-02 2.16E-02
S6 3.24E+00 -1.48E-03 1.11E-03 -4.98E-03 9.45E-03
S7 0.00E+00 -6.81E-03 -4.24E-02 5.46E-02 -4.86E-02
S8 0.00E+00 4.35E-02 -1.08E-01 1.10E-01 -7.42E-02
S9 -6.60E+01 5.50E-02 -7.24E-02 3.07E-03 1.06E-01
S10 -7.07E+00 1.73E-02 -4.85E-02 6.50E-02 -8.72E-02
S11 -1.52E+01 7.76E-04 4.11E-03 -3.82E-02 5.66E-02
S12 -2.01E+00 -3.35E-02 3.36E-03 -5.45E-03 9.30E-03
S13 2.57E-02 -1.94E-02 1.99E-05 -4.84E-03 4.66E-03
S14 0.00E+00 1.85E-02 -2.11E-03 -7.71E-03 6.18E-03
S15 -2.41E+01 -6.08E-02 1.61E-02 -4.83E-03 1.94E-03
S16 -1.23E+01 -2.47E-02 2.20E-03 1.17E-03 -5.92E-04
面号 A12 A14 A16 A18 A20
S1 -1.90E-03 6.10E-04 -1.26E-04 1.51E-05 -8.09E-07
S2 3.37E-03 -2.37E-03 6.68E-04 -9.18E-05 5.01E-06
S3 -3.76E-01 3.46E-01 -2.30E-01 1.10E-01 -3.83E-02
S4 1.34E+00 -1.53E+00 1.25E+00 -7.33E-01 3.12E-01
S5 -1.34E-02 5.33E-03 -1.31E-03 1.79E-04 -1.05E-05
S6 -9.43E-03 5.48E-03 -1.83E-03 3.26E-04 -2.39E-05
S7 2.76E-02 -1.01E-02 2.26E-03 -2.83E-04 1.50E-05
S8 3.24E-02 -9.08E-03 1.56E-03 -1.49E-04 5.86E-06
S9 -1.68E-01 1.50E-01 -9.05E-02 3.92E-02 -1.23E-02
S10 9.28E-02 -7.18E-02 4.00E-02 -1.61E-02 4.71E-03
S11 -4.82E-02 2.71E-02 -1.06E-02 2.96E-03 -5.89E-04
S12 -8.01E-03 4.24E-03 -1.50E-03 3.68E-04 -6.39E-05
S13 -2.51E-03 9.14E-04 -2.35E-04 4.35E-05 -5.80E-06
S14 -2.70E-03 7.90E-04 -1.65E-04 2.49E-05 -2.74E-06
S15 -6.20E-04 1.33E-04 -1.93E-05 1.93E-06 -1.36E-07
S16 1.47E-04 -2.45E-05 2.95E-06 -2.60E-07 1.69E-08
面号 A22 A24 A26 A28 A30
S1 0 0 0 0 0
S2 0.00E+00 0.00E+00 0.00E+00 0.00E+00 0
S3 9.58E-03 -1.68E-03 1.96E-04 -1.36E-05 4.26852E-07
S4 -9.52E-02 2.02E-02 -2.85E-03 2.39E-04 -9.0133E-06
S5 0.00E+00 0.00E+00 0.00E+00 0.00E+00 0
S6 0.00E+00 0.00E+00 0.00E+00 0.00E+00 0
S7 0.00E+00 0.00E+00 0.00E+00 0.00E+00 0
S8 0.00E+00 0.00E+00 0.00E+00 0.00E+00 0
S9 2.81E-03 -4.49E-04 4.81E-05 -3.08E-06 8.92172E-08
S10 -9.86E-04 1.44E-04 -1.40E-05 8.15E-07 -2.1381E-08
S11 8.30E-05 -8.08E-06 5.13E-07 -1.91E-08 3.12847E-10
S12 7.80E-06 -6.56E-07 3.62E-08 -1.18E-09 1.71977E-11
S13 5.55E-07 -3.71E-08 1.65E-09 -4.36E-11 5.20882E-13
S14 2.17E-07 -1.20E-08 4.44E-10 -9.79E-12 9.75242E-14
S15 6.70E-09 -2.27E-10 5.03E-12 -6.58E-14 3.84501E-16
S16 -7.96E-10 2.63E-11 -5.78E-13 7.58E-15 -4.4756E-17
其中，K表示非球面曲线方程式中的锥面系数，A4、A6、A8、A10、A12、A14、A16、A19、A20、A22、A24、A26、A28、A30则表示各表面第4、6、8、10、12、14、16、18、20、22、24、26、28、30阶非球面系数。需要说明的是，表格中的各参数为科学计数法表示。例如，-1.07E-01是指-1.07×10 -1；-4.11E-02是指-4.11×10 -2。需要说明的是，本申请中K、A4、A6、A8、A10、A12、A14、A16、A19、A20、22、24、26、28、30等符号在后续再次出现时，除非有另外的解释，否则表示的意思与此处相同，后续不再赘述。
通过将上述参数代入至公式：
Figure PCTCN2022126430-appb-000026
即能够设计得到本实施方式的光学镜头10的各个透镜，其中，z为非球面上距离光轴A为r的点，其与相切于非球面光轴A上交点切面的相对距离，r为非球面曲线上的点与光轴A的垂直距离，c为曲率，k为锥面系数，ɑ i为第i阶非球面系数。
本实施方式中，通过上述参数设计得到的光学镜头10的各不同的透镜能够分别起到不同的作用，从而通过各透镜的配合，在大光圈值范围的基础上，得到具有良好背景虚化效果和成像质量及薄型化的光学镜头10。
图25和图26为第七实施方式的光学镜头10的光学性能的表征图。
具体的，图25示出了光学镜头10波长分别为650nm、610nm、555nm、510nm、470nm的光经过第七实施方式的光学镜头10后的轴向色差。图25的纵坐标表示的是归一化光瞳坐标，横坐标表示轴向色差，单位为毫米。从图25中可以看出，本实施方式中，光学镜头10在各个状态下的轴向色差控制在一个很小的范围内。
图26中左图为光学镜头10的场曲示意图，右图为光学镜头10的光学畸变示意图。其中，左图中实线为650nm的光经过光学镜头10后的子午方向的场曲示意图，虚线为650nm的光经过光学镜头10后的弧矢方向的场曲示意图。右图为650nm的光经过第七实施方式的光学镜头10后的光学畸变示意图。两图的纵坐标都是物体角度，左图横坐标表示子午方向(虚线)和弧矢方向(实线)的像散值，单位为毫米。右图表示不同视场对应的光学畸变值，单位为百分比。由图26可见，本实施方式中，光学系统将畸变控制在肉眼不可明显辨识范围内。
本实施方式中提供的光学镜头10，通过各透镜组中各透镜的配置方式和具有特定光学设计的透镜的组合，可以使光学镜头10在大光圈值范围的基础上，具有较好的背景虚化效果和成像效果，同时实现电子设备100的薄型化。
请参阅图27，图27是本申请第八实施方式的摄像模组1的结构示意图。
本实施方式中，光学镜头10包括光阑STO和七片透镜。具体的，光学镜头10包括从物侧至像侧依次排列的光阑STO、第一透镜L1、第二透镜L2、第三透镜L3、第四透镜L4、第五透镜L5、第六透镜L6和第七透镜L7。
本实施方式中，光阑STO为可变光圈，光阑STO的光圈值能够在1.2至5.0的范围内(包括1.2和5.0)调节，实现大光圈、小光圈等多个位置特征。通过调整可变光圈的结构尺寸可以控制光学镜头10的通光量，可以控制摄像模组1的景深，提升背景虚化效果，进而提高图像质量，实现“人像模式”拍照等。
一些实施方式中，光学镜头10的光学总长与光学镜头10的成像面有效像素区域对角线半长度和光学镜头10的入射瞳直径的乘积的比值(TTL/(ImgH×EPD))大于等于0.10，且小于等于1.10。上述限定值保证了光学镜头10的光学总长最够小，成像面大，光圈值变化范围大，有利于光学镜头10小型化及提高成像品质。
一些实施方式中，光阑STO的无穷远物体距离成像面于光轴A上的距离与光学总长的比值(STL/TTL)在0.8至1.5的范围内(包括0.8和1.5)。上述限定值保证了光阑STO可以设于第一透镜L1的物侧，也可以设于任意相邻两个透镜之间。
本实施方式中，第一透镜L1具有正屈折力，第一透镜L1的物侧表面近光轴A处为凸面，从而提供光学镜头10物侧端光线汇聚能力，缩短其总长度，以利于光学镜头10的小型化。第一透镜L1的像侧表面近光轴A处为凹面，能够修正像散。
第二透镜L2具有负屈折力，第二透镜L2的物侧表面近光轴A处为凸面，第二透镜L2的像侧表面近光轴A处为凹面。第二透镜L2有利于平衡第一透镜L1所产生的球差及色差，以降低色偏的产生并使成像更加锐利。
第三透镜L3具有负屈折力，第三透镜L3的物侧表面近光轴A处为凸面，第三透镜L3的像侧表面近光轴A处为凹面。第三透镜L3有利于修正光学镜头10的像差，平衡第一透镜L1所产生的球差及色差。
本实施方式中，第一透镜L1具有正屈折力，第二透镜L2具有负屈折力，第三透镜L3具有负屈折力。通过限制第一透镜L1至第三透镜L3的屈折力，从而当光圈值为1.2时，通过光阑STO进入透镜的大量光线可以在第一透镜L1至第三透镜L3配合调制下，达到更好的聚光效果，有效提高光学镜头10的成像质量。
第四透镜L4具有正屈折力，第四透镜L4的物侧表面近光轴A处为凸面，第四透镜L4的像侧表面近光轴A处为凸面。第四透镜L4可利于光学镜头10聚光，有效缩短后焦距与光学总长。
第五透镜L5具有负屈折力，第五透镜L5的物侧表面近光轴A处为凹面，第五透镜L5的像侧表面近光轴A处为凹面。第五透镜L5有利于平衡光学镜头10负屈折力的分布，降低其敏感度，并可减少球差。
第六透镜L6具有正屈折力，第六透镜L6的物侧表面近光轴A处为凸面，第六透镜L6的像侧表面近光轴A处为凹面，且离轴处包含至少一个凹面，第六透镜L6有利于调整场曲，平衡不同物距的像差。
第七透镜L7具有负屈折力，第七透镜L7的物侧表面近光轴A处为凸面，第七透镜L7的像侧表面近光轴A处为凹面，第七透镜L7的物侧表面S13离轴处包含至少一个凹面，第七透镜L7的像侧表面S14离轴处包含至少一凸面。第七透镜L7有利于将光学镜头10的主点往被摄物端移动，而可有效缩短后焦距与光学总长，并有助于修正离轴视场的像差。其中，临界点的定义为透镜表面上，除与光轴的交点外，与一垂直于光轴的切面相切的切点。
本实施方式中，第五透镜L5具有负屈折力，其像侧表面近光轴处为凹面，第六透镜L6具有正屈折力，其物侧表面近光轴处为凸面，第七透镜L7具有负屈折力，其像侧表面近光轴处为凸面。第第五透镜L5、第六透镜L6、第七透镜L7配置适当面形，以修正影像周边像差而提升成像品质，并缩短后焦距，有助于摄像模组的小型化。
本实施方式通过不同透镜之间的配合，使得光学镜头10在大光圈值变化范围的情况下，具有较好的成像效果，及实现摄像模组的小型化。
本实施方式中，光学镜头10的透镜的所有表面均为非球面，即第一透镜L1、第二透镜 L2、第三透镜L3、第四透镜L4、第五透镜L5、第六透镜L6和第七透镜L7的像侧表面和物侧表面均为非球面，非球面配置自由度更高，消除像差效果好，进而缩减光学镜头10总长度，有利于光学镜头10的小型化。
本实施方式中，光学镜头10的所有透镜中折射率最大的透镜的折射率(Nmax)为1.68，所有透镜中折射率最小的透镜的折射率(Nmin)为1.54。上述限定值保证了透镜可以采用的材质为树脂材质或玻璃材质。通过对透镜进行不同材质的合理配置，有利于实现光学镜头10的小型化，及提高光学镜头10的成像效果。
一些实施方式中，第一透镜L1(N1)大于等于1.40，且小于等于2.0；第三透镜L3、第五透镜L5、第七透镜L7的折射率(N3、N5、N7)大于等于1.50，且小于等于1.55；第二透镜L2和第四透镜L4的折射率(N2、N4)大于等于1.65，且小于等于1.70；第六透镜L6的折射率(N6)大于等于1.57，且小于等于1.58。也就是说，第一透镜L1选择低折射材料、中折射率材料、较高折射材料或非常高折射材料，第三透镜L3、第五透镜L5和第七透镜L7选择低折射率材料，第二透镜L2、第四透镜L4选择较高折射率材料，第六透镜L6选择中折射率材料。上述限定值能保证光学镜头10在大范围光圈值的基础上，光学镜头10的成像效果好。
所有透镜中色散系数最大的透镜的色散系数(Vmax)为56；所有透镜中色散系数最小的透镜的色散系数(Vmin)为20.4。上述限定值保证了光学镜头10消除色差的能力，提升光学镜头10的成像品质。
一些实施方式中，第一透镜L1的色散系数(V1)大于等于30，且小于等于90；第三透镜L3、第五透镜L5和第七透镜L7的色散系数(V3、V5、V7)大于等于52，且小于等于60；第二透镜L2和第四透镜L4的色散系数(V2、V4)大于等于15，且小于等于21；第六透镜L6的色散系数(V6)大于等于35，且小于等于40。也就是说，第一透镜L1选择低色散系数或者中色散系数材料或较高高色散系数材料或非常高色散系数，第三透镜L3、第五透镜L5和第七透镜L7选择较高色散系数材料，第二透镜L2、第四透镜L4选择低色散系数材料，第六透镜L6选择中色散系数材料。上述限定值能保证光学镜头10在大范围光圈值的基础上，光学镜头10的成像效果好。
第一透镜L1至第四透镜L4的焦距倒数加和(1/f1+1/f2+1/f3+1/f4)为0.12；上述限定值保证了，当光圈值为1.2时，通过光阑STO进入透镜的大量光线可以在第一透镜L1至第四透镜L4配合调制下，达到更好的聚光效果，有效提高光学镜头10的成像质量。
第一透镜L1、第三透镜L3、第五透镜L5和第七透镜L7的焦距倒数加和(1/f1+1/f3+1/f5+1/f7)为-0.09，上述限定值有利于修正光学镜头10的像差，平衡第一透镜L1产生的球差和色差，提高光学镜头10的成像效果。
光学镜头10的焦距与各个透镜的焦距的比值(|EFL/fi|)为1.40；第一透镜L1的焦距与其他各个透镜的焦距的比值(|f1/fi|)为1.18；第四透镜L4的焦距与其他各个透镜的焦距的比值(|f4/fi|)为0.43；上述限定值保证了光学镜头10在大光圈的场景下具有很好的成像品质。
第一透镜L1物侧表面的曲率半径为R1，第一透镜L1像侧表面的曲率半径为R2，第二透镜L2物侧表面的曲率半径为R3，第二透镜L2像侧表面的曲率半径为R4，第三透镜L3物侧表面的曲率半径为R5，第三透镜L3像侧表面的曲率半径为R6，第四透镜L4物侧表面的曲率半径为R7，第四透镜L4像侧表面的曲率半径为R8,第五透镜L5物侧表面的曲率半径为R9，第五透镜L5像侧表面的曲率半径为R10，第六透镜L6物侧表面的曲率半径为R11，第六透镜L6像侧表面的曲率半径为R12，第七透镜L7物侧表面的曲率半径为R13，第七透 镜L7像侧表面的曲率半径为R14。其中，|R1/R2|＝0.33，|R3/R4|＝1.65，|R5/R6|＝1.34，|R7/R8|＝-1.05，|R9/R10|＝-3.25，|R11/R12|＝0.58，|R13/R14|＝3.38。上述限定值保证了光学镜头10能够得到更好的成像效果。
光学镜头10满足R1、R2、R3、R4、R5、R6均大于0，且R7、R8中至少有一个大于0。通过上述限制，以使光学镜头10能够得到更好的成像效果。
第一透镜L1至第七透镜L7中各透镜于光轴A上厚度的最大值与第一透镜L1至第七透镜L7中各透镜于光轴A上厚度的最小值的比值(CTmax/CTmin)为3.5；第一透镜L1至第七透镜L7中任意相邻两个透镜间隔的最大值与第一透镜L1至第七透镜L7中任意相邻两个透镜间隔的最小值的比值(Tmin/Tmax)为0.04；第三透镜L3物侧表面至第五透镜L5的像侧表面于光轴A上的距离与光学总长的比值(Dr5r10/TTL)为0.28；所有透镜的物侧表面或像侧表面的通光孔最大值与所有透镜的物侧表面或像侧表面的通光孔最小值的比值(Dmax/Dmin)为2.36；第一透镜L1至第七透镜L7中任意相邻两个透镜间隔的最大值与第一透镜L1至第七透镜L7中各透镜于光轴A上厚度的最大值的比值(Tmax/CTmax)为1.176；上述限定值保证了光学镜头10的小型化。
入射瞳直径与所有透镜的物侧表面或像侧表面的通光孔最大值的比值(EPD/Dmax)在0.25至1.35的范围内(包括0.25和1.35)；入射瞳直径与第三透镜L3的物侧表面至第五透镜L5的像侧表面于光轴A上的距离的比值(EPD/Dr5r10)在0.55至3.15的范围内(包括0.55和3.15)；上述限定值保证了光学镜头10的小型化，且可变光圈的光圈值变化范围大。
第一透镜L1于光轴A上的厚度与第二透镜L2至第七透镜L7中各透镜于光轴A上厚度的最大值的比值(MaxCT1/MaxCT2L)为1.10；上述限定值保证了光学镜头10可以通过不同材质透镜的合理配置，有利于光学镜头10的小型化和可制造性。
第一透镜L1与第二透镜L2于光轴A上的间隔距离为T12，第二透镜L2与第三透镜L3于光轴A上的间隔距离为T23，第三透镜L3与第四透镜L4于光轴A上的间隔距离为T34，第四透镜L4与第五透镜L5于光轴A上的间隔距离为T45，第五透镜L5与第六透镜L6于光轴A上的间隔距离为T56，第六透镜L6与第七透镜L7于光轴A上的间隔距离为T67，第七透镜L7像侧表面至成像面于光轴A上的距离为BL，第一透镜L1至第七透镜L7中任意相邻两个透镜间隔的最大值为Tmax。其中，Tmax/T12＝25.44，Tmax/T23＝2.19，Tmax/T34＝13.59，Tmax/T45＝1.80，Tmax/T56＝10.76，Tmax/T67＝1.00，Tmax/BL＝1.29。上述限定值保证了光学镜头10的小型化。
本实施方式通过不同透镜之间的配合，大范围光圈值的基础上，使得光学镜头10具有较好的成像效果，同时实现电子设备100的薄型化。
可以理解的是，上述对光学镜头的不同参数的不同限制可以彼此独立存在，也可以相互结合。当上述所有限定值彼此结合时，光学镜头更薄或能够获得更好的成像质量。
依据上文的关系式，本申请第八实施方式的摄像模组1的基本参数如下表29。
表29第八实施方式的光学镜头10工作状态时的基本参数
Figure PCTCN2022126430-appb-000027
本申请第八实施方式的摄像模组1各个组成的详细结构数据如下表30。
表30摄像模组1各个组成的详细结构数据
Figure PCTCN2022126430-appb-000028
表31示出了本实施方式的光学镜头10的各个透镜的物侧表面和像侧表面的通光孔径，具体如表31所示。
表31第八实施方式的光学镜头10的各个透镜的通光孔径
面号 S1 S2 S3 S4 S5 S6 S7 S8 S9 S10 S11 S12 S13 S14
孔径 4.71 4.65 4.37 3.90 3.90 4.07 4.12 4.38 5.22 5.78 6.63 7.88 8.52 9.21
表32示出了本实施方式的光学镜头10的非球面系数，本实施例光学镜头10中非球面的数量为16个，具体如表32所示。
表32第八实施方式的光学镜头10的非球面系数
面号 K A4 A6 A8 A10
S1 -0.296030029 -3.05E-03 6.06E-03 -5.55E-03 3.06E-03
S2 0 -3.76E-02 3.58E-02 -2.86E-02 1.62E-02
S3 17.46249936 -4.17E-02 4.91E-02 -4.23E-02 2.55E-02
S4 5.841708742 -1.07E-02 1.80E-02 -1.66E-02 1.16E-02
S5 1.9828811 -2.10E-02 -1.18E-02 1.76E-02 -1.46E-02
S6 -27.23475027 6.32E-03 -3.43E-02 3.79E-02 -2.74E-02
S7 -53.96608992 3.65E-03 -3.27E-02 4.02E-02 -2.93E-02
S8 -4.256953413 -1.19E-02 5.46E-03 -9.98E-03 8.41E-03
S9 0 1.21E-02 -6.02E-03 7.06E-05 9.75E-04
S10 0 -4.65E-02 2.36E-02 -9.76E-03 2.96E-03
S11 -5.217872775 1.65E-03 -3.81E-03 -3.12E-04 1.91E-04
S12 -11.02988152 4.14E-02 -2.27E-02 5.93E-03 -1.07E-03
S13 -0.098630828 -8.33E-02 2.33E-02 -5.76E-03 1.06E-03
S14 -8.774833232 -3.21E-02 6.71E-03 -1.11E-03 1.22E-04
面号 A12 A14 A16 A18 A20
S1 -1.08E-03 2.41E-04 -3.38E-05 2.71E-06 -9.66E-08
S2 -6.14E-03 1.51E-03 -2.28E-04 1.93E-05 -6.90E-07
S3 -1.02E-02 2.66E-03 -4.28E-04 3.87E-05 -1.51E-06
S4 -5.88E-03 2.10E-03 -4.92E-04 6.78E-05 -4.09E-06
S5 6.95E-03 -2.02E-03 3.44E-04 -2.92E-05 7.81E-07
S6 1.24E-02 -3.51E-03 5.94E-04 -5.35E-05 1.86E-06
S7 1.36E-02 -3.96E-03 6.97E-04 -6.75E-05 2.75E-06
S8 -4.14E-03 1.28E-03 -2.41E-04 2.48E-05 -1.05E-06
S9 -5.48E-04 1.40E-04 -1.83E-05 1.13E-06 -2.26E-08
S10 -6.64E-04 9.88E-05 -8.55E-06 3.67E-07 -5.39E-09
S11 -1.65E-05 -4.61E-06 1.18E-06 -9.79E-08 2.81E-09
S12 1.36E-04 -1.15E-05 6.08E-07 -1.82E-08 2.33E-10
S13 -1.24E-04 8.95E-06 -3.90E-07 9.39E-09 -9.63E-11
S14 -8.24E-06 3.09E-07 -4.43E-09 -5.97E-11 1.95E-12
其中，K表示非球面曲线方程式中的锥面系数，A4、A6、A8、A10、A12、A14、A16、A19、A20则表示各表面第4、6、8、10、12、14、16、18、20阶非球面系数。需要说明的是，表格中的各参数为科学计数法表示。例如，-1.07E-01是指-1.07×10 -1；-4.11E-02是指-4.11×10 -2。需要说明的是，本申请中K、A4、A6、A8、A10、A12、A14、A16、A19、A20等符号在后续再次出现时，除非有另外的解释，否则表示的意思与此处相同，后续不再赘述。
通过将上述参数代入至公式：
Figure PCTCN2022126430-appb-000029
即能够设计得到本实施方式的光学镜头10的各个透镜，其中，z为非球面上距离光轴A为r的点，其与相切于非球面光轴A上交点切面的相对距离，r为非球面曲线上的点与光轴A的垂直距离，c为曲率，k为锥面系数，ɑ i为第i阶非球面系数。
本实施方式中，通过上述参数设计得到的光学镜头10的各不同的透镜能够分别起到不同的作用，从而通过各透镜的配合，在大光圈值范围的基础上，得到具有良好背景虚化效果和成像质量及薄型化的光学镜头10。
图28和图29为第八实施方式的光学镜头10的光学性能的表征图。
具体的，图28示出了光学镜头10波长分别为650nm、610nm、555nm、510nm、470nm的光经过第八实施方式的光学镜头10后的轴向色差。图28的纵坐标表示的是归一化光瞳坐标，横坐标表示轴向色差，单位为毫米。从图28中可以看出，本实施方式中，光学镜头10在各个状态下的轴向色差控制在一个很小的范围内。
图29中左图为光学镜头10的场曲示意图，右图为光学镜头10的光学畸变示意图。其中，左图中实线为650nm的光经过光学镜头10后的子午方向的场曲示意图，虚线为650nm的光 经过光学镜头10后的弧矢方向的场曲示意图。右图为650nm的光经过第八实施方式的光学镜头10后的光学畸变示意图。两图的纵坐标都是物体角度，左图横坐标表示子午方向(虚线)和弧矢方向(实线)的像散值，单位为毫米。右图表示不同视场对应的光学畸变值，单位为百分比。由图29可见，本实施方式中，光学系统将畸变控制在肉眼不可明显辨识范围内。
本实施方式中提供的光学镜头10，通过各透镜组中各透镜的配置方式和具有特定光学设计的透镜的组合，可以使光学镜头10在大光圈值范围的基础上，具有较好的背景虚化效果和成像效果，同时实现电子设备100的薄型化。
以上，仅为本申请的部分实施例和实施方式，本申请的保护范围不局限于此，任何熟知本领域的技术人员在本申请揭露的技术范围内，可轻易想到变化或替换，都应涵盖在本申请的保护范围之内。因此，本申请的保护范围应以权利要求的保护范围为准。

Claims (20)

  1. 一种光学镜头(10)，其特征在于，包括光阑(STO)及从物侧至像侧依次排列的至少七片透镜，所述光阑(STO)为可变光圈，所述光阑(STO)的光圈值能够在1.2至5.0范围内调节，所述光学镜头(10)满足下列关系式：
    0.10≤TTL/(ImgH×EPD)≤1.10；及
    CTmax/CTmin≤3.5；
    其中，TTL为所述光学镜头(10)的光学总长，ImgH为所述光学镜头(10)的成像面的有效像素区域的对角线半长度，EPD为所述光学镜头(10)的入射瞳直径，CTmax为所述至少七片透镜中各透镜于光轴上厚度的最大值，CTmin为所述至少七片透镜中各透镜于光轴上厚度的最小值。
  2. 根据权利要求1所述的光学镜头(10)，其特征在于，所述光学镜头(10)满足下列关系式：
    Tmin/Tmax≤0.085；
    其中，Tmax为所述至少七片透镜中任意相邻两个透镜间隔的最大值，Tmin为所述至少七片透镜中任意相邻两个透镜间隔的最小值。
  3. 根据权利要求1或2所述的光学镜头(10)，其特征在于，所述光学镜头(10)满足下列关系式：
    0.55≤EPD/Dr5r10≤3.15；
    其中，Dr5r10为所述第三透镜(L3)的物侧表面至所述第五透镜(L5)的像侧表面于光轴上的距离。
  4. 根据权利要求1至3中任一项所述的光学镜头(10)，其特征在于，所述至少七片透镜包括从物侧至像侧依次排列的第一透镜(L1)、第二透镜(L2)、第三透镜(L3)、第四透镜(L4)、第五透镜(L5)、第六透镜(L6)和第七透镜(L7)，所述光学镜头(10)满足下列关系式：
    Tmax/T12≥10.0；
    Tmax/T23≥2.0；
    Tmax/T34≥1.0；
    Tmax/T45≥1.5；
    Tmax/T56≥2.0；
    Tmax/T67≥1.0；以及
    Tmax/BL≥0.5；
    其中，T12为所述第一透镜(L1)与所述第二透镜(L2)于光轴上的间隔距离，T23为所述第二透镜(L2)与所述第三透镜(L3)于光轴上的间隔距离，T34为所述第三透镜(L3)与所述第四透镜(L4)于光轴上的间隔距离，T45为所述第四透镜(L4)与所述第五透镜(L5)于光轴上的间隔距离，T56为所述第五透镜(L5)与所述第六透镜(L6)于光轴上的间隔距离，T67为所述第六透镜(L6)与所述第七透镜(L7)于光轴上的间隔距离，BL为最靠近所述成像面的透镜的像侧表面至所述成像面于光轴上的距离，Tmax为所述至少七片透镜中任意相邻两个透镜间隔的最大值。
  5. 根据权利要求4所述的光学镜头(10)，其特征在于，所述光学镜头(10)满足下列关系式：
    0.1≤1/f1+1/f2+1/f3+1/f4≤0.15；
    其中，f1为所述第一透镜(L1)的焦距，f2为所述第二透镜(L2)的焦距，f3为所述第三透镜(L3)的焦距，f4为所述第四透镜(L4)的焦距。
  6. 根据权利要求4或5所述的光学镜头(10)，其特征在于，所述光学镜头(10)满足下列关系式：
    -0.1≤1/f1+1/f3+1/f5+1/f7≤0.5；
    其中，f1为所述第一透镜(L1)的焦距，f3为所述第三透镜(L3)的焦距，f5为所述第五透镜(L5)的焦距，f7为所述第七透镜(L7)的焦距。
  7. 根据权利要求1至6中任一项所述的光学镜头(10)，其特征在于，所述光学镜头(10)满足下列关系式：
    |EFL/fi|≤1.5，其中i＝1、2、3、4、5、6、7，或i＝1、2、3、4、5、6、7、8；
    |f1/fi|≤3.0，其中i＝2、3、4、5、6、7，或i＝2、3、4、5、6、7、8；
    |f4/fi|≥0.05，其中i＝1、2、3、5、6、7，或i＝1、2、3、5、6、7、8；
    其中，EFL为所述光学镜头(10)的焦距，f1为所述第一透镜(L1)的焦距，f4为所述第四透镜(L4)的焦距，fi为所述第i透镜的焦距。
  8. 根据权利要求1至7中任一项所述的光学镜头(10)，其特征在于，所述光学镜头(10)满足下列关系式：
    0.3≤|R1/R2|≤1.0；
    1.0≤|R3/R4|≤2.0；
    0.3≤|R5/R6|≤1.5；
    0.1≤|R7/R8|≤15；
    1.0≤|R9/R10|≤3.5；
    0.5≤|R11/R12|≤5.0；
    0.0≤|R13/R14|≤3.5；
    其中，R1为所述第一透镜(L1)物侧表面的曲率半径，R2为所述第一透镜(L1)像侧表面的曲率半径，R3为所述第二透镜(L2)物侧表面的曲率半径，R4为所述第二透镜(L2)像侧表面的曲率半径，R5为所述第三透镜(L3)物侧表面的曲率半径，R6为所述第三透镜(L3)像侧表面的曲率半径，R7为所述第四透镜(L4)物侧表面的曲率半径，R8为所述第四透镜(L4)像侧表面的曲率半径，R9为所述第五透镜(L5)物侧表面的曲率半径，R10为所述第五透镜(L5)像侧表面的曲率半径，R11为所述第六透镜(L6)物侧表面的曲率半径，R12为所述第六透镜(L6)像侧表面的曲率半径，R13为所述第七透镜(L7)物侧表面的曲率半径，R14为所述第七透镜(L7)像侧表面的曲率半径。
  9. 根据权利要求8所述的光学镜头(10)，其特征在于，所述光学镜头(10)满足R1、R2、R3、R4、R5、R6均大于0；R7、R8中至少有一个大于0。
  10. 根据权利要求1至9中任一项所述的光学镜头(10)，其特征在于，所述光学镜头(10)满足下列关系式：
    0.2≤Dr5r10/TTL≤0.4；
    其中，Dr5r10为所述第三透镜(L3)物侧表面至所述第五透镜(L5)像侧表面于光轴上的距离。
  11. 根据权利要求1至10中任一项所述的光学镜头(10)，其特征在于，所述光学镜头(10)满足下列关系式：
    Dmax/Dmin≥2.3；
    其中，Dmax为所述至少七片透镜中各透镜的物侧表面或像侧表面的通光孔径的最大值，Dmin为所述至少七片透镜中各透镜的物侧表面或像侧表面的通光孔径的最小值。
  12. 根据权利要求11所述的光学镜头(10)，其特征在于，所述光学镜头(10)满足下列关系式：
    0.25≤EPD/Dmax≤1.35。
  13. 根据权利要求1至12中任一项所述的光学镜头(10)，其特征在于，所述光学镜头(10)中所有透镜的物侧表面和像侧表面均为非球面。
  14. 根据权利要求2至13中任一项所述的光学镜头(10)，其特征在于，所述光学镜头(10)满足下列关系式：
    Tmax/CTmax≤1.5。
  15. 根据权利要求4至14中任一项所述的光学镜头(10)，其特征在于，所述光学镜头(10)满足下列关系式：
    0.8≤CT1/MaxCT2L≤2.0；
    其中，CT1为第一透镜(L1)于光轴上的厚度，MaxCT2L为所述至少七片透镜中除所述第一透镜(L1)以外的其他透镜于光轴上厚度的最大值。
  16. 根据权利要求1至15中任一项所述的光学镜头(10)，其特征在于，所述光学镜头(10)满足下列关系式：
    Vmin≥15；
    Vmax≤90；
    其中，Vmax为所述光学镜头(10)所有透镜中最大色散系数，Vmin为所述光学镜头(10)所有透镜中最小色散系数。
  17. 根据权利要求1至16中任一项所述的光学镜头(10)，其特征在于，所述光学镜头(10)满足下列关系式：
    1.65≤Nmax≤2.0；
    1.30≤Nmin≤1.58；
    其中，Nmax为所述光学镜头(10)所有透镜中最大折射率，Nmin为所述光学镜头(10) 所有透镜中最小折射率。
  18. 根据权利要求1至17中任一项所述的光学镜头(10)，其特征在于，所述光学镜头(10)满足下列关系式：
    0.8≤STL/TTL≤1.5；
    其中，STL所述光学镜头(10)的光阑(STO)的无穷远物体距离成像面于光轴上的距离。
  19. 一种摄像模组(1)，其特征在于，包括感光元件(20)及如权利要求1至18中任一项所述的光学镜头(10)，所述感光元件(20)位于所述光学镜头(10)的像侧并位于所述光学镜头(10)的成像面，所述光学镜头(10)用于将环境光线投射至所述感光元件(20)。
  20. 一种电子设备(100)，其特征在于，包括图像处理器(2)和如权利要求19所述的摄像模组(1)，所述图像处理器(2)与所述摄像模组(1)通信连接，所述摄像模组(1)用于获取图像数据并将所述图像数据输入到所述图像处理器(2)中，所述图像处理器(2)用于对输出其中的所述图像数据进行处理。
PCT/CN2022/126430 2021-10-22 2022-10-20 光学镜头、摄像模组及电子设备 Ceased WO2023066339A1 (zh)

Priority Applications (2)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
EP22882944.6A EP4400889A4 (en) 2021-10-22 2022-10-20 Optical lens, camera module and electronic apparatus
US18/703,163 US20250224594A1 (en) 2021-10-22 2022-10-20 Optical Lens, Camera Module, and Electronic Device

Applications Claiming Priority (2)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
CN202111234324.8A CN115494612B (zh) 2021-10-22 2021-10-22 光学镜头、摄像模组及电子设备
CN202111234324.8 2021-10-22

Publications (1)

Publication Number Publication Date
WO2023066339A1 true WO2023066339A1 (zh) 2023-04-27

Family

ID=84464671

Family Applications (1)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
PCT/CN2022/126430 Ceased WO2023066339A1 (zh) 2021-10-22 2022-10-20 光学镜头、摄像模组及电子设备

Country Status (4)

Country Link
US (1) US20250224594A1 (zh)
EP (1) EP4400889A4 (zh)
CN (1) CN115494612B (zh)
WO (1) WO2023066339A1 (zh)

Families Citing this family (2)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
TWI854512B (zh) * 2023-02-24 2024-09-01 大立光電股份有限公司 影像擷取模組及電子裝置
CN117406399B (zh) * 2023-12-14 2024-03-26 江西联益光学有限公司 光学镜头

Citations (5)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
JPH0713078A (ja) * 1993-04-22 1995-01-17 Ricoh Co Ltd ズームレンズ
CN109752823A (zh) * 2017-11-08 2019-05-14 三星电机株式会社 光学成像系统
CN213276106U (zh) * 2020-11-19 2021-05-25 浙江舜宇光学有限公司 光学成像镜头
CN113341540A (zh) * 2021-06-09 2021-09-03 浙江舜宇光学有限公司 光学成像镜头
CN114815168A (zh) * 2022-05-27 2022-07-29 浙江舜宇光学有限公司 光学成像镜头

Family Cites Families (5)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
JP6478903B2 (ja) * 2015-12-21 2019-03-06 カンタツ株式会社 撮像レンズ
TWI632411B (zh) * 2018-01-19 2018-08-11 大立光電股份有限公司 光學攝像鏡組、取像裝置及電子裝置
CN117518407B (zh) * 2019-10-21 2025-10-17 浙江舜宇光学有限公司 光学成像镜头
CN111290104B (zh) * 2020-02-20 2024-11-26 浙江舜宇光学有限公司 光学成像系统
CN112965221B (zh) * 2021-05-18 2021-07-27 江西联创电子有限公司 光学成像镜头及成像设备

Patent Citations (5)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
JPH0713078A (ja) * 1993-04-22 1995-01-17 Ricoh Co Ltd ズームレンズ
CN109752823A (zh) * 2017-11-08 2019-05-14 三星电机株式会社 光学成像系统
CN213276106U (zh) * 2020-11-19 2021-05-25 浙江舜宇光学有限公司 光学成像镜头
CN113341540A (zh) * 2021-06-09 2021-09-03 浙江舜宇光学有限公司 光学成像镜头
CN114815168A (zh) * 2022-05-27 2022-07-29 浙江舜宇光学有限公司 光学成像镜头

Non-Patent Citations (1)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Title
See also references of EP4400889A4

Also Published As

Publication number Publication date
CN115494612A (zh) 2022-12-20
US20250224594A1 (en) 2025-07-10
CN115494612B (zh) 2023-08-22
EP4400889A1 (en) 2024-07-17
EP4400889A4 (en) 2025-01-15

Similar Documents

Publication Publication Date Title
US11366294B2 (en) Optical imaging lens assembly, image capturing unit and electronic device
US11125979B2 (en) Optical photographing lens assembly comprising a component of variable refractive powers, image capturing unit and electronic device
US12298480B2 (en) Image capturing optical system
CN114326036A (zh) 光学透镜系统、取像装置及电子装置
CN115453729A (zh) 摄像镜头组
US20230400668A1 (en) Optical imaging system comprising four lenses of --+-, +-+-, +++- or -++- refractive powers, image capturing unit and electronic device
CN111999859B (zh) 光学成像系统、取像模组和电子装置
US20230087877A1 (en) Optical lens, camera module, and electronic device
CN115453728A (zh) 摄影透镜系统
CN113655601B (zh) 光学镜头、图像采集装置及电子设备
US11215798B2 (en) Photographing optical lens system, image capturing unit and electronic device
CN113625420B (zh) 光学镜头、镜头模组和终端
WO2023020363A1 (zh) 光学镜头、摄像模组及电子设备
US20220035135A1 (en) Image capturing lens assembly, imaging apparatus and electronic device
WO2022022026A1 (zh) 光学镜头、镜头模组和终端
WO2023066339A1 (zh) 光学镜头、摄像模组及电子设备
WO2022001589A1 (zh) 光学镜头、摄像头模组和电子设备
CN114967075B (zh) 光学镜头、摄像模组及电子设备
CN115826205B (zh) 摄像模组
CN116430543A (zh) 成像透镜组及摄像模块
CN119247584A (zh) 光学镜片系统、取像装置及电子装置
CN117111260A (zh) 光学镜头、摄像模组及终端设备
CN114935812A (zh) 光学系统、取像模组及电子设备
CN112462488A (zh) 光学系统、镜头模组和电子设备
CN120742531A (zh) 一种光学镜头、摄像模组及电子设备

Legal Events

Date Code Title Description
121 Ep: the epo has been informed by wipo that ep was designated in this application

Ref document number: 22882944

Country of ref document: EP

Kind code of ref document: A1

WWE Wipo information: entry into national phase

Ref document number: 202417027834

Country of ref document: IN

WWE Wipo information: entry into national phase

Ref document number: 2022882944

Country of ref document: EP

Ref document number: 22882944.6

Country of ref document: EP

ENP Entry into the national phase

Ref document number: 2022882944

Country of ref document: EP

Effective date: 20240410

WWE Wipo information: entry into national phase

Ref document number: 18703163

Country of ref document: US

REG Reference to national code

Ref country code: BR

Ref legal event code: B01A

Ref document number: 112024007110

Country of ref document: BR

NENP Non-entry into the national phase

Ref country code: DE

ENP Entry into the national phase

Ref document number: 112024007110

Country of ref document: BR

Kind code of ref document: A2

Effective date: 20240411

WWW Wipo information: withdrawn in national office

Ref document number: 2022882944

Country of ref document: EP

WWP Wipo information: published in national office

Ref document number: 18703163

Country of ref document: US